london trip 4 tage

The perfect 4 days in London

How much of London can you really cover on a long weekend? Quite a lot, actually. Explore art and artifacts at famous museums, marvel at UNESCO World Heritage Sites, sample food at the city’s oldest street market, and drink plenty of pints at historic pubs. Throw in a few lines of Shakespeare (at the Globe Theatre, no less), a red phone booth (they’re everywhere), and a rainy day (almost a given), and your London checklist will be complete.

Our itinerary packs in as much as possible without running you ragged, grouping activities together by location. Plus we’ve added lunch and dinner stops, so you can sightsee with your fork (think classic English food like fish and chips). And to make sure you don’t waste a single second, we’ve used Tripadvisor reviews and ratings to hit the London hotspots that real-life travelers love most.

MORNING: A taste of royalty

Prioritize an essential London experience by heading to Buckingham Palace first thing to watch the changing of the guard , which typically starts at 10:45 a.m. (It’s every other day in some seasons and can be earlier on the weekends, so be sure to double-check the schedule online.)

The best vantage point is from the Buckingham Palace Gates, but you’ll need to get here some 90 minutes early (especially in busy summer months) to score a good spot. If you’re running late or not feeling the wait, locate an easier-to-come-by spot along The Mall. After the guards march past, follow them over to Buckingham Palace to catch what you can of the ceremony through the crowds.

AFTERNOON: Iconic London in a Gothic mode

By 11:45 a.m. the changing of the guards is complete, so snap pics of the palace and then head out with the crowds to amble your way through St. James Park , the city’s oldest royal park, toward Two Chairman Public House , a charming 18th-century pub with classic English dishes. You’ll get there around noon, right when it opens. (Tripadvisor users rave about the steak and ale pie here.)

Once you’ve rested your legs and refueled, take the five-minute walk to Westminster Abbey , a stunning gothic cathedral and UNESCO World Heritage Site (together with Westminster Palace, which is right around the corner). The Abbey gets busy, so book a timed ticket ahead to ensure a spot inside. For a small extra fee, you can also visit The Queen's Diamond Jubilee Galleries , a small gallery that gives you a bird’s eye view of the abbey. Expect to spend at least 45-minutes marveling, though some visitors spend as much as two hours scouting out the famous figures buried here (e.g. Charles Dickens, Stephen Hawkins, Henry VII) and taking in all the ornamental sculptures and stained glass.

Exit the Abbey, and walk around the corner to Westminster Bridge, which extends over the Thames River and offers an epic view of several top attractions. We’re talking the London Eye , an enormous Ferris wheel with city views, and Westminster Palace (the House of Parliament) with its attached clocktower, aka Big Ben (though technically , Big Ben is the bell inside). Get there at the top of the hour to hear it chime.

If you managed a quick trip to the Abbey, you might even squeeze in an extra attraction. We recommend either taking a spin on the London Eye for an epic—if pricey—view of London or a visit to the Churchill War Rooms , once the underground command center for World War II and kinda literally one of London’s hidden gems. (Arrive by four, and you can still get in a solid two hours before the museum closes at 6 p.m.) Both are a quick walk from Westminster Bridge. As with other London attractions, the safest bet is to book tickets ahead online.

Travelers say: "I was so excited to finally get to see the [Queen’s Diamond Jubilee] Galleries, and was NOT disappointed! It’s kind of amazing to see the structural ‘insides’ of the Abbey, and the view ‘down below’ is spectacular… you also get unique views of the gargoyles on the buttresses. It was well worth the extra fiver!” — Kris M

WESTMINSTER TOURS OPTIONS

• Don’t want to shell out extra money for a guided tour? The Westminster Abbey audio tour, included with your entrance, is well-produced and packed with info. Download the app ahead of time, and BYO headphones.
• If navigating via Google maps exhausts you, this three-hour Westminster walking tour is basically a survey course on London attractions and includes entry into Westminster Abbey.
• History buffs who would prefer ending their tour of Westminster with Churchill than in a church will enjoy this walking tour, which closes out with a trip to Churchill’s War Rooms .
• The London Landmarks & Secret Gems Bike Ride + Historic Pub + Graffiti Session bike tour is fantastic and fun, taking riders all over Westminster and beyond. It also features a key pub stop in Covent Garden and some (legal) graffiti-making in a tunnel beloved by street artists.

EVENING: The show goes on

Take the 15- to 20-minute trip by tube or bus to Scarlett Green , where of course you’ve already booked a reservation for a 90-minute seating. This beloved Aussie restaurant balances a chic atmosphere with famed “bottomless” meals, including a stuff-yourself-silly dinner of either Aussie BBQ or vegan favorites, plus a cocktail and dessert.

Now, it’s show time! The West End Theater District is London’s answer to Broadway, and it delivers with plays, dance performances, opera, and hit musicals (expect new shows along with long-running classics like Lion King and Phantom of the Opera). If theater isn’t really your thing, 100 Club is an iconic basement venue where bands like the Kinks and Metallica have rocked out, plus it’s just around the corner from Scarlett Green. Make sure to book tickets in advance.

Worthy detours along the way

MORNING: English breakfast and two million years of human history

Fill up before a day of sightseeing at Salt & Pepper , which serves up a classic English Breakfast (bacon, eggs, and, yes, baked beans). It also has a handy location just a five-minute walk from The British Museum , your first stop of the day. This museum of human history, art, and culture is arguably London’s best, which means getting there early is a good strategy for heading off the crowds. (The museum opens at 10 a.m. daily; tickets are free and can be booked ahead, though you may be asked to donate.) Even half a day here isn’t enough to see it all, so make a beeline to the Rosetta Stone, then pick and choose which exhibits to explore. If deciding which of 80,000 artifacts to look at is overwhelming, just take a tour—many are free, though booking ahead is recommended.

Travelers say: "The British Museum is an absolute treasure box! What do you want to see? Ancient maps, Egyptian mummies, sculpture from Greece, the first printed Bible, original handwritten words to Beatles song, Shakespeare, the Magna Carta? All this and MORE! There is never enough time to see it all." —@ Dream6793

AFTERNOON: Light lunch and 700 years of European art

Bottomless meals and heavy English food weighing you down? Hop across the street for lunch at Bloomsbury Street Kitchen (open Wednesday through Saturday) which serves up outstanding Mediterranean and Japanese small plates.

Once you’ve refueled, pop on the Northern Line at Tottenham Court Road or take the 15-minute walk to Trafalgar Square , London’s most photographed square, thanks in part to the 145-foot-high Nelson’s Column.

Next up is The National Gallery , a free museum right on the square. It’s easy to spend two or three hours losing yourself in 2,000-plus Western European paintings from the 13th to the 20th century. Keep an eye out for Vermeer, Cezanne, van Gogh, Rembrandt, and other famous painters.

TRAFALGAR SQUARE TOUR OPTIONS

• Trade in an afternoon at The National Gallery for an afternoon exploring London’s under-the-radar attractions in the Secret Walking Tour of Central London , which starts and ends at Trafalgar Square and covers spots like a teeny, tiny police station.
• The Pub Tour of London’s West End: Trafalgar Square, Covent Garden and Soho is a neighborhood tour with a side of beer. The tour leads you to several historic pubs, passing major attractions along the way. We love that they cap the tours at 15 people, so you can get chummy with your drinking buddies.

EVENING: Fish, chips, and British pubs

There are plenty of dinner options near The National Gallery, but to really recover from a day of culture we recommend The Marquis , which serves up quintessential cozy pub charm and equally quintessential British dishes, like fish and chips. If it’s good enough for Charles Dickens, who was once a regular there, it’s good enough for us.

From here, amble your way around Covent Garden , a charming neighborhood that’s home to shops, street performers, pubs, and cafes. (Note that most stores in the area close at 8 p.m., so if shopping is a priority you may want to amble first, then eat.) Make your way north to Soho , the city’s nightlife neighborhood, which is home to the Red Light District and is also LGBTQ+ central. We love The French House , an authentic no-frills bar that was once a gathering point for the French Resistance during World War II.

MORNING: Tour some British treasures

If you picked up the tab on a few pub rounds last night, you’ll be happy to hear the Victoria and Albert Museum is 100 percent free. Even better, it doesn’t require booking ahead, so just wander over when you’re ready. (It opens at 10 a.m. if you want to avoid the crowds.) The V&A is the world’s largest museum of the decorative arts, home to prints and paintings, costumes and ceramics. Highlights include one of the world’s oldest and largest carpets and Tipu’s Tiger, an almost life-size statue of a tiger with a mechanical organ that mimics the cries of the person it’s attacking (though you may want to read up on its controversial history ).

AFTERNOON: Afternoon tea and a walk in the park(s)

Take the 10-minute walk to Harrods , London’s world-famous department store, situated in one of the city’s fanciest shopping districts. Here you can cross off another square on your London Bingo card with tea time— Harrods’ version is exceptional —complete with the required tiny sandwiches and scones. If you forgot to make a reservation or can’t pull off “smart casual” on a day of sightseeing, Harrods has plenty of other bars and restaurants for a pit stop. While you’re here, you may want to check out the wonderfully bizarre Egyptian Escalator, pick up some souvenirs, or visit the toy department, where you can nab the official Harrods’ version of a Paddington Bear plushie.

After tea, it’s just a five-minute walk north to Hyde Park , once Henry VIII’s hunting reserve. With dirt paths and grassy fields, it’s the perfect place to stroll, picnic, or people-watch, especially on sunny days. You might want to pass through Speakers’ Corner , which has quite the dramatic history. This used to be an execution spot where the condemned could say their last words. Later, figures like Karl Marx, Marcus Garvey, and George Orwell demonstrated here. Now it’s a monument to free speech—especially on Sunday, when anyone can pull out their soapbox.

Stroll over to the Serpentine Bridge to cross into Kensington Gardens , a carefully landscaped park, formerly the private gardens of Kensington Palace. While here, you can stop by Albert Memorial , a show-stopping monument to Prince Albert complete with a gilded canopy. Or opt for something a little less grand and more whimsical and visit the Peter Pan Statue , a tribute to author J.M. Barrie, who lived nearby.

KENSINGTON AREA TOUR OPTIONS:

• The Victoria & Albert Museum has loads of free tours daily. Look out for specialty tours (like one geared toward LGBTQ+ art), as well as the excellent Highlights Tour, which covers the V&A’s most popular exhibits in just 45 minutes.
• If your feet are tired, let your quads pick up the slack with this London Royal Parks Bike Tour . It covers major London attractions along with Hyde Park and Kensington Gardens.
• Trade out the usual tour bus for a 1960s double-decker bus with the London Vintage Bus Tour with Cream Tea at Harrods . Not only does this thorough half-day tour drive by a ton of major attractions, it includes a Thames River cruise and ends with tea and scones at Harrods.

EVENING: A meal with a side of history

Cut back across the park to Dinner by Heston Blumenthal , one of London’s Michelin-starred restaurants. Blumenthal’s big draw is a five-course set menu, which changes seasonally and highlights dishes from different eras in British history. If dining this fancy isn’t quite in the budget, scope out the la carte menu or opt for lunch instead. And if this spot is all booked up, try Marcus , another Michelin-star British restaurant, which is practically next door.

Extend the night at the Library Bar , a classy club-like cocktail bar famous for its cognacs. Bonus: It’s less than a 10-minute walk from dinner and sits right next to the Hyde Park Corner Underground station, making it convenient for end-of-night travel, especially if your hotel is on the Piccadilly Line.

Travelers say: “There are three meal 'experiences' you can select [at Dinner by Heston Blumenthal], which are essentially the following: Don't tell me anything about the food I want to be surprise;, tell me a little about what's in the dishes; or tell me everything—where the inspiration for the dish came from, where the ingredients came from, etc. We did the third because we were intrigued by the time periods that inspired the chef (recipes and meal pairings from thousands of years ago)…which made the night a magical evening.” — travelingss

MORNING: Ghosts from the past at the Tower of London

Word of warning: The Tower of London gets mobbed, so arrive right when it opens (9 or 10 a.m., depending on the day) to avoid the crowds, for a little while, anyway. This fascinating 11th-century fortress castle and UNESCO World Heritage Site is where, among other things, 16th-century queen Anne Boleyn was locked up and beheaded. (Supposedly, she is one of many ghosts that haunt the grounds.) While you’re here, don’t forget to check out the Crown Jewels.

TOWER OF LONDON/THAMES RIVER TOUR OPTIONS

• Beefeaters, aka the Tower of London guards (famously pictured on bottles of Beefeater Gin), give tours that are the stuff of legend —not to mention free with entry. Tours run every half hour; no need to book ahead.
• If you want to spend more time on water, the Thames Hop-On-Hop-Off River Cruise is an excellent option. Note that it stops at several sights already on this itinerary, so you’ll double up on some attractions.
• No way around it: The Tower of London gets packed. If it’s your priority, consider getting a skip-the-line, early access pass to the Tower, which also includes a tour and tickets for a river cruise.
• Lovers of true crime and the spooky stuff will enjoy this 60-75 minute Ghost Bus Tour of London . Bonus: You’ll be cruising around in a 1960s black double-decker bus as it passes by Tower of London, Fleet Street, and other iconic spots.

AFTERNOON: From a historic market to modern art

Head over to Tower Millennium Pier and take the RB1 “River Bus” to London Bridge City Pier, with the added benefit of a built-in (if brief) river cruise. From here, it’s a seven-minute walk to Borough Market , where food has been sold for over a thousand years. Today, along with fresh produce, there’s also street food in every direction. Check out the meat pies and paella, the bao buns and fish and chips, then choose whatever looks the most delicious.

Travelers say: “Borough Market is a prime destination for food lovers, and it has been in continuous operation since 1014 near London Bridge. […] From French cheeses, olives and bread to traditional English pies, Spanish paella, French confit duck, Asian curries… it perfectly reflects the melting pot identity of the city.… Don’t miss it.” — LonderGuide

Once you’ve filled up, take the five-minute walk to The Shard , which has the highest viewing deck in London. While entry is pricey and often sold out in advance, the views are epic, especially on sunny days when you can see out as many as 40 miles.

Next, take public transit or walk 15 minutes to the Tate Modern , known for its art from the early-1900s to the present. Entry to the regular gallery is free; no need to book ahead. But definitely take a sec to read up on the special exhibits. Yes, they cost extra and may require advanced booking, but their spectacular shows will earn you London bragging rights. Expect to spend at least an hour here hunting down Picassos and Dalis and discovering new artists, and add another hour if you’re touring a special exhibit.

EVENING: All’s well that ends well

Start your evening off with a dinner at Swan at the Globe , a chic modern restaurant offering seasonal British dishes and classy cocktails, just a few minutes’ walk from the Tate. An added bonus: It has a great view over the Thames and St. Paul’s Cathedral , which means you’ll cross yet another attraction off your London sightseeing safari.

Then head next door for a play at Shakespeare’s Globe Theatre , a full-size reproduction of the famous playwright’s original open-air theater. (When you book tickets ahead, make sure they’re for The Globe; it’s easy to accidentally book tickets to The Sam Wanamaker Playhouse instead.) Standing room tickets on the floor are super cheap and super fun—it’s like you’re watching a production back in the 1600s. But after a full day of sightseeing, we understand if you want to rest your feet and sit on a bench. (If you do, spring the extra pound for a cushion.) Even in an open-air theater, the show must go on, as they say, so if the weather looks iffy bring a raincoat (umbrellas aren’t allowed) and enjoy a truly British experience: Shakespeare in the rain.

Know Before You Go

London is bright and bustling June through August, with weather in the mid-70s (though heat waves are getting a bit more common). While May and September are a bit cooler, their budding flowers or falling leaves are a bonus, plus there are fewer crowds. November through February are cool, dark, and even rainier than usual, but travel and hotel rates can be at their cheapest. Dark days are a bit cheerier from mid-November through December, when the city is dotted with Christmas markets, ice skating rinks, and epic holiday lights.

As a global capital, London tends to keep open hours the whole week long. Most museums are open regular hours seven days a week, though church-related sights are often closed on Sundays. Shops tend to open a little later Sundays, around noon, and some restaurants are closed Sundays and/or Mondays.

Museums and shops in London open around 10, with museums typically closing at 5 or 6 and shops at 7 or 8. Restaurants tend to be open from noon to 9 p.m., though some close between 3 and 5 to make the transition from lunch to dinner. Despite the fact that most Londoners aim for afternoon tea in the hours of 2 to 4 p.m., high-end venues will take reservations for tea time anywhere from 11 a.m. to 6 p.m. to max out reservations. Pubs tend to open around noon. And don’t expect to do a pub crawl into the late hours—they actually close “early” compared to cocktail bars, usually around 11 p.m.

Covent Garden : Smack-dab in the middle of the action and featured at the end of our Day Two itinerary, Covent Garden is one of the most central locations in London. The Claremont, Charing Cross is an elegant 1865 hotel with chandeliers, marble columns, and a chic cocktail bar, just a few minutes’ walk from tube stops and Trafalgar Square and a 15- to 20-minute walk from both The British Museum and Westminster Abbey.

Westminster : You might not realize how close you are to London hotspots when you’re lounging in St. James’ Court, A Taj Hotel ’s classy courtyard with its own fountain, but it’s located right between Buckingham Palace and Westminster Abbey. With both the District Line and Circle Line a few minutes’ walk away at St. James Park, even the sights not right outside the front door will feel pretty close.

East End : OK, it’s not as central or scenic, but hotels in the East End are cheaper and closer to attractions like The Tower of London. Travelodge London City Hotel isn’t fancy, but it gets high ratings for covering the basics for a cheap price. Plus, it’s just a four-minute walk to the Circle Line, which means most of London is easily within reach.

Public transportation : The tube, aka London’s underground transit system, is wide-reaching, relatively simple, and always running, with 24/7 service on major lines. That said, trips can add up. A Day Travelcard includes unlimited trips on the tube, trams, and buses within most of central London, and it’s worth it for travelers making three or more trips a day. If you like to linger over your hotel buffet breakfast, an Off-Peak Travel card, which can be used after 9:30 a.m., is an even better deal. The Oyster card is also an option but requires a deposit fee so may not be worth it for shorter visits.

By bike : London is not as bike friendly as other European cities like Amsterdam and Copenhagen, though there are designated bike lanes in some areas, like the three-mile cycle route running along the river from the Tower of London to Big Ben. If you’re looking to pedal your way around the city, guided bike tours are a good option, such as one that covers London’s Royal Parks or another to see major attractions with stops for art-making and beer .

By taxi : London’s iconic black cabs are super cute, but a word of warning: They tend to be pricey, with fluctuating rates that depend on traffic. And that traffic can also inch along. As of this writing, the ride-share app Uber was running in London, but Lyft was not. London taxis also have their own app: Gett.

Airport transfers : London has six international airports, including City, Luton, Stansted, Southend, and, the two largest, Heathrow and Gatwick.

From Heathrow, the Piccadilly Line on the tube runs directly to Piccadilly Circus in 50 minutes. The faster option is the Heathrow Express rail line , which runs to Paddington Station in just 20 minutes. It’s more expensive than the tube, but it still beats taking a taxi, the priciest option by far and—thanks to traffic—often the slowest. Some hotels also offer hotel bus service—the Heathrow Hotel Hoppa, for example, makes trips to 25 hotels around the city and is as cheap as public transit.

From Gatwick Airport, the 30-minute Gatwick Express is by far the fastest option, running direct to Victoria Station. The ThamesLink train costs half as much but takes twice as long, though it runs to more stations, including Blackfriars, St. Pancras International, and London Bridge. Both depart every fifteen minutes during the day. Buses are the most time-consuming choice, departing hourly and taking at least 90 minutes depending on the stop and time of day. Through easyBus , the National Express runs a bus from Gatwick to Victoria Station for as little as two pounds, but be sure to book ahead online or it could cost as much as the train.

The Yogi Wanderer

Yoga & Wellness Travel

Join my newsletter

Sign up to my monthly newsletter and get a FREE RELAXATION / YOGANIDRA AUDIO FILE! You can unsubscribe at any time.

in Travel · UK

The Definitive 4 Day London Itinerary for 1st Timers

This post may contain affiliate links. I may earn a small commission if you click through them, at no extra cost to you.

Visiting London for the first time? Wondering what to see in London in 4 days? I’ve got you covered!

This 4 day London itinerary covers everything you’ll need to make the most of your time in the British capital.

From a day by day list of activities to tips on how to get around the city, the best places to eat and where to stay, this London 4 day itinerary will be your best travel companion.

London is definitely my kind of city: hectic, multicultural, creative, and always reinventing itself. It is posh and sophisticated but also rough and untamed.

I visited it twice already, and counting!

The first time I stayed for a whole week and hit all the top attractions, museums and parks. This was more than 10 years ago, but I still remember it fondly.

Last time, I spent 4 days in London with my boyfriend. It was his first time in the UK, so I ended up seeing many of the same places, but also explored some new neighborhoods and exciting areas.

The result is this 4 days in London itinerary to help you plan and enjoy your own trip to the UK’s capital.

• Top 15 Stunning Yoga Retreats in the UK

Table of Contents

The ultimate 4 day London itinerary for 1st timers:

How to get around london.

First things first: how to get around London without getting overwhelmed.

London has a great public transportation network and you can virtually get anywhere in the city with the tube or bus.

The easiest and cheapest way to travel on London public transport is by using your contactless debit or credit card and pay as you go.

Just swipe your bank card at the ticket barriers when entering and exiting the tube and when entering the bus, and you’re good to go.

Contactless payment is very convenient – no more waiting in line to buy a ticket – and makes you feel like a local.

At the end of each day, your card is charged for the total cost of the journeys you made that day. The fare is the same as Oyster cards, as well as the daily cap.

Contactless cards also have a 7-day cap from Monday to Sunday.

If you don’t have a contactless card or if your bank charges overseas transaction fees, your next best option is to buy an Oyster card.

A Visitor Oyster card has an activation fee of £5 and can be ordered online here and delivered to your home address before you travel to London.

If you decide to buy your Oyster card in London you’ll have to pay a £5 deposit, which you’ll get back in cash once you cancel the card.

If you’re staying in central London for 6 days or more, buying a 7-day Travelcard that you can load on your standard Oyster card (this option is not available for Visitor Oyster cards) can save you money.

The 7-day Travelcard costs exactly the same as the contactless card 7-day cap, but it can start any day of the week, while the contactless 7-day cap runs only from Monday to Sunday.

Ok, now that we’ve covered the basics of the London public transportation system, we’re ready to start exploring.

Pro tip: If you’re planning to visit two or more London attractions, you may also want to get the London Explorer Pass to save yourself time and money.

Day 1 – Hit the top attractions

Tower of london.

Start your four days in London by visiting the city’s top attractions.

Among them, the Tower of London stands out as one of its most important monuments.

Dating back to the 11 th century, the tower, which is actually a fortress, is a great introduction to the history of London.

It had many uses over the years, from palace and royal residence to prison and site of execution.

Today it’s home to the Crown Jewels and the Royal Armories, and one of the most visited sights in London.

Arrive early to beat the crowds and watch the unlocking of the tower ceremony that takes place daily at 9 am.

You can buy your ticket to the Tower of London here.

Tower Bridge

Just a short walk from the Tower of London, Tower Bridge is an iconic symbol of London and another must-see.

Built between 1886 and 1894, this beautiful bascule bridge over the River Thames is one of the most famous bridges in the world.

The Tower Bridge Exhibition tells the story of the building, including a visit to the old steam engines now replaced by electricity.

The upper glass floor walkways offer panoramic views of London, as well as a unique perspective of the bridge and the river below.

Cross the Thames and stroll along London’s South Bank for the best views over Tower Bridge and the city’s skyline.

Besides gorgeous views, South Bank offers a great peek into London’s fascinating street life.

It’s one of my favorite walks in London.

I love wandering through its food markets and book fairs, admiring the street art, watching the street performers, and just taking in the vibrant energy of the area.

Millennium Bridge

Inaugurated in 2000, the modern Millennium Bridge is the youngest of the many bridges crossing the River Thames.

Made of steel, this beautiful pedestrian bridge connects the Tate Modern, in the South Bank, with the City and St. Paul’s Cathedral, in the North Bank.

St. Paul’s Cathedral

The remarkable St. Paul’s Cathedral is one of the most impressive buildings in London.

It is the most important and largest church in the city and the second-largest in the country.

Its dome dominates London’s skyline and is one of the highest in the world.

Over more than 300 years, this majestic cathedral has witnessed many state funerals and royal celebrations, including the wedding of Prince Charles and Princess Diana.

St. Paul’s Cathedral’s outstanding interior and the 360-degree views of London make it well worthy of a visit.

You can buy discounted fast-track entrance tickets to St. Paul’s Cathedral here.

Back to the South Bank, enjoy a ride on the London Eye for some breathtaking views of the city.

The London Eye is the tallest Ferris wheel in Europe and the second-highest viewpoint in London, after The Shard, so you’re bound to have an exciting and fun experience.

It’s also the most popular paid tourist attraction in the whole of the UK.

Make sure to buy your tickets in advance to avoid waiting in line.

Book your ticket to the London Eye here and avoid the lines.

Houses of Parliament

The sight of the magnificent Palace of Westminster, home to the Houses of Parliament and the famous Big Ben, is impossible to miss from the South Bank.

This sumptuous neo-Gothic style palace is one of the best-known buildings in the world and the epicenter of British political life.

It is the seat of the House of Commons and the House of Lords, the two chambers of the Parliament of the UK.

But its most famous feature is the clock tower commonly named Big Ben.

At the time of my visit, the tower was undergoing maintenance work (which was expected to continue until 2020) and was completely covered except for its clock.

But don’t let this put you off visiting this spectacular palace.

You can take a tour of the building or, even better, watch a debate when the Parliament is in session (free of charge).

Book your tour of the Parliament here or check the Parliamentary calendar here .

Westminster Abbey

End your first day in London in another one of its most prominent landmarks.

Westminster Abbey was one of the places that impressed me the most on my first visit to London.

As beautiful as rich in history, the church has a special aura about it.

It is the place of coronation for all British monarchs since the 11 th century. The Coronation Chair, dating back to the early 14 th century, can be seen here at the Lady Chapel.

Most monarchs until the 18 th century were also buried at Westminster Abbey, as well as many national figures, from writers like Geoffrey Chaucer and Charles Dickens, to scientists such as Isaac Newton, Charles Darwin, and, more recently, Stephen Hawking.

Over the centuries, 16 royal weddings were celebrated here, the last of which was in 2011 between Prince William and Kate Middleton.

You can buy your Westminster Abbey entrance ticket here (with free cancellation).

Day 2 – Royal and political London

Changing of the guard at buckingham palace.

On your second day in London, wake up early and get ready for a quintessential London experience.

The Changing of the Guard takes place every Monday, Wednesday, Friday, and Sunday at 11 am, on the forecourt of Buckingham Palace, the official residence of Queen Elizabeth II.

The ceremony, which includes Foot Guards in red uniforms and bearskin hats and an accompanying musical band, lasts around 45 minutes and is very popular.

Arrive at least 30 minutes earlier to get a good spot.

I need to be honest here and tell you I found the whole thing a little too long and boring, and Buckingham Palace a bit underwhelming, at least from the outside (I didn’t visit inside).

But this is one of those experiences you need to have at least once.

The Changing of the Guard is free of charge.

You can get a ticket to the Queen’s Gallery at Buckingham Palace here.

St James’s Park

Next, have a pause at St James’s Park, one of the four royal parks that spread around Buckingham Palace.

St James’s Park is one of the loveliest London parks.

Its lake is home to ducks, geese, swans, and even some pelicans.

Rent a deckchair and enjoy the wildlife and the views of the city.

Please be a conscientious traveler and do not feed the wildlife. This may seem like a harmless thing to do, but it can really make the birds sick and destroy their ecosystem. So please, don’t.

No 10 Downing Street

From St James’s Park, head to Whitehall.

This street connecting Parliament Square to Trafalgar Square is considered UK’s political center.

Many government departments and ministries have their address here, as well as several memorials and monuments.

Make sure to take a peek at No 10 Downing Street, the official and famous residence of the British prime minister, and at the next door Cabinet Office.

Trafalgar Square

Trafalgar Square is London’s most important and vibrant square.

It’s also the best spot in London for people and city watching.

I love sitting here after a walk through the city and watching the world go by.

The square is a meeting point for street performers, sports celebrations, political protests, festivals, and Christmas and New Year’s Eve festivities.

So there’s always something going on here any time of the year.

The National Gallery, one of the biggest and most visited art museums in the world, is also located here.

I visited it during my first time in London and can’t recommend it enough.

Admission is free for all London public museums, including the National Gallery.

Covent Garden

The colorful Covent Garden district is a hub for shopping, food, and entertainment.

It’s easy to spend hours here browsing the high-end boutiques and independent stores, eating and drinking in one of the many restaurants, pubs, and bars, or seeing a musical in London .

If you’re short on time head to the lively Covent Garden Piazza, the central square where street performers vie for attention and an old fruit and vegetable market is now a popular shopping center and craft fair.

Chinatown and Soho

End your day with dinner in Chinatown and a drink in the bohemian Soho.

London’s Chinatown may not be as big as New York’s or overwhelming as Bangkok’s, but it’s certainly worthy of a visit.

Soho is London’s most famous nightlife district. The area is home to world-class restaurants and some of the best bars and clubs in the UK capital.

Piccadilly Circus

Before going to bed, make one last stop at the nearby Piccadilly Circus to admire the famous video and neon signs.

During the day, Piccadilly is one of London’s busiest squares and traffic junctions.

After dark, its proximity to many theatres and nightlife areas makes it a popular gathering point for people of all ages.

I must confess Piccadilly Circus impressed me much more when I first visited London in 2005.

Over the years, the number of advertising signs has been decreasing due to higher rental prices, and now only one building has them.

Nevertheless, it remains an emblematic and mandatory place to visit in London.

Day 3 – Go shopping

Notting hill.

The third of your 4 days London itinerary starts at one of the most picturesque and Instagrammable London neighborhoods: Notting Hill.

The cute pastel houses, trendy shops, and charming pubs look like straight out of a movie set. And in fact, they were, more than once.

Spend your morning strolling along Portobello Road, shopping at the famous Portobello Market, and visiting famous film locations, like the romantic bookstore that inspired the 1999 movie with Julia Roberts and Hugh Grant.

Saturday is when Portobello Market is at its best, but Notting Hill is lovely any day of the week.

The district is also famous for the iconic Electric Cinema, the oldest cinema in the UK, and Notting Hill Carnival, which takes place annually on the last weekend of August.

If you’d like to explore Notting Hill like a local and learn more about the area, I highly recommend taking a walking tour with a local expert guide .

Oxford Street

In the afternoon, head to Oxford Street for some more shopping.

With more than 300 stores, Oxford Street is London’s major shopping avenue and the busiest commercial street in all of Europe.

You can’t leave London without visiting this shopper’s paradise and spending some money here.

End your shopping excursion at Liberty, the most beautiful department store in London.

Located in a Tudor-style house, the upscale Liberty is, however, as charming as expensive.

But the unique atmosphere and gorgeous goods are worth the visit itself.

I’m not much of a shopper myself but I loved this place so much and couldn’t resist buying a thing or two from the beauty section as a souvenir.

Day 4 – Explore the East End

Columbia road.

Dedicate your last day in London to exploring the alternative and multicultural East End.

Start at the picturesque Columbia Road and admire the Victorian buildings and the bright wooden shop facades.

On Sundays, the popular Columbia Road Flower Market takes over this otherwise quiet street with hundreds of plants, colors, perfumes, and a lot of fun.

Brick Lane is famous for its curry houses and multiethnic immigrant population that settled here over the centuries.

Also known as Banglatown, it is the center of the Bangladeshi community in London, which explains the many curry restaurants you can find along this street sometimes called the UK’s curry capital.

Brick Lane Great Mosque, which was over time a church, a Methodist chapel, and a synagogue, is another testimony of this multicultural past.

Today, Brick Lane attracts also a young and artsy crowd, with its street art, galleries, nightclubs, and vintage markets every Sunday.

From the birthplace of the hipster subculture in the early 2000s to the creative and tech hub that is today, Shoreditch surely remains one of the coolest London neighborhoods.

Street art and art galleries, quirky bars and trendy restaurants, independent boutiques and vintage shops, tech startups and popular nightclubs, co-working spaces, and the world’s first pop-up mall (the Boxpark) make up the vibrant atmosphere of Shoreditch.

This was my first time in Shoreditch and I absolutely loved it.

I definitely recommend spending some time here shopping, eating, drinking, or just enjoying the district’s unique energy.

Another great option is to join a street art walking tour of Shoreditch and Brick Lane to see some Banksy murals, among many other artists.

Tate Modern

End your day at the Tate Modern, one of the largest and most popular modern art museums in the world.

Located in the South Bank, in a former power station, the Tate Modern has an impressive collection of more than 60 thousand art pieces, including works by Andy Warhol, Picasso, Matisse, or Salvador Dali.

The permanent collection is on constant rotation, meaning that even if you’re visiting for a second time like I was, you’ll always be surprised by something new.

The terrace on the top floor offers stunning panoramic views of London and is just one more reason to visit the museum.

Admission to the permanent exhibition and the viewing deck is free of charge.

If you have more time in London:

Madame tussauds.

I know it’s cheesy, but I always have a lot of fun at Madame Tussauds wax museum.

I love taking pictures with all the celebrities and this time was particularly impressed with the Star Wars experience and the 4D movie.

Book your ticket here and skip the lines.

Regent’s Park

Right next to Madame Tussauds, Regent’s Park is a beautiful green area including the lovely Regent’s Canal, a central lake, sports pitches, Queen Mary’s Gardens, and an open-air theatre.

It’s also a great place to roll out your yoga mat and practice amidst nature.

Camden Town

Located in North London, Camden is a lively and captivating district whether day or night.

Camden Market is one of the top attractions here.

Recommended places to eat in London

So restaurant, soho.

We ate here on our first night in London with our friend Chiaki, a Japanese journalist based in the UK’s capital.

According to her, So Restaurant is one of the best and most authentic Japanese restaurants in London.

I’m no specialist, but I can tell you everything was absolutely delicious.

And I even learned to eat sushi the proper way: with my hands and not with chopsticks.

Forge & Co, Shoreditch

This restaurant slash bar slash coworking space conquered us with its delicious food, friendly staff, and laid-back atmosphere.

We had the lunch menu and really loved the food and local feel.

This is the perfect place to take a peek into Shoreditch local life.

Borough Market, South Bank

Borough Market is the oldest and best food market in London.

From fresh fruit, vegetables, meat, and fish, to cheese, pastry, and street food from all over the world, this place is a foodie’s paradise.

The full market is open from Wednesday to Saturday, with Saturday being the busiest day. On Mondays and Tuesdays, only a limited market takes place.

Monohon Ramen, Old Street

This unpretentious ramen restaurant in the East End was another recommendation from our friend Chiaki.

She has been living in London for a year now and considers this to be the best ramen place in the city.

This was my first ramen experience, and I surely couldn’t have asked for a better start. I’ve had ramen again since then, but nothing that compares to the quality of the one I ate here.

Highly recommended!

Canela, Covent Garden

We found this place by chance and were pleasantly surprised.

Canela is a small and cozy Portuguese restaurant in the heart of Covent Garden.

They serve classic Portuguese dishes with a modern and sophisticated touch.

We had mushrooms filled with chorizo and fresh herbs topped with São Jorge (Azores) cheese, traditional smoked game sausage with fried quail eggs, and Canela’s classic salt cod, potato, egg, and salad.

As a Portuguese myself, I can guarantee you everything was just perfect!

Afternoon Tea

Afternoon tea is a quintessential London experience and you can’t possibly visit the British capital without indulging in this delicious treat.

You can go for high tea in almost every hotel and many restaurants and bakeries around the city. If you’re a vegan or vegetarian, there are also several great options for a vegan afternoon tea in London .

Where to stay in London

The east london hotel.

This stylish hotel located in Bethnal Green, within walking distance from trendy Shoreditch and just a short tube ride from central London, is perfect for those who want to stay close to all the action.

Recently inaugurated, The East London Hotel offers great value for money in one of London’s most vibrant areas.

Some rooms are on the small side, but you probably won’t spend much time inside anyway.

There’s also a restaurant and cocktail bar on-site.

Click here for more info and booking.

The Resident Soho

The Resident Soho is an affordable luxury boutique hotel situated in the heart of another exciting London district: Soho.

The hotel is also just a 2-minute walk from Oxford Street, the city’s main shopping artery.

Close to all the top attractions and to some of the best shops, restaurants, bars, and clubs in London, this 4-star hotel offers comfortable and spacious design rooms, with an en-suite bathroom and free wi-fi.

If you’re looking for smart luxury combined with a great location, look no further.

What to do in London for 4 days, where to eat, and where to stay – this detailed itinerary covers it all. Now all you need to do is pack your bags and go.

From my side, I promise it won’t take me another decade to get back to London!

More travel tips

Travel insurance.

SafetyWing – Travel insurance is very important and you should never leave home without it! I use and recommend SafetyWing travel medical insurance for travelers, remote workers, and nomads.

They cover overseas medical assistance in case of accident or illness, travel delay or interruption, lost checked luggage, emergency medical or political evacuation, natural disasters, and personal liability, at very competitive prices.

You can subscribe online here for a minimum of 5 days to a maximum of 364 days, or opt for a monthly subscription instead.

Cheap flights

Looking for the best airfare deals?  Skyscanner  is my favorite travel search engine for finding cheap flights around the world. They also offer  price tracking and alerts  to help you secure the best deals.

Accommodation

When it comes to accommodation,  Booking.com is the best site out there. From hotels to apartments, resorts, villas, B&B, and guest houses, it offers the best prices for accommodation all over the world. I book the majority of my stays through them.

Yoga Retreats

Looking for a yoga retreat near home or in an exotic destination?  BookYogaRetreats  offers the best yoga retreats, holidays, and courses around the world for all budgets and levels of experience.

GetYourGuide is my favorite platform for local tours, unique experiences, and skip-the-line tickets to attractions all around the world.

Klook  is another great resource for tours and activities, especially if you’re looking for things to do in Asia.

Car Rentals

Rentalcars.com  is a car rental search engine that compares the biggest brands in car hire and allows you to find the cheapest deals all around the world.

Have you been to London? What would you add to this 4 day London itinerary? Share in the comments section below!

• 3 Days in Lisbon: The Ultimate Lisbon Itinerary by a Local
• Paris 4 Day Itinerary for First-Timers
• Zagreb Itinerary: How to Spend 4 Days in Zagreb, Croatia
• Budapest 4 Day Itinerary for 1st Timers

If you like it, Pin it!

About Vanda

I'm a Portuguese journalist and certified yoga teacher born in the Azores but Lisboner at heart. After 10 years as an expat in Switzerland, I now travel the world full-time as a digital nomad, with 27 countries and 5 continents under my belt and counting. I share wellness and yoga-friendly travel advice based on my own experience and knowledge.

join my newsletter

Sign up to my newsletter and get access to exclusive stories, tips, and advice, plus a FREE RELAXATION / YOGANIDRA AUDIO FILE!

I only send out my newsletter about once a month and you can unsubscribe at any time. See my privacy policy for more information on how I take care of your personal data.

Michelle says

January 19, 2019 at 10:33 am

These are such great suggestions thank you. I just returned from London and now wish I had found these suggestions before going, definitely feel I missed out and now I know for sure I did! Haven’t heard of South Bank, I can see through your pics why it’s one of your fav walks – would love to see it next time we go 🙂

Let’s Connect

Looking for something.

Turn your dream vacation into reality

4 Days in London (Itinerary + Best Afternoon Tea)

• February 23, 2024

A complete itinerary for 4 days in London (+ a map with all must-see places, the best Afternoon Tea experience and how to skip the lines at Westminster Abbey and the Tower of London).

Situated on the River Thames, London is the largest city and the capital of England. Founded in 50 AD by the Romans, London is now a vibrant and multicultural place with thousands of years of history. It is also the seat of the British royal dynasty.

In 1777, the writer Samuel Johnson said – “When a man is tired of London he is tired of life”. And it is still true today! With its countless attractions, world-class museums, royal palaces and beautiful parks, London is one of the most popular cities to visit in the world.

Best 4-day London Itinerary

Planning a trip to London can be a bit overwhelming, especially for first-time visitors. It’s a huge city with plenty to see and do! The capital of the United Kingdom features more than a dozen must-see attractions, including Buckingham Palace, Westminster Abbey, Big Ben and Tower Bridge.

In order to help you plan your stay, I’ve prepared this extensive London itinerary for 3 to 4 days. It covers the city’s most famous attractions and historical sites, plus some great restaurants and hotel recommendations. You’ll also find my favourite places for afternoon tea!

4 Days in London Itinerary (for first-timers)

• Day 1: Westminster Cathedral, Buckingham Palace, The British Museum
• Day 2: Westminster Abbey, Palace of Westminster, Big Ben, London Eye, Afternoon tea at Ham Yard Hotel
• Day 3: Tower Bridge, Tower of London, St. Paul’s Cathedral, Sky Garden
• Day 4: Windsor Castle, Soho and Covent Garden, Thames River Cruise

In my opinion, spending around 4 days in London is just the right amount of time. This timeframe allows you to explore all key attractions without feeling too rushed. You’ll be able to take a day trip to Windsor Castle or Hampton Court Palace as well. However, if you’re short on time, I’ve outlined some ideas for experiencing London in 2 or 3 days after the 4-day itinerary.

Tips on your 4-day London itinerary

Accommodation – already have a hotel booked? Then check your hotel’s location and make sure it’s in a good area (see my guide on where to stay in London ).

My favourite place to stay in London : Apex Temple Court Hotel Why : great central location, walking distance to metro and bus stops What I like : spacious quiet rooms with very comfy beds

Restaurants – if you want to dine at a particular restaurant, make a reservation, especially for Fridays and Saturdays. It is very difficult to get a table even during the week.

How to skip the lines – the capital of England is one of the most popular tourist destinations in the world, so there is no true low season. So my best tip is to either buy the London Pass (free entry to over 80 attractions) or book skip-the-line tickets individually for each attraction. In this way, you won’t waste hours waiting in line.

Free museums – if you’re a museum person, you’ll love the fact that a lot of the museums in London are free. There is no entrance fee to visit the famous British Museum, the National Gallery, Victoria and Albert Museum and many others.

Map – find here a map of this 4-day itinerary for London (with all attractions and restaurants’ websites).

Money – some places like museum shops and bakeries could be cashless (accept only card or mobile payments), so make sure to have a functional credit or debit card.

4 Days in London itinerary – Day 1

Breakfast at chestnut bakery belgravia.

08:20 AM – 09:00 AM

Start your first day of this 4-day London itinerary with breakfast at Chestnut Bakery. This bakery, located in the heart of the Belgravia district, is my favourite one in all of London! Note that they also have a second branch in Covent Garden (in case the location is more convenient for you).

Pastries are amazing, especially the croissants! I loved the croque monsieur croissant and the pistachio and raspberry croissant.

Buckingham Palace

09:30 AM – 12:00 PM

Buckingham Palace is one of the most famous sites in London. It is the residence of the reigning sovereign of the United Kingdom and where the Changing of the Guard Ceremony takes place.

Originally, the palace was built for the Duke of Buckingham in 1703. In 1761 King George III acquired it as a private residence for Queen Charlott. The palace was remodelled and enlarged (three new wings were constructed) several times during the 19th century. Since 1837, Buckingham Palace has been the London residence of the British monarch. The first monarch to reside here was Queen Victoria.

The palace is open to visitors during the months of July, August and September. You can tour the 19 magnificent State Rooms, furnished with some of the greatest treasures from the Royal Collection. You’ll need between 1h30min and 2 hours to see everything.

Booking in advance is recommended (tickets are timed-entry and often sold out). Entry ticket : Skip-the-line Buckingham Palace (free cancellation up to 24 hours)

The Changing of the Guard ceremony takes place at 11:00 AM on Monday, Wednesday, Friday, Sunday and daily in the summer. It lasts about 40min and it’s free to attend. I’d recommend you show up at least 15min before the beginning to get a good viewing spot. Please note that the ceremony may be cancelled last minute due to bad weather ( see the schedule here ).

To get closer to the action and learn more about the ceremony and the royal family, join this Changing of the Guard Walking Tour .

If you are not interested in the Changing of the Guard ceremony or the palace is closed during the time of your visit, skip it. Choose another attraction nearby instead (see other options further in the post).

Lunch at Queens of Mayfair

12:00 PM – 01:30 PM

For lunch head to Queens of Mayfair , a great place for brunch. The menu is focused on seasonal produce and the coffee is excellent! Try The Royal Fungus (forest mushrooms with scrambled eggs and black truffle) or The Royal breakfast.

Another option for lunch is Victoria House Coffee & Food . It is located away from Buckingham Palace, but just a short walk from the next attraction of this London itinerary. Victoria House Coffee & Food is a great place to try traditional English brunch. The Avo Bonus Breakfast and the Protein Breakfast were very delicious!

As London is full of awesome brunch spots, I’ll share with you one more option for lunch. I found this great place, Drury 188-189 , during my last trip to London. I absolutely loved their Eggs Benedict and the fact that you can customize your avocado toast.

The British Museum

02:00 PM – 04:00 PM

The British Museum features one of the largest collections of history and art inside its walls. It was established in 1753 with the private collections of Sir Hans Sloane, Robert Harley and Sir Robert Cotton. Today the museum houses about 8 million objects in its permanent collection! Some of the highlights include the Rosetta Stone, Parthenon sculptures, the Mummy of Katebet, the Aztec serpent and many more.

Entrance is free, but if you’re visiting in the high season it is recommended to book a timeslot for your visit . To see all the highlights and learn about the history of the museum and the objects, you can opt for a guided tour of the British Museum .

Dinner at Honest Burgers Holborn

For some of the best burgers in London, head to Honest Burgers Holborn . Try the Tribute Burger (if you’re a beef lover) or Buffalo Burger (if you prefer chicken) with Rosemary salted chips.

Another awesome burger place is Fat Hippo . They are famous for their dirty fries and offer an amazing selection of chicken burgers (besides the regular ones with beef).

London by Night Sightseeing Bus Tour

To discover the city’s most iconic landmarks lit up against the night sky, join this London by Night Sightseeing Bus Tour . You’ll see the famous Big Ben, the London Eye, Tower Bridge, the fountains of Trafalgar Square and the neon screens of Piccadilly Circus.

More ideas for 4 days in London – Day 1

Westminster cathedral.

The beautiful Westminster Cathedral is often overlooked in favour of the nearby Westminster Abbey. Completed in 1903 in neo-Byzantine style, it is made almost entirely of brick. The cathedral is the largest Catholic church in the UK and the seat of the Archbishop of Westminster.

Don’t miss to take a look inside – the interior is decorated with stunning mosaics and more than 100 different varieties of marble!

St. James’s Park

Opposite Buckingham Palace, you’ll find St. James’s Park. This is the place with the most friendly squirrels in all of London, so don’t forget to bring a bag of nuts. There are also lots of ducks and swans. A perfect place to escape the busy city for a little while.

The National Gallery

The National Gallery is located right on the famous Trafalgar Square. It houses a rich collection of over 2,300 paintings dating from the 13th century to 1900. You’ll have the chance to see original works by Monet, Van Gogh, Leonardo da Vinci, Michaelangelo, Rembrandt and many more.

4 Days in London itinerary – Day 2

Breakfast at royal artisan bakery.

Start your second day with breakfast at Royal Artisan Bakery . It’s a lovely bakery with an excellent range of baked goods and desserts from artisan sourdough bread.

Westminster Abbey

09:30 AM – 11:00 AM

Westminster Abbey is one of the most famous churches in England. Its history dates back as far as 960 AD. The magnificent Gothic church we see today was constructed by Henry III between 1245 and 1272.

Westminster Abbey is the coronation and burial site for English and British monarchs, starting with the coronation of William the Conqueror in 1066. 30 kings and queens are buried here, among them Edward the Confessor, Elizabeth I, Mary, Queen of Scots and King Henry V.

Booking in advance is recommended (tickets are timed-entry and often sold out) Entry ticket : Skip-the-line Westminster Abbey (free cancellation up to 24 hours)

Some of the abbey’s highlights are the Coronation Chair (in St. George’s Chapel), the High Altar, the Quire Screen, Poets’ Corner, and the Queen’s Window.

If you have additional time, you can take a look at the Queen’s Diamond Jubilee Galleries as well (entrance via the new Weston Tower). The galleries tell the thousand-year history of the abbey through historic art, relics and historical documents. Note, that there is an additional fee to visit the galleries and tickets are timed entry.

Palace of Westminster and Big Ben

11:00 AM – 12:00 PM

Big Ben is the city’s most iconic landmark. The tower is part of the Palace of Westminster, also known as the House of Parliament.

Actually, Big Ben is not the real name of the tower. It is the name of the bell located inside of it. The tower itself is called Elizabeth Tower after Queen Elizabeth II. Big Ben stands at a height of 96 meters (315 feet) and features 4 clocks on each face of the tower.

You can visit Big Ben only on a guided tour , lasting for approximately 90 minutes. You will have the opportunity to reach the top of the tower where the Great Bell hangs. However, do keep in mind that you need to climb the 334-step spiral stairwell to the top.

The Palace of Westminster is where the House of Lords and House of Commons meet (the two houses of Parliament of the United Kingdom). The original 11th-century palace was destroyed by fire in 1834 and later rebuilt in the Gothic Revival style. The building as we see it today was completed in 1860.

It is possible to visit the House of Parliament, but only on certain days (usually Saturdays). That’s why I didn’t include a visit to the palace in this 4 days itinerary for London. Still, if this is on your list, you’ll have enough time to do it. You just need to book in advance your Palace of Westminster tour here (self-guided or on a guided tour).

The best views of the palace and Big Ben can be captured across the Thames River.

12:00 PM – 01:00 PM

London Eye was completed in 1999 and since then has been the city’s most popular attraction. The 135m (443 feet) tall Ferris wheel features an incredible panoramic view over the whole of London.

The wheel turns very slowly, so you can easily enjoy the stunning views from the glass capsules (each of them weighing 10 tons). The ride takes approximately 30 minutes.

Booking in advance is recommended (tickets are timed-entry and often sold out) Entry ticket : Skip-the-line London Eye (free cancellation up to 24 hours)

Afternoon tea at Ham Yard Hotel

You can’t go to London and not have afternoon tea! It’s one of the most unique British experiences.

The Afternoon tea is a 19th-century tradition. It all started with Anna, the seventh Duchess of Bedford in 1840. She always got hungry in the afternoons (who doesn’t), so she usually asked for some tea with cakes to be delivered to her rooms. This quickly turned into a habit and soon her friends followed her. Half a century later, the Afternoon tea was a popular social event.

Today, the tea is usually served between 12:00 PM and 04:00 PM. Food consists of several types of fresh finger sandwiches, homemade cakes and pastries and scones with clotted cream and preserves. The dress code is smart casual or formal, depending on the venue. So before booking a table, always check in advance the dress code.

There are hundreds of places serving Afternoon tea in London, ranging from stylish tea rooms and luxury hotels to tea shops and restaurants. I did quite a bit of research before finally choosing the Ham Yard Hotel . I liked the atmosphere, the food was excellent and the dress code – smart casual, so there was no need to bring an additional outfit and shoes just for the event.

Also, make a reservation well in advance (for the popular places even 2-3 months in advance). I was visiting in the autumn and a few of the restaurants were fully booked for months in advance.

My other advice is as the Afternoon tea could be an expensive experience (between £30-£80 per person), book it instead of a lunch or an early dinner.

Here are some other great places for Afternoon tea (besides Ham Yard Hotel):

• Oscar Wilde Lounge at Café Royal
• The Palm Court at The Sheraton
• Grand Mirror Room at Rosewood
• The Foyer & Reading Room at Claridge’s
• Thames Foyer at The Savoy
• Dalloway Terrace at the Bloomsbury Hotel
• The Chesterfield Mayfair Hotel
• The Rubens at the Palace

Dinner at Berenjak

For dinner make your way to Berenjak . This Persian restaurant, located in Soho, has a Michelin Bib Gourmand. Berenjak offers a menu, which reinterprets the flavours of Tehran’s hole-in-the-wall kabab houses. The hummus was the best I’ve ever tried, and the Jujeh Kabab and Kabab Koobideh were excellent!

It’s a small and very popular restaurant, so make a reservation at least 1-2 months in advance. If it’s fully booked, consider arriving at least 40 minutes before the opening times to secure a table. They typically set aside some seats at the counter for walk-ins.

More ideas for 4 days in London – Day 2

Churchill war rooms.

If you’re interested in WW2, a visit to Churchill War Rooms is a must. The museum occupies the British government command centre throughout the Second World War and it comprises two sections – the Cabinet War Rooms and the Churchill Museum.

The Cabinet War Rooms allows visitors to explore the huge underground bunker from where Winston Churchill directed the war effort during World War 2. You can explore this maze of rooms, where people actually lived and worked. Everything is exactly how it was on the day the lights were switched off in 1945.

The museum is popular, thus it’s best to book your ticket to Churchill War Rooms here in advance. The ticket includes an excellent audio guide.

Imperial War Museum

Founded during WWI, the Imperial War Museum is one of the best military museums in Europe. It covers both the service and civilian aspects of all conflicts in which British or Commonwealth forces had been involved from 1914 to the present day. The vast collection includes military vehicles and weapons, official documents, photographs and videos.

4 Days in London itinerary – Day 3

Breakfast at watchhouse tower bridge.

08:00 AM – 09:00 AM

Start your day with some excellent coffee at WatchHouse Tower Bridge . Located just steps away from Tower Bridge, this lovely café offers delicious sourdough toasts and cakes you can choose from the display.

Tower Bridge

09:00 AM – 09:30 AM

Often mistaken as London Bridge, Tower Bridge is one of the city’s most iconic landmarks. Constructed in 1894 in Neo-Gothic style, the bridge connects the north and south banks of London.

It is a bascule bridge, which means that two halves of the roadway can be raised to allow river traffic to pass. It was impossible to build a traditional fixed bridge at street level because this would cut off the access of ships to the port facilities in the Pool of London (between London Bridge and the Tower of London).

It is possible to visit the Tower Bridge Exhibition, which gives you access to the bridge’s old engine room, the towers and the glass walkway between them. However, considering the little time you’ll have in London, I’d recommend seeing the bridge only outside.

Tower of London

The Tower of London was originally built by William the Conqueror in 1066 as a royal castle and a fortress. It was expanded in the 13th century by Henry III and Edward I and was a royal residence until the 17th century. The tower served many purposes, including a prison and an execution place for famous people like Anne Boleyn, and Thomas Cromwell.

Today the Tower of London houses the Crown Jewels. It’s a remarkable collection, which includes the Imperial State Crown, St Edward’s Crown, Sovereign’s Orb and Sceptre and many other priceless items. The Sovereign Sceptre is decorated with the First Star of Africa, the largest colourless cut diamond in the world!

When you enter the site, head straight to the Crown Jewels. This place gets very crowded and there are long lines in the high season, which you can’t skip.

Don’t miss the sentries outside the Jewel House and the King’s House. There are three ceremonies you can watch daily: the Ceremonial Opening, the Ceremony of the Word and the Ceremony of the Keys.

Booking in advance is recommended (tickets are timed-entry and often sold out) Entry ticket : Skip-the-line Tower of London (free cancellation up to 24 hours) Best guided tour : Yeoman Warder Tour – included in the ticket price (tours begin every 30 minutes near the main entrance)

Lunch at Grounded London

For lunch head to Grounded London . It’s a great place for brunch, and the ingredients they use are locally-sourced and organic. You’ll find a variety of egg dishes, sandwiches and of course sourdough toasts, pancakes and French toast.

St. Paul’s Cathedral

02:00 PM – 03:30 PM

St. Paul’s Cathedral is one of the largest cathedrals in the world. It was built in the 17th century after the Great Fire of London destroyed the previous one in 1666.

One of the most impressive parts of the cathedral is its dome, composed of three circular galleries – the Whispering, the Stone and the Golden Gallery. From the latter, standing at 85m (214 feet) height, you can enjoy some impressive views of the city. Note that you have to climb 528 steps to reach the Golden Gallery.

Take time to visit the crypt, which is the resting place of some of London’s most notable citizens, including the Duke of Wellington and Admiral Nelson.

I’d advise you to buy your ticket to St. Paul’s Cathedral in advance if you’re visiting in the high season. An audio guide is included in the admission price. Also, free guided tours are available from Monday to Saturday usually between 11 AM and 3 PM.

03:45 PM – 04:30 PM

Located at the top of ​​20 Fenchurch Street, Sky Garden is the city’s highest public garden. It offers spectacular 360-degree views of London’s iconic skyline.

Housed in a massive glass bubble, the terraced garden occupies three floors. You’ll see a variety of Mediterranean and South African plants, including African Lily, French Lavender, Red Hot Poker and Bird of Paradise.

Admission is free, but you need to book a time slot in advance because they are often fully booked and rarely can accommodate walk-ins.

Booking in advance is recommended (tickets are timed-entry and often sold out) Entry ticket : Skip-the-line Sky Garden (free cancellation up to 24 hours)

If there aren’t any free slots left, you can always book a table for any of the restaurants or bars located there and enjoy the views.

Dinner at The India Restaurant

London is known for its Indian food, so for dinner head to The India Restaurant . They offer a variety of Indian food from classic to unique dishes. I’d recommend trying the Mixed platter starter and the Butter chicken.

Another great Indian restaurant is Colonel Saab . This modern Indian fine-dining restaurant boasts a stunning interior with crystal chandeliers. The Purani Dilli (samosa), Gutti Vankaya (aubergines with gravy) and dark chocolate cake were fantastic!

More ideas for 4 days in London – Day 3

Jack the ripper walking tour.

Join this Jack the Ripper Walking Tour to discover more about 19th-century London, following the steps of the notorious killer. You’ll visit some of the real-life crime scenes around Whitechapel and hear the stories of the unfortunate victims.

London’s highest viewpoint is situated at the top of the Shard (on floors 68, 69, and 72). It gives you an incredible 360° view across the whole city. The skyscraper was completed in 2012 and it is one of the tallest buildings in Europe at 309m (1,017 feet).

Make sure to book your Shard entry ticket in advance, it’s a popular attraction and tickets are timed entry.

4 Days in London itinerary – Day 4

Breakfast at gail’s bakery southbank.

Before catching the train to Windsor Castle, stop at Gail’s Bakery for a quick breakfast. Their ham and cheese croissants and banana pecan muffins are excellent.

Windsor Castle

10:00 AM – 12:00 PM

Located just an hour away, Windsor Castle is a perfect half-day trip from London. It is the oldest and largest inhabited castle in Europe! Windsor was originally built by William the Conqueror as a defensive castle after the Norman conquest in 1066. The first monarch to reside there was Henry I in 1110. Since then, the castle has been the family home of 40 monarchs.

Highlights of the castle include the lavish State Apartments (the ceremonial and historic rooms), the 15th-century St. George’s Chapel and Queen Mary’s Dolls House.

Start your visit with Queen Mary’s Dolls House, as from there you can continue straight to the State Apartments. If you opt to visit the State Apartments first, you’ll need to queue once more to enter the Queen Mary’s Dolls House. Also, there is an excellent audio guide included in the admission price.

If you’re visiting on Thursdays and Saturdays, don’t miss the Changing of the Guards ceremony at around 11:00 AM.

Booking in advance is recommended (tickets are timed-entry and often sold out) Entry ticket : Skip-the-line Windsor Castle (free cancellation up to 24 hours)

How to get to Windsor Castle Take a train from London Waterloo Station (WAT) to Windsor & Eton Riverside Station (WNR) – about 1h journey. From there it’s about a 10min walk to the castle.

Explore Soho and Covent Garden

Soho and Covent Garden are the most vibrant areas of London. You’ll find plenty of pubs, theatres, restaurants, boutiques, and specialty shops. If you’re a book lover, this is the place to look for some second-hand treasures.

There are also numerous great little bakeries. So I’d suggest you take a self-guided sweet walking tour for lunch and taste some of the delicious pastries.

Arôme Bakery Start your tour with Arôme Bakery , a great little bakery with fantastic pastries. Taste the almond croissant, the egg custard tart and the honey butter toast.

Buns from Home Buns from Home offers a nice selection of delicious savoury and sweet buns. I would recommend the cinnamon bun and the chocolate hazelnut one.

Ben’s Cookies For the best cookies in London, head to Ben’s Cookies . I found them during my first trip to the United Kingdom and since then it’s a must-eat every time I visit the country. My favourite flavours are White Chocolate Chunk, Coconut and Milk Chocolate & Peanut butter.

Donutelier For the best doughnuts in London, head to Donutelier . I particularly enjoyed the Roshers Gianduja (a must-try if you’re a chocolate enthusiast), as well as the Pistachio Raspberry roll.

St. JOHN Bakery Neal’s Yard Another great place for light and fluffy doughnuts is St. JOHN Bakery Neal’s Yard . I always opt for the classics, either the vanilla or chocolate custard doughnuts!

Whipped London For some New York-style cheesecake, visit Whipped London . Their menu boasts around 10 variations of baked cheesecake with delicious toppings. My personal favourite was the Lotus Cookie Dough Baked Cheesecake.

Crumbs & Doilies The last stop of the tour is Crumbs & Doilies . They offer amazing cupcakes, which come in two sizes – small and normal cupcakes. I opted for the salted caramel cupcake and the red velvet cupcake, both outstanding.

Take a River Thames Cruise

Take this Westminster to Greenwich River Thames Cruise and admire the views of the city’s most iconic sights. You’ll journey past historical sights such as the Houses of Parliament and Tower Bridge.

Dinner at The Mayfair Chippy

They say you haven’t experienced London if you haven’t tried fish and chips! So for your last dinner in the city, head to The Mayfair Chippy . Alongside the classic fish and chips (the best in London), they offer an extensive fish menu featuring oysters, crab and mussels.

Another great place for fish and chips is Hobsons Fish and Chips . They serve traditional British chips and their fish is delivered daily from Billingsgate Fish Market.

More ideas for 4 days in London – Day 4

Take a historical pub walking tour.

Join this Historical Pub Walking Tour and explore the city’s most historic pubs, 16th-century taverns and a grand Victorian gin palace. You’ll try some of the finest brews and learn more about the history of the city.

Take a Harry Potter Walking Tour

If you’re a fan of the books, this Harry Potter Walking Tour is a must-do! Start your adventure by finding out which Hogwarts House you belong in. Stroll down Diagon Alley (where Harry buys his first wand) and pass the Leaky Cauldron (the wizarding inn). You’ll see places where certain scenes were filmed and places which inspired the author the most.

The Wallace Collection

The Wallace Collection, housed in Hertford House, is one of my favourite hidden gems in London. The museum displays works of art collected in the 18th and 19th centuries by five generations of a British aristocratic family. These collectors include the first four Marquesses of Hertford and Sir Richard Wallace, the illegitimate son of the 4th Marquess.

The collection boasts a remarkable selection of Old Master paintings, including works by famous artists such as Titian, Rembrandt, Rubens, and Velázquez. You’ll also find an extensive collection of armour and decorative arts.

Victoria and Albert Museum

Featuring a collection of over 2.3 million objects, Victoria and Albert is the world’s largest museum of decorative arts and design. The museum was founded in 1852 by Queen Victoria and Prince Albert. The extensive collection spans 5,000 years of art from cultures all over the world – Europe, North America, Asia and North Africa. And the best part is that the museum is free, like every other national British museum.

Natural History Museum

Established in 1881, the Natural History Museum features a massive collection of over 80 million items. Among some of its treasures are Hans Sloane’s nautilus shell, Charles Darwin’s pigeons, William Smith’s ammonites, Dippy (a replica of a Diplodocus skeleton), and many others.

Madame Tussauds

The first museum Madame Tussauds was founded in London by Marie Tussaud in 1835. In fact, it is the best Madame Tussauds in Europe. The museum features more than 250 wax figures, divided into 8 different zones, from music and Marvel to royalty.

You can book your Madame Tussauds skip-the-line ticket here .

Mercato Mayfair

There are tens of markets in London, where you’ll find everything from food to flowers, art, antiques, and clothes. However, there is one, which has a truly unique setting. Mercato Mayfair is housed in the former St. Mark’s Church! You’ll find delicious food, craft beer and gorgeous stained-glass windows.

My tip: Try the gin cocktails at Jim & Tonic.

Must buy tickets in advance

London is one of the most visited cities in Europe. So, I would strongly recommend buying skip-the-line tickets in advance or getting a London Pass (free entry to over 80 attractions). Otherwise, you’ll waste hours of your time waiting in lines.

Buckingham Palace – open only for 3 months in the summer, tickets for the palace are always in high demand, so book your Buckingham Palace ticket here well in advance.

Westminster Abbey – 1.6 million visitors per year, long lines, book your skip-the-line ticket to Westminster here .

London Eye – with 3.5 million visitors per year this is the city’s most popular attraction, so book your London Eye ticket here .

Tower of London – 3 million visitors per year, lines can stretch on for hours, so book your skip-the-line ticket to the Tower here .

Sky Garden – free entrance, but as it is a very popular attraction, you need to book a timeslot to Sky Garden here in advance.

Windsor Castle – with 1.5 million visitors per year, Windsor is the most popular castle to visit near London, so book your skip-the-line ticket to Windsor here .

2-day London itinerary

If you have only 2 days in London, I strongly suggest planning ahead by selecting the attractions you wish to visit and booking skip-the-line tickets for them. During the summer, lines can stretch for hours. I’d recommend opting for 2 or max 3 attractions per day to avoid rushing through everything. Also, consider skipping Windsor Castle (unless it’s a priority for you) due to its location outside the city, which requires additional travel time.

2 days in London

• Day 1: Westminster Abbey, Buckingham Palace, Palace of Westminster, Big Ben, London Eye
• Day 2: Tower Bridge, Tower of London, The British Museum (or Soho, or Afternoon tea at Ham Yard Hotel)

Start your first day with Westminster Abbey, because it opens earlier than the other attractions. Then continue with a visit to Buckingham Palace (open during the summer), Changing of the Guard ceremony and finish the day with the London Eye (it closes at 8:30 PM during the summer) and Big Ben.

During your second day, discover East London and visit the Tower of London and Tower Bridge in the morning. In the afternoon you can visit St. Paul’s Cathedral, experience Afternoon Tea, visit the British Museum, or just explore Soho. It’s up to you!

3-day London itinerary

For 3 days in London (and if you plan your itinerary well in advance) I can say that you’ll be able to see all the key sites. You can follow the 2-day itinerary above and on the third day – take a day trip to Windsor Castle (or Hampton Court Palace) and then enjoy an Afternoon tea.

3 days in London

• Day 2: Tower Bridge, Tower of London, The British Museum
• Day 3: Windsor Castle, Soho and Covent Garden, Afternoon tea at Ham Yard Hotel

Best pass for your 4-day London itinerary

The best way to save money and not buy separate tickets for each of the popular attractions is to use the London Pass. The pass gives you:

• free access to more than 80 of the city’s top attractions
• a digital guide with attraction information and instructions
• 1-day hop-on, hop-off bus tour
• Thames river cruise

By using the London Pass (£134 for 4 days) you’ll save a minimum of £11 (in case you follow my itinerary exactly without visiting additional attractions). And if you add more sights, you’ll save even more. Plus, you’ll skip the line everywhere!

• Westminster Abbey – £27
• Tower of London – £30
• St. Paul’s Cathedral – £21
• Windsor Castle (afternoon entry only, after 1 PM) – £30
• 1-day hop-on, hop-off bus tour and Thames River cruise – £37

Buying separate tickets (total) – £145 London Pass price – £134 Total savings – £11 per person

If you consider following my itinerary, note that the London Eye and the State Rooms of Buckingham Palace are not included in the pass. You’ll have to book separate skip-the-line tickets for these attractions.

Where to stay in London

If this is your first time in London or if you’re visiting for a short time (a few days), stay somewhere central. London is a big city and although it has an excellent bus and metro system, you don’t want to waste hours in traffic or public transport.

Thus, I’d recommend you choose a hotel on the north bank, between Buckingham Palace and the Tower of London. The most central area is Covent Garden, packed with restaurants, coffee shops, and shopping boutiques. Also, make sure there is a metro station near your hotel because you’ll have to use public transport daily even if you stay central.

Page8 – Best mid-range

Guest rating: 9.0 | 3,650+ reviews

Fantastic central location between Covent Garden and Trafalgar Square. Walking distance to the British Museum, Buckingham Palace, Big Ben and many great restaurants.

Why book – great location for sightseeing, near several metro stations, quiet soundproofed rooms, 24-hour front desk

The Londoner – Best luxury

Guest rating: 9.0 | 3,220+ reviews

Centrally located on Leicester Square, the hotel is just a short walk from numerous restaurants, attractions and shops. Spacious boutique rooms with comfortable beds.

Why book – perfect central location, guest-only club, rooftop lounge, great Spa and indoor pool

Wilde Aparthotels by Staycity Covent Garden – Best apartment

Guest rating: 9.0 | 3,460+ reviews

Perfectly situated in the heart of the West End theatre district and just a few minutes stroll from Trafalgar Square. The studio apartments feature a fully equipped kitchenette.

Why book – great location at walking distance of attractions and a few metro stations, modern comfy apartments

Getting around in London

London has an excellent public transport system, which consists of metro (known as the Tube) and buses. The metro is the most efficient way to get around the city and there are metro stations at most of the popular attractions. The red double-deck buses are a great option for shorter distances. And the advantage is that you’ll get to see much more of the city this way.

If you’re in London for a few days, the best option is to get an Oyster card . It’s a contactless card, which you can buy at any metro station. You have to pay a deposit for the card and then pre-load it with pay-as-you-go credit. The Oyster card is cheaper than buying a paper single ticket or day travel card because it offers daily capping. This means that after the third journey, you’re not paying any more for additional trips.

To use your Oyster Card just tap it on the yellow card reader when you enter a metro station or get on a bus. You need to tap it again on the yellow card reader when you leave the metro station, but don’t do this when you get off a bus or tram (you will be issued a penalty fare).

Another option to get around the city is the hop-on-hop-off bus . It features 3 specially-designed routes covering over 45 stops and a river cruise from the Tower of London to Westminster.

How to get to London

To get to London from continental Europe, you have to use Eurostar (a high-speed train service). You’ll arrive at the St. Pancras International Station and from there you can take the metro to get to your hotel.

London has several major airports: Heathrow Airport, Luton Airport, Stansted Airport and Gatwick Airport.

Heathrow Airport Located only 23 kilometres west of Central London, Heathrow Airport (LHR) is the main international airport serving the city. The fastest way to get to the city centre is by taking the Heathrow Express (the earlier you book tickets, the cheaper they are). You can also get to the city by taking the metro (Piccadilly or Elizabeth line).

Luton Airport Luton Airport (LTN) is situated 45 km north of the city. To get to the centre you can:

• take the National Express shuttle bus , which runs 7 days a week, with 4 departures an hour during the daytime (50min journey)
• take a direct train from Luton Airport Parkway to Blackfriars, City Thameslink, Farringdon or St Pancras International (40min journey). Note that in this case you first have to take a shuttle bus from the airport to Luton Airport Parkway.

Stansted Airport Stansted Airport (STN) is 68 km northeast of Central London. To get to Liverpool Street Station, take the Stansted Express (trains depart every 30 minutes and take about 50 minutes).

Gatwick Airport Gatwick Airport (LGW) is located 47.5 km south of the city centre. The Gatwick Express takes 30 minutes to get to Victoria Station, departing around two times an hour.

Day trips from London

Warner brothers studio.

If you’re a Harry Potter fan, then you’ll want to make time to visit the Warner Brothers Studio. This is where all of the Harry Potter films were filmed. You’ll have the chance to see the original sets of the movies!

How to get to Warner Brothers Studio

• the easiest way is to take the Warner Bros. Studio Tour (more than 13,870+ excellent reviews), which will take you directly to and from the studio. The entry ticket is included in the price of the tour
• by public transport – you have to take a train from Euston (20min journey) or from Birmingham New Street (1h journey) to Watford Junction station and then a shuttle bus to the studio (15min journey)

Hampton Court Palace

Hampton Court is a must-see for everyone interested in the history of the Tudors. It was originally built in the 16th century for Cardinal Thomas Wolsey, the chief minister of Henry VIII. However, when Wolsey fell out of favour with the king, Henry VIII confiscated the palace. In fact, Hampton Court became the favourite palace of the king and it remained a royal residence until 1760.

Highlights include the Tudor Kitchens, the Great Hall and the infamous Haunted Gallery.

If you’re visiting in the summer, tickets are timed-entry, so book your Hampton Court skip-the-line ticket in advance.

How to get to Hampton Court Take a train from London Waterloo Station (WAT) to Hampton Court (HMC) – about a 40min journey. From there it’s about a 15min walk to the castle

Spend a day exploring the beautiful British countryside of the Cotswolds, an area known for its charming villages with stone cottages. Visit Bibury (the prettiest village in all of England) and the unchanged medieval towns of Burford, Bourton-on-the-water and Stow-on-the-Wold.

To explore the Cotswolds on a day trip from London, you need to rent a car. So, I’d recommend you book this Cotswolds Small-Group Tour , which will show you the best of the area in just one day.

Stonehenge and Bath

This Stonehenge, Bath & West Country Day Trip is a great option to see two popular destinations in one day. Especially if you’re not planning to rent a car.

You’ll discover the prehistoric monument of Stonehenge and the Georgian city of Bath, once the most famous hot springs in Europe. An entry ticket to Stonehenge and an audio guide are included in the price of the tour.

What to see next

If you’re visiting London as a part of a European trip, you can easily combine it with Paris. The capital of France is located just 3h away by train. For more information take a look at my perfect Paris itinerary .

How many days in London

Is 4 days in london enough.

If this is your first time in the city, I’d recommend spending 4 days in London. For 4 full days, you’ll have enough time to explore the most popular attractions without feeling too rushed. Also, plan your itinerary well in advance and book skip-the-line tickets.

Less than 4 days

If you don’t have 4 full days, spend less time in Soho and Covent Garden (not a whole afternoon). Also, choose between Sky Garden or London Eye, don’t do both attractions. You can skip Buckingham Palace if you’re not visiting during the summer (the only time when the palace is open for tourists) and Changing of the Guard is not a must-see for you.

3 or 4 days in London

Definitely 4 days, especially if you want to visit the famous royal residence, Windsor Castle, which is located outside the city. Also, if you’d like to experience Afternoon tea, plan a whole afternoon only for that. Keep in mind as well, that London is a massive city and you’ll spend a lot of time getting from one attraction to another.

Best time to visit London

Spring (April, May) and autumn (September, October) are the perfect time to visit the capital of the United Kingdom. The weather is warm and nice most of the time. London is one of the most visited cities in Europe, so if possible avoid the high season, which is in June, July and August.

In December the city could be really magical with all the Christmas lights and decorations.

Also, before booking your trip, check if an event like Fashion Week or a royal celebration is going on, as accommodation will be much more expensive during that time.

Faqs about visiting London

4 days in London is enough to see the most popular sights including Buckingham Palace, Westminster, Big Ben, Windsor Castle and the Tower of London. Just make sure you book skip-the-line tickets in advance or use London Pass.

For first-time visitors, I recommend spending 4-5 days in London. This will give you enough time to explore the city, see the most popular attractions, take a day trip to Windsor Castle and have an Afternoon tea.

May and September are the best months to see London. The weather is nice and warm and there are fewer crowds.

Most restaurants and cafes add a service charge to the bill, upward of 12%. In this case, there is no need to tip. However, if a service charge is not added, it’s customary to tip between 10% and 15%.

London’s tap water is generally safe to drink. However, keep in mind that some hotels’ bathroom taps could be fed from a tank and therefore the water could be used only for washing.

Pin for later

Follow now for exclusive content

About the author

Leave a Reply Cancel Reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Name  *

Email  *

Add Comment  *

I accept the privacy policy

Post Comment

Let's be friends! Sign up receive our monthly newsletter with updates and new in-depth guides. 

4 Days in London: Complete London Itinerary for First Timers

When we booked a last minute trip to London, we weren’t entirely sure what to expect. We had both been to London before, though not for a few years, and we decided two weeks would be a comfortable amount of time to explore the city, and maybe take a day trip or two to explore other parts of the United Kingdom.

Turns out, we never left the city and STILL ended up having things within the city that we didn’t get to.

London is huge, and there’s a ton to do and see. The hardest part about planning a trip to London is choosing between attractions. If you’ve only got 4 days in London, you definitely don’t have time to make it to every museum, church, and market in London.

But that’s where we come in.

In this guide, which is based on our recent experience staying in London for two weeks, we’re going to give you our take on what you should prioritize in London. Along with what you shouldn’t.

Our favorite parts about London were the diverse range of food stalls at the innumerable food markets around the city, the city’s great green spaces, and the amount of history that exists in London (most of which we didn’t really know about, because to us, London history starts in the 16th Century according to what we learned in school).

In this guide to planning your trip to London, we’re going to help you make the most of your time.

We’ve put together a comprehensive 4 day London itinerary below, but we also have thoughts on what to do with less time (one, two, or three days) if you have a shorter trip. If you do have a shorter trip, you can still use the details in the main itinerary for the sections you’re actually going to use.

Sound good to you? Let’s get into planning your trip to London.

Disclaimer: Some of the links in this post, like hotel links, are affiliate links, meaning at no additional cost to you, we make a little bit of money if you click through and book. That being said, we would never recommend something to you that we don’t stand behind 100%.

Where to Stay in London

One of the major themes you’re going to find in this itinerary is that London is massive, and you’re definitely going to want to be strategic about organizing your time to avoid running back and forth across the city. 

This also applies to where to stay. We’d recommend staying somewhere relatively central if you’ve either got a short trip (four days or less) or it’s your first time in London .

We have an entire, super detailed guide dedicated to deciding where to stay in London , but here is the short version. 

If you’re looking for a central location and great food and drinks , stay in Southbank . This is our top pick for basically everyone.

We spent our first four days in London here, and it was a great location both for exploring the rest of Central London, and for eating and drinking in its own right (psst – skip the restaurants along the river). This is an upscale part of town with modern high rises and fancy office buildings.

We stayed at the CitizenM Bankside , which is our favorite hotel chain in the world and this location was their first in London.

There are two splurge-worthy hotels in the area – the Hoxton and Sea Containers – the latter of which has dazzling views from some of the rooms right above the banks of the Thames. 

If you want to stay in the middle of all the action , stay in Covent Garden . It’s touristy, sure, but the central location and great public transportation connections will make getting around London a breeze. Plus, it’s full of great bars, restaurants, coffee shops, and shopping. 

If you’re looking for something more offbeat and hip , look north east to Shoreditch , which is a place that made us feel very old and uncool. Lots of vintage stores, hipster coffee shops, nightlife, and great street art in this gentrifying (gentrified?) area. There’s another CitizenM location here, which is where we were set to stay before we decided to stay up in Camden instead.

Tips For Visiting London (Especially for First Timers)

Here are some tips and tricks for planning your first visit to London that are probably most helpful for first timers.

As Americans, traveling to London is noticeably different than traveling to other places in Europe, like Italy or Portugal, due to the absence of a language barrier. It feels much more similar to home, even though it’s really not. There are certainly cultural and practical differences that you’ll want to know going in.

Here are a few things that we’ve learned about London to keep in mind as you’re planning your trip.

Early Mornings are Best for the Main Sights

For sights like St. Paul’s Cathedral, the Tower of London, and Westminster Abbey, try to get there when they open. Especially on a Sunday.

Alysha went on a solo trip to the Tower of London (Matt has been multiple times before) and was surprised at how empty it was on a Sunday morning! We had the same experience on a Thursday morning at St. Paul’s Cathedral.

In the summer, it will still be busy in the morning, but not as busy as midday or later in the afternoon. 

London is Massive

We LOVE walking around cities, and think it’s the best way to experience a city. But if we’re being honest, it’s nearly impossible to walk around London – it’s just too big!

The good news is that the public transportation network in London is excellent. You can use the buses and the tube (the Underground) to zip around the city. 

Public Transportation is Both Expensive and 100% Worth it

A lot of people balk at the £6 per ride cost of riding the Tube in London, but if you dig a little deeper, you’ll find that it’s definitely worth it.

The alternative to public transportation is taking a taxi or rideshare, which is more expensive.

And, though you’re only in London for four days, a weeklong unlimited transit pass is just £38.70, which means it’s £10 a day for unlimited access (plus £5 for an Oyster card – more on this in the section on getting around below the main itinerary). 

The Museums are Mostly Free!

Unlike most other cities, where you’ll have to shell out a lot of money to visit the museums, the main museums in London are free.

In high season, it’s best to make a reservation for a timed entry in advance to make sure you can get in.

We love this aspect of London, because it makes it so that you can poke your head in, see if you’re really interested in something, and then decide to opt out if it’s not for you without the “we just spent £30 on this, I guess we have to stick it out” guilt. 

They Drive on the Other Side of the Road

We, of course, knew this going in, but that didn’t stop us from nearly getting run over on our first few days in London.

Luckily, in the center of London, there are helpful “look left / right” signs on the ground at crosswalks, which saved our lives multiple times.

When in doubt, look both ways. Three times. 

More London Travel Guides to Help You Plan Your Trip

• ITINERARY : How to Plan an Amazing London Itinerary
• WHERE TO STAY : How to Choose Where to Stay in London
• GLUTEN FREE : The Best Gluten Free Restaurants in London
• COFFEE : The 11 Best Coffee Shops in London

4 Days in London: A Complete 4 Day London Itinerary

Now that we’ve covered some of the logistics and other things that are good to know before your trip, let’s get into exactly how we’d spend 4 days in London.

There’s a lot to do and see in London. You’re not going to be able to see it all with just four days (even with two weeks, we had to scrap a couple of day trips because we felt like the city deserved more of our time). 

Our goal with this itinerary is to help you decide what to do in London, and to give you a mix of the traditional tourist sights – the museums, Westminster Abbey, Buckingham Palace, etc. – and some of the less visited places that don’t make it on every tourist’s radar, but we found to be worth the time and effort. 

There are a few things that you WON’T find in this itinerary, and we wanted to get them out there up front. 

• The British Museum : We actually did go here, and left within 30 minutes or so. For two reasons. First, it’s not well thought out, and it’s kind of all over the place. We didn’t know where to start, so we started with the Egyptian artifacts, which leads me to the second reason. Second, this is all stolen stuff. Imagine this for a second: you walk into a museum in Egypt and find the remains of the British Royal Family on display for the world to see. Do we think that would go over well? We don’t, and the cultural voyeurism felt a little strange to us. At the end of the day, it really just seems like they threw everything they could find into the museum and said “look how cool this stuff is.” It feels more egregious than places like the Louvre, for some reason. 
• Climbing Tower Bridge : We were flabbergasted when we saw a line stretching from the middle of tower bridge back towards the north bank. It was a line to climb to the top of Tower Bridge, which at one point was a legitimate pedestrian way to cross when the drawbridge was up, but now really seems like a transparent cash grab. Also, we think the best views are of the bridge, not from it. Skip it!
• Kings Cross and Platform 9 ¾ : Look, I’m a Harry Potter fan. I’ve read the books 8+ times all the way through, and they were an important piece of my childhood because I was the same age as the characters as they grew up. However, I can say with 100% certainty that the whole Platform 9 ¾ thing is extremely underwhelming. There’s a long line, a “professional” photographer who tries to sell you pictures, and it’s really not worth the journey up there. 
• The National Gallery : There are a lot of museums in London, and the truth is you’re just not going to be able to make it to all of them AND do some of the other cool stuff like food markets and scenic walks. This is the one that gets cut, in our opinion. It’s similar to other art museums around the world, and doesn’t feel super unique to London. Although the same could be said of the Natural History Museum, so choose the one that looks most interesting to you, I suppose.
• The London Eye : We blinked, and apparently we missed the part where every city all of a sudden has to have a Ferris wheel. This is one of the originals, but we still think it’s expensive and overrated for what it is (Matt has done it twice, and if he had to do his first trip over again, he’d skip it and opt for the free rooftops in Central London instead). 

Day 1: The City of London & Shoreditch

On the first day of your trip to London, start in the oldest part of the city (which, as we’ll cover below, actually feels like the newest part) to gain an understanding of where the city started, and how it got to where it is today. 

Along the way, you’ll learn about the origins of London. Most historians think London’s history starts with the Roman settlement, but there were certainly people here before that. 

You’ll visit St. Paul’s Cathedral, the Museum of London, and take a walk through the “old town” before spending your afternoon and evening in the part of London that is definitely not the old town – Shoreditch (which is the hip spot to be with great bars and restaurants of all kinds). 

Important itinerary note : Old Spitalfields Market and the Upmarket are best on the weekends, which means you should do your best to have this day fall on a weekend. In particular, this would make an excellent Sunday itinerary.  

St. Paul’s Cathedral

St. Paul’s Cathedral is one of the more interesting aspects of London’s history, and the archaeologist who led our excellent walking tour (we’d highly recommend it if you’re interested in the history of London – here it is ) remarked that it’s probably the single most important building in all of London when it comes to the city’s history. 

Why, you ask? A couple of reasons. 

There are two times in London’s history that the city has essentially been leveled. The first was in the late 17th Century, when a fire started at a bakery on “Pudding Lane” (yes, that’s actually the name of the street where all the bakeries were) and ended up burning down something like two thirds of the City of London. 

In both cases, St. Paul’s Cathedral played an important role in the city’s healing and coping with the disasters.

It was built after the fire as a sort of “feather in the cap” of the government at the time. We learned on the walking tour that it was very much a political symbol more than a religious one, one that said “we’re rebuilding London, and we’re doing it right.” 

Then, during the Blitz in World War 2 when a huge portion of Central London was reduced to rubble, the dome of St. Paul’s stood strong, serving as an important symbol of the resilience of the city in the face of adversity. 

The truth is that German bombers could recognize the dome from above, and did their best to avoid it (though I’m not quite sure how possible that really was given the technology at the time). 

We’d recommend heading up to the dome of St. Paul’s, and being the first ones up there if you can swing it. The dome access starts at 9:30 am, and it’s a long climb up a variety of different staircases to reach the top. 

There are three levels on the way up – the Whispering Gallery (the interior of the dome), the Stone Gallery (the exterior of the base of the dome), and the Golden Gallery (at the tippy top of the dome).  

It’s definitely worth stopping at all three, and definitely go all the way to the top, where the views are outstanding!

Make sure to visit the crypt, where two important figures in British history are buried. You’ll find the Duke of Wellington (famous for leading British forces in the defeat of Napoleon at Waterloo) and Lord Admiral Nelson (also famous for outwitting Napoleon, among other things), among others. 

Entry is a little pricey, but we think it’s worth the money. To save money, you can book tickets online in advance for a slight discount, which saves you a few pounds a person. 

More information on hours, costs, and more here . Monday to Saturday only, closed on Sundays for service. 

One New Change’s Rooftop Terrace

After you’ve done the cathedral itself, head up the sixth floor free rooftop terrace of One New Change , a fancy shopping center across the street, for one of the best views of the dome in all of London. 

It’s completely free, and it’s open from 6:00 am to midnight every day. You take the elevator from the middle of the building up to the terrace, and from there you have an unobstructed view of the dome of St. Paul’s. 

You can find information on the terrace, including opening hours, here . 

The Museum of London

Head directly north from the cathedral up to the excellent – and free – Museum of London .

It’s worth taking an hour (or two, if you’re really into it) to peruse the museum, which covers the history of the city from prehistoric times to modern times in chronological order, weaving a story about the history of London and how it came to be the city it is today.  

We enjoyed this museum, and we learned a lot about British history and the history of the city that we definitely had never thought about before. I’ll give you two examples. 

First is the fact that, for large swaths of its history, London was under the control of outsiders. As Americans, we never really think of the British as being colonized and oppressed, but that is certainly how they spent the bulk of history before the medieval periods. First it’s the Romans, then they leave and the Saxons move in, then it’s the Normans. 

Second is the fact that London, the cosmopolitan city that we know and love today, was shaped by two disasters (which we already touched on above) – the fire in the 17th Century that burned the majority of the city – which at the time, was mostly wood – to the ground, and the Blitz during World War 2.

Without those two events, the modernization of London would have been much more difficult, and Central London would likely look very, very different from how it does today. 

We enjoyed the museum, and think it’s a nice short way to get an understanding of the history of the city before diving into what it is today. 

An Afternoon and Evening in Shoreditch

We’re not sure we’ve ever seen a higher concentration of vintage stores than we saw in Shoreditch. And that tells you a lot about this hip neighborhood in northeast London and the transformation it has undergone in the past decade or so. 

At one point, Shoreditch was completely separate from the city of London, but over the years the borders of London have continually expanded, swallowing up former suburbs on its way to becoming the city it has become today. 

Even the origin story of Shoreditch is a little counterculture. It became famous because in the 16th Century, some politicians got the idea that banning playhouses (and theaters) in London sounded like a good idea. You know, to remain chaste and godly and all that. Imagine what they’d think if they saw London today! 

So, in order to meet the demand that certainly hadn’t evaporated despite the ban, new theaters were built in places like Shoreditch and Southwark, which at the time were outside of the city limits, and thus its jurisdiction. In the 19th and early 20th Centuries, it was a legitimate rival to the West End as the center of London’s arts scene. 

After the second world war, during which large swaths of the neighborhood were demolished – including a lot of housing – the reconstruction process took a little longer than other parts of London.

Since then, the story of Shoreditch is similar to many other highly gentrified areas in major cities around the world.

First the artists moved in, creating a demand for businesses that those artists liked, and finally ending with astronomical housing prices that drove out many of the original residents (and those artists, too) and brought in a more wealthy contingent, who in turn brought a different set of businesses to cater to their different needs. 

On your way from the City of London to Shoreditch, there are a bunch of stops worth making, but we’re going to give you a few to start. 

Start with a rooftop drink in the roof garden at the Culpeper , make your way to Old Spitalfields Market to wander the stalls with art, food, and drinks (weekends only), and then head over to Brick Lane, stopping by the Upmarket if this happens to fall on a weekend, and follow Brick Lane north into Shoreditch. 

Dinner at Dishoom – From Bombay With Love

Multiple people have recommended Dishoom to me, although we didn’t actually eat there ourselves because I wasn’t confident they could serve me a totally gluten free meal. My older brother and a friend both said it was among their favorite meals in London, which is why it gets a spot in this guide. 

This upscale Indian restaurant’s combination of home-style cooking, retro surroundings and awesome cocktails make for a venue that’s almost always busy, with a palpable air of excitement. Their mini-franchise is rapidly becoming a phenomenon, with multiple locations around London including one in Shoreditch.  

You’ll definitely want to make a reservation in advance – when we stopped by to order a chai for take away on a Monday morning, they were turning people away because they didn’t have enough tables. 

Bar Hopping in Shoreditch and Hoxton

Shoreditch and Hoxton party until the early hours of the morning pretty much every night, so you’ll have no problem finding some of the best bars, clubs and raves the city has to offer.

So where to start? 

We’ll give you a few places to get you started, but if we were you, we’d head to local-run “Design My Night” to get the scoop on the best nightlife spots. Because we’re not really the right people to give you night life advice, with a 9:00 pm bedtime and all that. 

• For the overall vibe : London Cocktail Club is situated between Shoreditch High Street and Brick Lane. A mashup of biker bar and man cave, this place is best described as “British Americana”. Great selection of drinks and really friendly staff. 
• For cocktails : Cocktail Trading Co is said to be the best cocktail bar in Shoreditch. Passionate, friendly staff make for a great start to an evening on the town. Try the “American Pie” and thank me later!
• For a great cider selection : Williams Ale & Cider House bills itself as a classic “East London Boozer”. I wholeheartedly agree, especially with 14 hand pumps offering a great selection of both ciders and ales. 
• For late night mini golf : Junkyard Golf, as the name suggests, is a bar and mini-golf course, set among a plethora of “pre-loved and reclaimed random sizzle”. Want to drink a cocktail while playing golf among circus freaks and jungle bathtubs? Of course you do!
• For drinks and ping pong : Drinks at Bounce Old Street are punctuated by apologetic patrons scrabbling around under your table for lost ping pong balls. And you know what? That’s part of the charm! This place is a great ice-breaker and a much better idea than a boring old pool hall.

Day 2: Westminster, the West End, and a Museum

On your second day in London, start your day in the city of Westminster, make your way to Covent Garden, and head through Hyde Park to check out a museum (there are two choices here, which we’ve outlined below). 

Westminster is a relatively small patch of London, but contains a higher concentration of London’s famous spots than anywhere else in the city, so we’d try to beat the crowds and head out early .

Westminster Bridge & Big Ben

The first stop of the day should be the eastern end of Westminster Bridge, across the river from Big Ben. You might be tempted to go straight to Westminster station, but we think the walk over the bridge is well worth it because of the excellent view of Big Ben you get as you cross the bridge. 

The world famous tower, officially known as the “Elizabeth Tower”, houses the giant bell affectionately known as “Big Ben”, whose unmistakable chime has sounded across the city for over 150 years. That’s right, Big Ben refers to the bell, not the tower itself. 

To hear the bell going off, you’ll want to be on the bridge about 10 minutes before the turn of the hour (so, 8:50 am to hear the 9:00 am bells). 

Either side of the bridge works fine, but the better view is going to be from the southern end of the bridge. 

As of the time of writing, Big Ben has been under construction for several years, and there’s likely to be some scaffolding up around it. It’s still a great view, though.

At the other side of the bridge, you’ll find yourself adjacent to the Houses of Parliament. You can actually visit the Houses of Parliament and take a guided tour that allows you to access parts of the complex you wouldn’t ordinarily be able to.

If that sounds interesting to you, you can find more information here (it’s a 90 minute tour, and it’s fairly pricey). 

Westminster Abbey

Walk across the square in front of parliament – make sure to walk by the statues of famous Brits like Winston Churchill and Gandhi – on your way over to Westminster Abbey , which is your first stop of the morning.

This is a gigantic Gothic Cathedral that was built in the 13th Century by Henry III as both a monument to Edward the Confessor, and as a final resting place for his own body. 

The history from there is kind of fascinating, mostly because of the intermingling of the monarchy and church over the course of centuries.

On a walking tour, the history professor leading the tour (we did this walking tour and really enjoyed it) said that, essentially, the church was very, very rich, and the monarchy said something to the effect of “yeah, we want in on that.” Which I’m sure is painting with broad strokes and missing a lot of historical nuance. 

But on the other hand, yeah, that checks out. 

Essentially, in the mid 15th Century, Henry VIII (yes, that one, the one that enjoyed beheading his wives) got mad at the Catholic Church for not signing off on his divorce. So, naturally, he seized all assets owned by the church and took control of them for himself. Often, selling off pieces of them to fund his various adventures around Europe. 

From there, the royal family and the church became intertwined. Divine right and all that jazz. 

Today, it’s the site of royal weddings, coronation ceremonies, and burials, but it’s mostly a tourist attraction. 

More than 3,000 Brits are buried in Westminster Abbey – the most famous being many of the royals of the last few centuries, and people like Sir Isaac Newton and Charles Darwin. Make sure to look down as you walk around the interior – it seems like every step you take inside of the Abbey, you’re walking onto a new burial site with the name and dates of their life/death. 

The Abbey opens at 9:30 am (9:00 am on Saturdays, closed on Sundays), which is pretty early, and we’d recommend trying to be one of the first people in the door. To do that, we’d buy online tickets in advance , which go on sale two months in advance. 

Buckingham Palace (and the Changing of the Guard)

From Westminster Abbey, it’s a nice walk through St. James’s Park to get to Buckingham Palace , which is where the queen supposedly lives (but spends almost zero time there these days, according to multiple people we talked to). 

If you’re into coffee and you’re craving some caffeine, we’d recommend a slight detour out to Formative Coffee , which is a short walk from both Westminster Abbey and St. James’s Park. It makes the list of our favorite coffee shops in London for a reason.

Side note : What the heck is going on with that “s’s” at the end of “St. James’s Park”? Yes, that’s the correct spelling. We had to quadruple check. 

This is also where the most “touristy” activity on this entire itinerary happens – the Changing of the Guard. That being said, it’s quite the spectacle (we can’t believe this still happens, to be completely honest) and it’s worth seeing once, as long as you’re prepared for the crowds and have the flexibility to show up a little early at a specific time on a specific day. 

You’ll need to pay close attention to the official schedule for this one, as the ceremony schedule varies by the season. You’ll also need to plan your day to arrive here by at least 10:45 am, and probably a lot earlier if you want to get a good view, especially in high-summer.

Trafalgar Square and the West End

At some point during their London visit, virtually everyone ends up at Trafalgar Square . Probably because it’s right in the middle of all the action.

To get there from the palace, just walk straight out “the Mall” and you’ll land at the southern end of the square after you walk under the Admiralty Arch. 

The square is home to Nelson’s Column, dedicated to the beloved naval hero of the same name who outwitted Napoleon multiple times, Trafalgar Square has been a huge draw for tourists, locals, and flocks of pigeons since Victorian times.

There’s also an excellent view back towards Big Ben from the south end of the square. And lots of lions. What is it about lions that makes every single king or queen go “what animal do I want to be? Yeah, a lion, that’s the one!” Why not switch it up and get creative every once in a while and be a warthog or a water buffalo or something?

While we didn’t include it on this particular itinerary (because we’ve done it before, and think it’s not the most interesting attraction in London), art lovers should absolutely take the time to visit the National Portrait Gallery . 

Trafalgar Square’s pigeons are shockingly tame. It’s easy to coax them into landing on you for a photo opportunity, but you’ll get a hefty fine if you feed them! I’m reliably informed by locals that in years past, the square was home to thousands of the creatures (we call them “sky rats,” but I once said that to a woman whose father raised pigeons and apparently that was very offensive), probably due to the many vendors selling bags of bird feed to passing tourists. DO NOT FEED THE WILD ANIMALS.

Seven Dials Market for Lunch (& Covent Garden) 

Another food market! Hooray! 

Seriously though, our favorite part of London was all the incredible food markets, which is pretty evident in our construction of this itinerary. There’s basically a different food market every single day! 

Today, it’s the Seven Dials Market , a food hall housed in a former warehouse in Covent Garden. We were confused by the banana logo that we saw all over the building, and it turns out this warehouse was primarily used to store bananas back in the day, hence the logo. And cucumbers, too!

There are a ton of good food options here, and we have two recommendations.

First is El Pollote on the ground floor, which has excellent (and gluten free!) guava-glazed chicken wings and sandwiches (the latter is not gluten free). Second is Chai Guys , which is some of the best chai that Alysha had in London (she LOVES chai, and these guys / gals do it right!). Get the kadak, which is a sweeter, creamier version. 

The area around the market is also worth exploring. Historic and elegant Covent Garden, situated in London’s West End, is probably our favorite part of central London.

There’s enough to do in Covent Garden to last an entire day, with attractions such as the London Transport Museum, The Royal Opera House, The London Film Museum and many more, but you’ve got a lot to see, so we’d say that you should get some food, do some wandering around the Seven Dials and Neal’s Yard areas, and move on. 

There’s some good shopping, some great coffee ( Monmouth , in particular), and we enjoyed Neal’s Yard Dairy , where we picked out a couple of English cheeses to enjoy later with some excellent fig jam. 

Next, make your way towards the southeastern corner of Hyde Park .

To get there, you can either walk down Oxford Street through Soho, which is similar to Times Square in New York or the Champs-Élysées in Paris, or you can hop on the Tube (Piccadilly Line) and get off at Hyde Park Corner station, which is at the southeastern corner of the park. 

We’d recommend starting at that corner of the park because you get to see the Wellington Arch, which commemorates the Duke of Wellington’s defeat of Napoleon.

Side note: everybody has a victory arch – the Arc de Triomphe in Paris , the Brandenburg Gate in Berlin , the many victory arches in Rome around the Forum, everybody gets an arch!

Then, as you enter the park, you’re immediately confronted with the rose garden, which is cool (although it won’t be blooming in the winter and fall). 

Spend some time wandering through the park, checking out the Serpentine (that’s the lake) and the Serpentine Waterfall ( here on Google Maps), a particularly pretty section of greenery.

You’ll want to make your way to the southern edge of the park – here on Google Maps – which will put you a few blocks from the best museum complex in London (in our opinion, anyway) for a little afternoon education. 

Choose Your Own Adventure, Museum Edition

Now, we’re not huge museum people. We’d much rather spend our time wandering various neighborhoods, checking out some nice green spaces, and eating. Mostly eating, if we’re being completely honest. 

However, we do think that museums are an important part of an itinerary for any big city. We just wouldn’t spend your entire time inside of a museum. 

There are two good museums here that appeal to different interests and audiences – the Natural History Museum , and the Victoria Albert Museum . 

Entry to both is free (although they ask for a donation), so the level of commitment is minimal. If you don’t enjoy it or find it interesting, you can leave! Alternatively, you could visit both and pick and choose what collections you want to look at to get a taste of both, rather than going deep on one or the other.

We chose the Natural History Museum because, well, we like nature? Also because they had a temporary exhibition featuring the winners of an annual wildlife photography contest, which was excellent (though, PRO TIP: temporary exhibitions aren’t free!).

You could pretty easily spend an entire day inside this museum, but we wouldn’t recommend it. Instead, pick a few different sections that sound interesting. 

Oh, and be prepared for kids. LOTS of kids. Although, we were told there are less kids on weekday afternoons, which is part of the reason we slotted it in here.

The second is the Victoria Albert Museum , which is more focused on design – think fashion, interior design, and other more practical applications of art (as opposed to something like a portrait or a painting). It’s an eclectic collection, and is a unique museum that might give you a little more insight into British history and culture than the Natural History Museum might.  

Dinner at Ceru

Ceru , which has a location in South Kensington near the museums, was definitely at the top of our list of our favorite meals we ate in London. 

They do tapas – which really just means you’re going to be ordering a bunch of small plates to share with the table – but in a style that features flavors that come from a region called Levant , which includes places like Turkey, Lebanon, Syria, and Israel.

“Levant” was a new word to me, and I’d recommend a read through the Wikipedia page for a brief history lesson. 

The food is excellent, and it’s a fun dining experience with some really unique wines coming from places like Greece, Lebanon, and other countries you don’t ordinarily associate with wine production. 

Of all the things we ordered, the best thing we ate was the side of roasted parsnips, which is kind of funny.

You’ll also want to try their excellent dips – the hamara, which is made with red peppers and pomegranate molasses, was our favorite of the three – and you can’t go wrong with fried halloumi (which is a squeaky cheese similar to paneer). 

By the time we were done, the plates in front of us had practically been licked clean. 

Day 3: Walking Southbank & the Tower of London

On your third day, start off bright and early at the Tower of London, then make your way across the Tower Bridge to start a walk along the south bank of the Thames down to Westminster Bridge, with plenty of stops along the way (including a stop at Borough Market for lunch). 

Important itinerary note : Since Borough Market is closed Sundays, we’d make sure this day lands on any day but Sunday. 

The Tower of London

We’d highly, highly recommend visiting the Tower of London first thing in the morning.

It’s a popular tourist attraction, and we were totally expecting it to be crowded early on a weekend morning when we showed up. But, somehow, when the doors opened, it was miraculously empty, save for a few other groups. 

Get there at opening time if you can. You’ll have the place largely to yourself. 

The Tower of London sits at the southeastern corner of the town of Londinium, which was established by the Romans. The tower as we know it today was built in the 11th Century by William the Conqueror as a fortress, and has served a wide variety of purposes since its construction, including as a royal palace and, probably most famously, as a notorious prison. 

When you really get into it, the history of the Tower of London is pretty dark. There were so many people executed and tortured here that there are more than three different areas that are marked as places of execution in and around the tower.

Mostly, it was political opponents who were executed for trumped up crimes to get them out of the picture. Multiple members of the royal family have also died within the walls of the Tower, including Henry VI and a pair of princes who disappeared (and were later confirmed to have been buried in the tower).

Since its construction, it has been constantly added to and expanded. Today, the main attractions you’re going to focus on are the Crown Jewels , the ramparts , and the White Tower – the big castle-looking structure in the middle of the complex. 

We’d highly recommend joining one of the Yeoman Warder tours , which happen every 30 minutes and are included in the price of entry. 

More information, including prices and current hours, is available here . 

Tower Bridge

To get to your next destination – the south bank of the Thames – you’ll need to cross the river. You have two options here, and both have their advantages. 

We’d recommend crossing over Tower Bridge , which was built in the late 19th Century and is probably the most iconic of London’s bridges. The Twin Towers, connected by a walkway (we’ll get to that in a second), is one of the main elements of architecture that people think of when they think of London.

Although, as the archaeologist who led our excellent walking tour of London pointed out, most people think it’s the London Bridge. 

We would NOT recommend going up to the top of the bridge, which used to be a legitimate mode of transportation for pedestrians to cross when the drawbridge was up to let boats through, but has shamelessly been turned into a tourist attraction. 

The alternative is crossing London Bridge , which is west of the Tower of London. The advantage? A picture perfect view of Tower Bridge. The downside? The bridge is kind of boring in terms of architecture. 

Plus, one of the best views of the City of London’s skyline is from the river level just west of Tower Bridge on the south bank.

Here, you get a great view of the bridge, and also a nice view of the Tower of London and City of London across the river. 

Borough Market

Borough Market , dating back (almost unbelievably) to before the 12th Century, is one of the largest and oldest markets in the city. 

Despite being crowded and very touristy, Borough Market is one of our favorite places in the city, full stop. There are a couple of sections of the market, not to mention the countless bars and restaurants lining the streets around the market.

You should know that Borough Market is VERY MUCH a lunch destination – it closes in the late afternoon. And it’s closed all day on Sunday, so make sure this falls on any other day of the week.

Essentially, the market is split into two main sections: the ready-to-eat food section (which is where you should eat lunch), and the gourmet food items section. The latter features stands selling everything from English cheese, to tea, to all things Italian, and just about everything else a foodie could dream of. 

If you’re looking for coffee, Monmouth Coffee is excellent, and has a location right outside the western edge of the market ( here on Google Maps). 

Take some time to wander through that section of the market and, when you’re ready for food, head over to the section with all the food stalls for lunch. 

We found ourselves here not once, not twice, but three different times over the course of our time in London. Here are the places we fell in love with, in no particular order. 

• The Black Pig : Amazing pork sandwiches that Alysha demanded to return to on our last day in London. The line here can be nuts. Get the Honey Truffle Parmesan, which is made with slow roasted pork shoulder, honey-truffle mayo, slaw, and aged parmesan. YUM. DEFINITELY NOT GLUTEN FREE. 
• Horn OK Please : Vegetarian Indian street food, including dosas and amazing chai. Matt ate here three times, and would do it again in a heartbeat. Gluten free and vegan options. 
• Tacos Padre : We’ve had some pretty mediocre tacos around the world, but I would put Tacos Padre somewhere near the top of the list of the best tacos I’ve ever had outside of California and Mexico. The lamb barbacoa and the cochinita (a pork slow cooked with achiote) were outstanding. 

After lunch, there’s one more stop that we highly recommend at Borough Market – the Cider House . 

They have a great selection of hard ciders, both on tap and in bottles, to try.

Most are from English cider producers, but we also found offerings here from New Zealand, France, and South Africa. The friendly staff will help you figure out what kind of cider to try based on your tastes. 

A Walk Along the South Bank of the Thames

From Borough Market, make your way all the way down the river to Westminster Bridge, which should take you the better part of a few hours, including stops for a museum, a drink, a bookshop, a snack, and whatever else piques your interest along the way. 

Shakespeare’s Globe Theatre

For over 500 years, England has been a powerhouse in the world of theater, thanks in no small part to William Shakespeare.

A visit to The Globe, a stunning recreation built close to the original Elizabethan theater, gives you the chance to travel back in time and experience a performance in the playhouse that premiered some of the Bard’s best loved works.

Even if you’re not a fan of the theater, The Globe is absolutely worth a visit. The circular outdoor venue hosts productions between April and September, with some of the UK’s most talented actors performing modern (and traditional) interpretations of Shakespeare’s works in an unbelievably atmospheric setting.

If you do want to catch a show, check the schedule here and find a place to fit it in on your itinerary. 

The Tate Modern

Located at the former Bankside Power Station, the Tate Modern is well worth a visit as you wander along the waterfront. The Tate Modern is England’s national gallery dedicated exclusively to modern art.

The permanent collections are completely free of charge to view, and include an impressive selection of art from the likes of Picasso, Rothko and Monet.

On the 10th floor of the Tate’s Blavatnik Building is an open terrace with fantastic views across the city to St. Paul’s and Canary Wharf.

Millennium Bridge

Just outside the Tate, this bridge is in this guide for one reason: the excellent view across the river to St. Paul’s Cathedral. It’s one of the best views in London, and is worth a slight detour to catch it. It’s here on Google Maps. 

Here are a few other stops along the river bank.

Beer Hawk : If you like craft beer and want to sample a selection of the best beers that London has to offer, this is the place to go here. They have a bunch of beers on tap, and even more in bottles. 

Foyles Bookshop : This is one of the best bookstores in London, and they have a location on the ground floor of Southbank Centre, right before you get to Jubilee Bridge (if you’re heading southwest). 

Southbank Centre Food Market : This was a happy accident. It’s Friday-Sunday only, so skip it if this day happens to be a weekday. We walked by it on a walk down the river and discovered Pabellon , our favorite arepa place in London. Arepas are basically a sandwich made between two corn patties that comes from Venezuela. Seriously, go here. It was so good we went back three times. There are plenty of other food stalls here, and there’s also a nice outdoor courtyard with food and shopping called “Gabriel’s Wharf” a little ways back ( here on Google Maps) that is worth poking your head into. 

The London Eye : The London Eye is a little overrated, if we’re being honest. We’ve done it before, but opted out on our latest trip. It’s a little expensive, the lines are long, and the view from the Tate Modern viewing platform – which is free – is a little better. If you have kids, this is a fun experience. If not, we’d probably skip it and spend time elsewhere. 

Once you’re at London Eye, you’re essentially at Westminster Bridge. You’ve already seen that if you followed the first day!

Dinner and Drinks at Mercato Metropolitano

To close out your day, head south of the river to another of our favorite discoveries in London, Mercato Metropolitano . This place is fantastic, and is essentially a big food hall with indoor and outdoor seating (in an atmospheric garden) and a huge variety of different food stalls… all attached to a beer garden!

From Sicilian arancini and granita (two of our favorite discoveries on our Sicily road trip ) to Venezuelan arepas, there are options for basically everyone here, which makes it a good option for groups. 

It’s a very, very popular spot – it was packed full to the brim on a Thursday night when we were there – and there are a bunch of different options to grab a drink. We’d recommend getting there a little early to snag a table, and hanging out and soaking up the atmosphere until you’re ready for dinner. 

Day 4: A Foray into North London (Camden & Notting Hill)

On your last day, venture out of Central London and head north (it’s really only 20 minutes or so, nothing too crazy) out to Notting Hill. From there, make your way along the Regent’s Canal to Little Venice, and finally stroll into Camden, with a stop for the view at Primrose Hill on the way. 

Notting Hill and Portobello Road

Start your morning in Notting Hill at Notting Hill Gate station , which is serviced by the Central District, and Circle tube lines. 

From there, embark on a self-guided walking tour of one of London’s most charming neighborhoods, made famous by the movie of the same name. 

You’ll essentially follow Portobello Road all the way through the neighborhood from south to north, which will take you to both highlights here – the Portobello Road Market, and the colorful houses at the other end of the neighborhood. 

Here’s a map of the walk . 

The Portobello Road Market is best on Saturdays, when the streets are packed with vendors. But it’s worth a stroll on other days of the week too, particularly Fridays. It’s part food market, part antique market, and part everything else market. 

At the northern end, leave Portobello Road and head to the two most photogenic parts of the neighborhood, where you’ll find those colorful homes that have made this area Instagram famous in recent years.

Both areas are literally a block away from each other – Saint Lukes Mews is a colorful back alley, and Lancaster Road is where you’ll find the multi-colored houses (which remind us of the famous Victorians in San Francisco !). 

A Walk Along Regent’s Canal

This next section is optional, and is best for people who are up for a nice walk. It’s sometimes scenic, sometimes a little boring. If that doesn’t sound like something you’re interested in, take the Tube to Camden and skip this section. 

We actually walked all the way from Notting Hill to Camden along Regent’s Canal, which took a couple of hours and led us through Little Venice, which is easily the most picturesque piece of the walk. 

Here’s a map of the route . Near the end, you’ll be walking across the canal from the London Zoo in Regents Park, and you can see the giraffes, warthogs, and African wild dogs from the path. 

Camden Market (and Camden Town)

Camden is a fascinating area, and we spent a third of our trip staying here to soak it all up. 

Punk music was essentially born in this part of London, and that part of the neighborhood’s character is still very much front and center, with a variety of eclectic shops blasting heavy metal music lining Camden High Street. 

However, the highlight here is London’s most-visited food market, Camden Market . 

Situated right on Regent’s Canal, Camden Market is a sprawling complex of shops, food stalls, and more permanent restaurants. There are several sections of the market, but the best part is on the north side of the Canal ( here on Google Maps).

The market is overwhelming, with all sorts of smells and sounds attacking your senses, but it’s well worth wandering a bit to take in everything it has to offer, from Indonesian curries to heavy metal-inspired t-shirts. It feels like it just keeps going and going, and the scale of the market is pretty staggering. 

Here are a few of our highlights that, unsurprisingly, heavily focus on food. 

• Maize Blaze : A contemporary take on Colombian food (we spent six weeks in Colombia , and absolutely LOVED it), they have a limited menu available at the stall here that has bowls with various toppings. If you are looking for things like arepas and fried plantains with a sweet chili sauce, you can find them at their kitchen just a few blocks away (you’ll have to order online for pickup). 
• Arepazo / Arepa Venezuelan Kitchen : To be honest, I don’t know what the name of this stand is. But I do know that it’s the place to get arepas at Camden Market. The pabellon, a pulled beef, was some of the best we had in London, and the vibes at the stand with the blasting music and dancing chef were awesome. 
• Kolkati : Not gluten free, but Alysha saw it at Broadway Market (another market worth visiting) and decided she had to have it. So she finally got it here at Camden Market. They make kati rolls, which are a street food staple of Kolkata that consists of fillings (either meat and accouterments or paneer) wrapped in bread. 
• Pamban Chai & Coffee House : If you like chai (like Alysha does), you shouldn’t miss this place. Their rose chai was Alysha’s favorite chai in London, and we drank A LOT of chai while we were in town. You can get a flight to try multiple of their chai offerings!

Chalk Farm Road

After lunch, you’ll undoubtedly start to notice Camden getting busier. While it’s tempting to spend the day drinking at the Ice Wharf, overlooking the lock, drag yourself out of busy Camden Town and wander down Chalk Farm Road towards the station of the same name.

Along the way, ( see here for directions ) you’ll see lots of cool street art and pass the famous Roundhouse (the famous punk concert venue), shortly after which you’ll need to turn left along Regent’s Park Road and across the bridge that takes you over the railway tracks.

Continuing up Regent’s Park Road takes you to another world. This pretty part of London has some lovely little shops and cafes, and is a favorite haunt for local (and international) celebrities, many of whom live close by.

Primrose Hill

As you head further up the street, you’ll find two of the once commonplace bright red British phone boxes, and after a classic photo opportunity, you’ll see that you’ve reached the entrance to Primrose Hill park. 

Primrose Hill is a wonderful place to spend a sunny couple of hours. You won’t find many tourists in this part of London, just lots of locals lounging in the sun or taking in the amazing vistas from this perfect vantage point, where you’re able to see nearly every famous building in the city.

After Primrose Hill, you’ll be well into the afternoon of your last day in London. For the evening, we’d recommend grabbing dinner and drinks in a place that you’ve already visited, but wanted to spend more time. 

Catch a Show!

We’d also recommend using this evening to catch a show, either at the Globe Theatre if you want a unique experience, or somewhere in the West End if you’re looking to see one of the more famous contemporary shows. 

We’ve seen Hamilton , Book of Mormon , and Lion King , and Harry Potter and the Cursed Child , and we’d recommend all of them (although Book of Mormon probably isn’t for kids or people who are easily offended). 

Check out what shows are happening in London while you’re in town here . 

What to Do with Less Time in London

We had almost two full weeks in London, but we realize most people aren’t blessed with that much time to explore. Or even able to spend four days. 

Here’s how we’d spend less time in London, from one to three days. You can use these overviews to get an idea of the plan, and then use the detailed sections in the itinerary above to go deeper on the places you end up including. 

London in a Day

With just a day in London, you’re really going to have to pick and choose what you do and see, because a day is not nearly enough time. 

But, we’re here to give you our best take on how to spend your time, so let’s talk about what a perfect day in London looks like, at least for us. 

Immediately, we think you should skip the museums. The Natural History Museum and Victoria and Albert Museum are both cool, but they’re pretty far away from the rest of Central London. 

The other thing you’re going to have to miss is the Changing of the Guard . First of all, it doesn’t happen every single day year-round, so there’s a chance that it’s not even happening on the day you’re in London. Second, having that specific time in mind makes it hard to plan the rest of the day.  

Instead, focus on exploring the area around the Thames. Start your day at Buckingham Palace , the Queen’s part time residence (we were told by multiple people that she’s hardly ever there these days). Make your way to Westminster Abbey from there, and admire Big Ben before walking over the Westminster Bridge . 

From there, make your way along the south bank of the Thames, following the walk in the main itinerary above. 

Stop at Borough Market for lunch, then make your way across either London Bridge (better views, specifically of Tower Bridge and the Tower of London), or Tower Bridge (worse views, but a cool experience) and head to the Tower of London . 

Finally, make your way on a walk through the city of London, and end at St. Paul’s Cathedral. 

2 Days in London

With 2 days in London, you’ll need to do some swapping around of activities, but you can use the first three days of the itinerary above as a baseline. 

Here’s how we’d do it. 

On the first day, combine the morning of day 1 (St. Paul’s, the London Museum, and the City of London) and the morning of day 2 (Big Ben, Westminster Abbey, and Buckingham Palace). Start with the Westminster stuff to make sure to get to the Abbey early, and end with St. Paul’s. Head to Shoreditch for dinner and drinks. 

On the second day, follow day 3 as written above. If you want to catch a show while you’re in town do it on your second evening. 

3 Days in London

With 3 days in London, we’d follow the itinerary above as written, and skip day 4 altogether. While it’s a bummer to miss out on Camden Market, you’re making it to Borough Market, so you’ve got a taste of London’s food markets. 

If you want to catch a show, you can add it to any of the evenings pretty easily. 

Specific Days of the Week to Keep in Mind for Your Trip

One of the things we realized as we sat down to outline this guide is that a lot of the things to do depend on what days of the week you’re in town. This is particularly relevant for some of the food markets. 

For example, Borough Market is amazing on Saturday, closed on Sunday, and pretty good on weekdays. But only at lunchtime!

On the other hand, Broadway Market up north is really a Saturday destination, when the streets are packed with vendors selling all kinds of delicious food. 

Here are some considerations for days of the week to keep in mind as you’re planning your trip (there’s more detail on what exactly these places are and what they offer in the detailed 4 day London itinerary above). 

• Borough Market : Lunch only, Monday to Saturday. 
• Broadway Market : Definitely go on Saturday for lunch. 
• Camden Market : Mostly a lunch spot, and you should also go on Saturday if you can. 
• Spitalfields Market : Weekends are best here, when the entire interior is lined with stalls selling food, arts and crafts, and other fun stuff to peruse. 
• Portobello Road Market : The market in Notting Hill is, again, best on Saturdays, when the majority of vendors are set up. 
• Columbia Road Flower Market : Sundays only!
• The Sunday Upmarket : The vintage/food market on Brick Lane is a weekends only destination, both Saturday and Sunday.  

“WOW” you say, “that’s a LOT of weekend only markets – which ones do you like best?” 

We purposefully made sure our 12 days included two weekends, because the food market culture in London stuck out to us as something that was super unique.

If we had to choose, we’d opt for the Broadway Market , which feels much more like a neighborhood farmers market than any other market we visited (and we went twice!), and the Spitalfields Market and Upmarket , which are a few blocks away from each other. 

You should also definitely visit Camden Market and Borough Market, but the day of the week matters less for those (though they’re both lunchtime destinations, rather than evening destinations). 

When to Visit London

London is a city of seasons, though those seasons might look a little different than the seasons you’re used to. 

Matt has now been to London multiple times in the spring , and it’s a little bit of a toss up in terms of the weather. On this last trip, we were in London for two weeks. At the beginning, it was summer weather, and Londoners came out in full force on the first sunny weekend after a dreary winter. We’re talking tank tops and sundresses all over the place. 

A few days later, it was snowing. Literally. 

So if you’re coming in the spring, be prepared for unpredictable weather – you might be warm, cold, or wet, or all three in one day! Layers are going to be your friend, and a rain jacket is essential. 

In the summer – which means about June through August – the weather is warm, the skies are clear (mostly), and summer festivals are in full swing. It’s easily the busiest time of year, so you’ll be paying more for accommodations, and you’ll want to book things like museum entries as early as possible. 

Fall is similar to spring, but it’s a little bit more predictable. It’s going to be cool – think 50’s and 60’s on most days – and it will rain a few days here and there, but it’s a lovely time to be in London. 

Winter is gray and dreary, and the days are very, very short. However, London around Christmas is supposed to be magical, and the city lights up with Christmas lights, with markets set up all around the city. It’s going to be relatively cheap, aside from December, when prices are surprisingly high. 

Getting Around London (Using Public Transit)

We didn’t quite understand just how massive London is until we had spent some time moving around it. I mean, sure, we knew it was a huge city with 10 million people, but I don’t think we quite understood just how long it takes to get from one end of the city to the other. 

For that reason (p.s., the answer can be well over an hour, depending on where you’re headed), we highly recommend investing in an unlimited public transportation card while you’re in London , which is called a Travelcard and is something you can buy at the machines at most Tube stations. 

The Travelcard gives you unlimited access to the Underground and buses in London. Both are efficient, relatively clean (coming from the US), and will get you from point A to point B far faster than your own two feet. You’ll need to choose the duration based on your trip – one day, two days, a week. More information here . 

Since you’ll likely only need zones 1-2 for most of the sights in Central London, we’d recommend purchasing your Travelcard separately from your trip from the airport (more on that in a second). The airport is outside of that range, and it would increase the price of your pass substantially. 

An alternative would be to pay £5 for an Oyster Card, which you can top up as you go. Again, you’d buy both the card and add any value at Tube Stations. You can use this to tap on and off the tube and buses (you don’t actually tap off when you ride the bus in London, just to be clear). 

Top Travel Tip : Search for “TFL” (Transport for London) on the Apple or Google Play store for an app with a wealth of maps, timetables and transport information. 

Getting Around by Electric Bike

Electric bike rentals have exploded in popularity across London over the last decade. 

The largest bike rental company in London is Santander Cycles, though locals refer to them as “Boris Bikes”, after their introduction by then-mayor and now Prime Minister Boris Johnson, way back in 2010. 

The bikes have been rented over ninety-three million times since their introduction, and cost £2 per 30-minute ride, with drop-off and pick-up points all across the city. 

Getting Around on Foot

Unlike San Francisco, the last place we lived full time, London is fairly flat, which makes it easy to get around on foot. In fact, you’ll notice that a lot of the itinerary above involves walking from place to place, which is a very pleasant way to explore the city. 

However, we also mentioned that London is huge, which means you’re going to want to supplement your walking with public transportation if you’ve got limited time and want to fit in as much as possible. 

Getting to the City from London Heathrow

As far as getting into the city from the airport, you have a few different options, and which you end up choosing is going to depend on your budget and how much time you have. 

We’ll go from fastest (and most expensive) to slowest (and most affordable). 

First is the Heathrow Express , which is a train that runs between Paddington Station and Heathrow in 15-20 minutes flat with no other stops. The downside is that it’s VERY expensive if you book it at the last minute, and it doesn’t quite get you into the areas of London you’re probably staying in, so it will require a transfer. 

If you’re able to book more than 90 days in advance, you can get tickets for as little as £5.50 each way , which is a steal of a deal, and will cost about the same as the longer Tube option, taking about ¼ as long. 

The second option, which is expensive and likely takes about an hour, door to door, is taking a taxi . You can either pre-book a car hire to pick you up and drop you at your hotel, or grab one of London’s charming black taxi cabs from the stand at arrivals. Fares are standardized – sort of – and depend on the time of day and day of the week. You can find a general guide here on the government website with approximate fares based on when/where you’re going. 

Last is taking the Underground all the way from Heathrow, which is what we ended up doing. It costs right around £6, and takes about an hour to go from the airport to Central London on the Piccadilly Line. Depending on where you’re staying, you might need to make a transfer, which is relatively straightforward. Buy tickets at the machines at the airport just before you leave the concourse and enter the Underground station. 

Taking the Tube (another name for the Underground) during rush hour with luggage will likely be a nightmare, so take that into consideration if you’re arriving between 8:00 am – 10:00 am or 4:00 pm – 6:00 pm. 

Getting to London

When it comes to figuring out how to get yourself to London, you’ll find that the city is extremely well connected. The city is a major travel hub for Europe, the United States and countless other destinations around the world. 

Flying into London

Here’s a brief rundown of the major airports surrounding the city. There are three of them, and the main airport with the widest array of flights (and ways to get into the city) is London Heathrow (LHR) . 

London Heathrow (LHR)

Heathrow is by far the busiest airport in the UK. That means it’s probably the airport you’re most likely to be arriving at, especially if you’re flying in from the United States. 

Heathrow is the closest of the large London airports to the city center, so it’s definitely the best place to land if you have the choice.

London Gatwick (LGW)

Gatwick Airport is located 28 miles to the south of London. The airport is smaller than Heathrow, and mainly connects to destinations across Europe. If you’re planning on arriving on a budget flight (Easyjet, WizzAir, Ryanair) there’s a good chance you’ll come into Gatwick. 

Don’t be put off by Gatwick’s location. It’s extremely easy (and fast) to reach the center of London using the Gatwick Express direct train service. The trains run every 15 minutes between the airport’s South Terminal and London’s Victoria Station daily from 5:00 am until 12.30 am. The nonstop journey takes around 30 minutes.

London Stansted (STN)

London Stansted is situated to the north of the city, and it takes around 50 minutes to arrive at central London’s Liverpool Street Station by express train.  

Stansted, like Gatwick, is predominantly used by budget operators like Ryanair. Stanstead is a busy airport, but many of the flights cater to Eastern European destinations, so it may be of limited use for many of you.

Taking the Eurostar into London

Eurostar is a high-speed train service that links the UK to continental Europe. Trains travel through the Channel Tunnel, across the English countryside of Kent, before arriving in London’s King’s Cross St. Pancras Station .

So What’s the Appeal?

Well, for one, it’s very efficient. Paris to London takes around 2.5 hours, and you’ll arrive (and depart) from the heart of the city center at each end of your journey. 

It’s also possible to travel from Brussels, Amsterdam and even further out, meaning you could visit London by train as part of a longer European trip. Besides, there’s something romantic about traveling by train, and it’s something we wish we could do more of at home in the United States. 

Matt is the founder and main writer behind Wheatless Wanderlust, which he started back in 2018 as a way to share his gluten free travel guides with his fellow Celiac travelers.

Since then, Matt and his wife Alysha have visited 18 national parks, spent three months in Europe and six weeks in Colombia, and have explored every corner of the Pacific Northwest, which is where Matt grew up.

He writes super detailed guides to the places they visit, bringing together personal experience and historical context to help YOU plan an amazing trip.

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

The Ultimate 4-Day London Itinerary

This 4-day London itinerary is packed full of famous sights, fun experiences, delicious food and hidden gems.

London is my favourite city in the world. It’s my home and has been for over 15 years. It’s a place where there’s always somewhere new to explore, tonnes of amazing restaurants to eat at and experiences you never imagined existing. London is vibrant, exciting and constantly evolving.

Yes, I just really love London … OK?

Lots of people visiting London for the first time only have a day or two in the city. That’s enough time for a whistle-stop tour of the sights, but if you can afford a few extra days you’ll understand a bit more of what makes London so special.

If you’re planning your trip at the moment, this 4-day London itinerary is a great place to start. It can be stressful planning a good route in a city you don’t know. Now you don’t need to worry about a thing!

Across your 4 days in London you’ll get to see all of the famous sights including Buckingham Palace, Big Ben and the Tower of London, visit some of the city’s top museums, enjoy some retail therapy, stroll through some of the prettiest parks, explore some urban and edgy areas AND even take a day trip to the Harry Potter Studio Tour.

This 4 day itinerary is perfect for families, couples or groups of friends as there’s something for everyone! Ready to start planning your dream city break in London? Here we go!

Planning your trip to London? Here are a few quick highlights:

Day 1: See the sights of Central London

Whether this is your first trip to London or you’ve been several times before, it’s always exciting to see the city’s famous landmarks. I’d recommend kicking off your trip in style with a self-guided walking tour starting at Buckingham Palace. Time it right and you could even see the changing of the guard ceremony!

After a quick pose in front of the famous gates at Buckingham Palace, take a stroll through St James’s Park towards Big Ben and the Houses of Parliament. The architecture is absolutely breath-taking and is guaranteed to have you reaching for your camera.

Continue your self-guided tour by crossing the River Thames over Westminster Bridge and enjoying views of the London Eye. Built as temporary structure for the millennium celebrations, it was so popular it has stayed ever since.

I used to work as a tour guide on the London Eye (back in my student days) and despite going around on that wheel 200+ times, I still always recommend it to tourists visiting London. One rotation and you’ll get your bearings, see the city landmarks and enjoy a fun tourist experience all at once.

If you’re tired of walking, I’d suggest you catch a boat along the Thames from the pier in front of the London Eye all the way down to Tower Bridge. The Uber Boats by Thames Clippers stop at 23 piers along the Thames. For this journey you’ll only be going a short distance, and you’re looking to hop on board the RB1 or RB2. You can use Oyster Cards or Contactless bank cards on board.

As you head downstream, look out for more of London’s famous landmarks. On the right you’ll see the Tate Modern art gallery, which is housed in a former power station. On the left you’ll spot the enormous dome of St Paul’s Cathedral (the final resting place of Lord Nelson, the Duke of Wellington and Sir Christopher Wren.)

You’ll also pass under London Bridge and spot the looming towers of the city, as well as seeing London’s tallest building, The Shard. Kids will adore travelling by boat – it’s a really fun way to see the city.

Once you’ve taken some photos in front of the fairytale-esque Tower Bridge, it’s time to explore the Tower of London. This UNESCO World Heritage Centre is one of the oldest buildings in London and has a fascinating past. In fact, the White Tower dates back to 1078!

Over the years it’s been a royal palace, a prison and a treasury. These days it’s where you’ll find the dazzling crown jewels. I didn’t visit until I was in my 20s, but it was an amazing experience to get up close to so much British history.

I’d definitely recommend booking tickets to the Tower of London in advance , as it can get pretty busy.

You’ve packed a lot into day 1 of this 4-Day London itinerary. It’s time to enjoy some food and rest before a busy day tomorrow!

Day 2: Museums, parks and shops of West London

After a busy day of sightseeing yesterday, today we’re kicking off with some of London’s most popular museums.

South Kensington is home to three of London’s largest and most interesting museums. Not only are they located moments from each other, they’re also free to enter. Yes, totally free! Check the websites before visiting as it can be necessary to book a ticket with a time slot.

The Natural History Museum is dedicated to creatures great and small, and hosts fascinating exhibitions throughout the year. It’s home to around 80 million plant, animal, fossil, rock and mineral specimens, and is somewhere you can see stuffed dodos, whale skeletons and even learn about dinosaurs. The building is beautiful too – a true London architectural wonder.

Meanwhile, head a few paces along and you’ll be in the Science Museum . This world-class museum has seven floors packed full of interesting exhibits. It charts everything from transport to computers and biology to physics. Kids will adore the WonderLab, an area filled with interactive exhibits which genuinely make learning fun!

Or for those interested in art and fashion, the Victoria and Albert Museum is home to one of the greatest collections of decorative art, design, fashion and textiles in the world. You could spend an entire day at the museums here, but I’d recommend picking one for the morning of day three.

After spending the morning in the museums, it’s time for some fresh air. It’s lucky that a few minutes away on foot is London’s most famous park, Hyde Park. This 350-acre park is home to over 4,000 trees, a large lake, a meadow and pretty flower gardens. It’s a lovely place for a walk or a cycle. You could rent a boat on The Serpentine or even take a dip in the lido!

If you head north through Hyde Park, then west through Kensington Gardens, you’ll eventually emerge close to Notting Hill Gate, another vibrant part of London.

Spend the afternoon wandering the pretty streets and enjoying the pastel-coloured houses and old-style charm. Some of my favourite streets include Lancaster Road, St Luke’s Mews, Colville Terrace and Elgin Crescent. I just love how colourful this part of London is. You’ll definitely want to take some holiday snaps!

One of the big draws in Notting Hill is Portobello Road Market. This legendary London street is synonymous with vintage and antique shopping. The best day to visit is Saturday, as that’s when you’ll find most of the stalls on the street.

There are also plenty of pubs, cafes and street food options around the market area, so you can refuel between purchases!

That’s quite a lot to pack into day 2, so it’s time for another good night’s sleep before you find out what’s in store for day 3.

Day 3: Cool days exploring Camden and East London

It’s hard to cram the best of London into just 4 days, but I’m giving it a go with this fun and varied itinerary. After ticking off London’s most famous sights on day 1 and exploring the city’s cultural and colourful side on day 2, it’s now time for something completely different.

Day 3 kicks off with a wander up to one of my favourite London viewpoints, Primrose Hill. Close to Regent’s Park, this hill boasts a gorgeous view of the city skyline. On sunny days, it’s one of the most popular picnic spots in the entire city. You might even struggle for a spot!

After taking in the London skyline, it’s time to visit another of the city’s most famous markets. Camden Market is home to over 1000 shops and food outlets, and has a vibrant independent spirit.

After wandering through the shops in the Stables Market area, grab a bite to eat from one of the stalls out in the courtyard by the lock. From Greek souvlaki and Caribbean jerk chicken, to metre long sausages, authentic Portuguese nata tarts and liquid nitrogen ice cream, this delicious food market has something for everyone!

Be sure to soak up the quirky Camden vibes before you venture to the next spot. I’m talking street art, goths, music and more! It’s a vibrant spot and somewhere that feels very ‘London’… if you ignore the hordes of foreign tourists of course! Although, what could be more ‘London’ than tourists?!

One of my favourite walking routes in London is along the Grand Union Canal, which stretches towards the north of the centre of the city. The walk from Camden Lock to King’s Cross takes around 30-minutes.

King’s Cross is another area I love. It’s recently been regenerated and it’s fair to say it’s changed a lot – 100% for the better!

One of the newest additions is Coal Drop’s Yard – a multi-purpose shopping and eating district. It’s upmarket and cool, with lots of places you’ll be dying to visit. Feast on tacos at Casa Pastor, enjoy tasty Spanish flavours at Barrafina or enjoy cocktails out on the terrace at Parrillan. When the sun is shining, this is a great place to go.

After embracing this new hotspot, enjoy a stroll through Granary Square where, if you’re still hungry, I’d recommend eating at Caravan . With a menu of interesting small and large plates, and a buzzy ambience, it’s one of my favourite restaurants in London.

Still got some energy? Now it’s time to hop on a train east from St Pancras International over to Stratford for a stroll through the Olympic Park. There you’ll be able to see the huge stadium used in the 2012 Olympic Games as well as exploring the gardens and park areas that have become the legacy of the epic year in London’s history!

Walking through the Olympic Park is also the perfect way to reach Hackney, one of London’s coolest and most urban areas. Walk along the canal path and you’ll see huge murals by some the world’s top street artists. There are endless cool bars, pop ups, foodie spots and hidden gems in this part of London. I spot new things every time I go there – it’s constantly changing!

If you’re looking for cocktails or beers, Barge East (located on a barge, but with a large garden area too) and Number 90 are two favourites of mine. The authentic Italian pizza at Natura is also incredible!

This area is great for nightlife, especially on Fridays and Saturdays. If you’ve still got the energy to party, you’ll love Hackney!

Day 4: Harry Potter Studio Tour or who knows?

So, you’ve made it to day 4 and you’re wondering what else there is to see in London? Well, absolutely loads to be honest! The last three days have given a flavour of the city, but wow is there a lot more to see!

If you’re a fan of Harry Potter, you’ll definitely want to squeeze in a day trip to Warner Bros Studio Tour London: The Making of Harry Potter. There you can explore the real-life sets, check out props and costumes from the movies and learn about the magical film series.

If you’re planning to visit, it’s worth bearing in mind that this isn’t really IN London! It’s just outside so you’ll need to book transport as well as entry tickets. You can catch a train to Watford Junction, then hop on board the magical shuttle bus. Or, book an all-inclusive ticket which includes transport to and from the studios.

If you’d rather spend your final day in London exploring more of the city, I’ve got lots more suggestions. You could visit Westminster Abbey, the world-famous British Museum or the National Portrait Gallery. This itinerary hasn’t included Soho, Chinatown, Covent Garden, Leicester Square or Piccadilly Circus either. These spots are all pretty close together so could be explored in half a day.

If you enjoyed exploring Camden and Portobello Markets, how about seeing a few more? Borough Market is one of the foodie hubs in the city, with tasty treats from across the globe.

Alternatively, there’s a mix of vintage clothing, handmade items and food on offer at Old Spitalfields Market near Liverpool Street. This is also close to Brick Lane, also known as curry mile! I challenge you to stroll down this street and NOT stop for some Indian cuisine.

If you feel like you’ve ticked off the key sights and fancy something a little bit different, I’d recommend taking a look at my huge guide to quirky and unusual things to do in London . From awe-inspiring afternoon teas and escape room experiences , to water sports and helicopter tours , you’re guaranteed to find something you’d love to try on your final day in the city. Plus, I’ve created this London post which is full of helpful advice and tips for planning a trip to the city.

How to get around London

If you’re spending 4 days in London, the easiest way to get around is using public transport. This is a congested city, so travelling by tube will save you a lot of time.

If you’re a visitor to the UK, purchase an Oyster Card when you arrive. This is a card that can be topped up with money to cover each journey you go on. You tap the card on the entrance and exit gates at tube stations, or just once when you board a bus or a boat.

If you have a Contactless bank card, this is the easiest way to pay. Tap your card or mobile on the receiver and the barriers will open.

One other tip for visitors to London – I’d recommend downloading the App Citymapper . It’s brilliant for navigating on public transport and is always up to date with timings. I use it every single time I go out in London!

The other simple way to travel is by Uber. No matter where you go in London, you’ll never be far from an Uber. These taxis are great for getting directly from A to B.

You might also find it useful to order a London Pass. Now digital, the London Pass gives you access to over 80 attractions in the city. It’s only economic if you plan to visit a lot of attractions (which isn’t something I’ve focused on in this itinerary).

Recap of 4-day London itinerary

Day 1: Sightseeing in Central London

• Buckingham Palace
• St James’s Park
• Houses of Parliament
• River Thames Boat Trip
• Tower Bridge
• Tower of London
• Natural History Museum
• Science Museum
• Notting Hill
• Portobello Road
• Camden Market
• Primrose Hill
• Walk along the canal to King’s Cross
• Coal Drop’s Yard
• Granary Square
• Olympic Park, Stratford
• Hackney Wick

Day 4: Harry Potter Studio Tour OR Quirky things to do in London

I hope you have an amazing time in London and this guide helps you plan your trip. Let me know if you have any questions.

Enjoyed this London 4 day itinerary? Pin it for later…

Chloe Gunning

With a passion for food, fun and adventure, Chloe is the content creator behind one of the UK's top travel blogs Wanderlust Chloe. From volcano boarding in Nicaragua, to sailing around Sicily and eating her way around Japan, her travels have taken her to some of the coolest spots on the planet. Named Travel Influencer of the Year in 2022, Chloe regularly works with a number of tourism boards, producing inspirational travel content across multiple platforms. Find out more about Chloe here.

Leave a comment Cancel reply

• CITY BREAK , LONDON

The Best 4 Days in London Itinerary (by a local)

• November 2, 2023

4 days in London is a good amount of time to appreciate what this pulsating city has to offe r.  In this guide, I’ll be sharing a recommended four day London Itinerary, including the best places to visit, where to eat, sleep, & party, as well as all of my top tips for visiting.

London is one of the most happening and exciting cities in all of Europe.  Maybe it’s because I’m a Londoner that I love London town , but it’s true.

With its rich history, vibrant culture, magnificent architecture, eccentric fashion, wild nightlife, and unrivalled culinary scene, London ignites your senses in every possible way.

I’d like to think I know London city pretty well. After all, I lived and worked here most of my life. That’s how I know that my 4 day London itinerary is the best on the internet.

I’m here to advise you on all of the top London hotspots, as well as some cool hidden gems that not many tourists get to hear about. I will also share my insider tips and knowledge to ensure you have the best possible time exploring the city.

Sound good? Let’s get to it then. Here is a perfect Itinerary for 4 Days in London.  

Disclosure:  Some of the links in this post are affiliate links. If you purchase a product through these links, we will earn a small commission  at no extra cost to you.  And we can continue bringing you free tips and advice. If you found the content helpful and are kind enough to use our affiliates –  you are awesome, and we thank you! 

Is 4 Days in London Enough?

London is a massive city, i t boasts an abundance of things to see and do.

It would be impossible to experience it all of London in 4 days, so I encourage you to plan your time wisely prioritising what you want from your trip.  

In my opinion, the perfect London 4 day itinerary combines a balance of significant landmarks.  But you’ll also have some time to wander off the beaten path and discover some of the more  unusual things to do in London .

That’s why when people ask me how to long to stay in London, 4 days is the minimum. With four days in London, you can cover most of the city’s main attractions, including parks and museums.

With this in mind, I’m confident that if you follow my suggested London itinerary, you’ll feel like you’ve experienced the very  best of what the city has to offer .

• Follow us on Instagram

Where to Stay in London

There are several factors to consider when  choosing where to stay in London . Budget usually being the most prevalent one.

It’s no secret that London is an expensive city. So while staying in central London is ideal for sightseeing, it’s not going to be your most budget-friendly option.

Thankfully, London’s public transport network is one of the best in the world. This means you can stay on the outskirts of London, and be able to reach the city centre quickly and easily.

With 4 days in London or more, I’d say this is a valid option. 

Best London Neighbourhoods

If you want to be at the very  heart of all the action , you may wish to consider staying in  Victoria  or  Covent Garden . You can expect to pay high-end prices for accommodation, but with many key attractions within walking distance of your hotel, this area is very convenient indeed.

For the  night owls and fashionistas ,  Soho  is a chic central neighbourhood boasting a realm of nightlife, restaurants, and shopping. Also famed for being the epicentre of  LGBTQ+ culture in London , it’s one of the most vibrant and happening districts in the city.

For those looking for somewhere a little  offbeat and quirky , I would look into staying in  Shoreditch  (East London) or  Camden  (North London). Both areas are eccentric and unconventional in their own right, highlighting an amalgamation of street art, markets, nightlife and underground edge.  

If you’re  travelling as a family  or you’d prefer a more  ‘local’ neighbourhood vibe , I suggest staying in  Notting Hill  or  Kensington . Located in West London, both areas are peaceful and close to some of the city’s best attractions, while the city centre is easily accessible via public transport.

Alternatively, you may look at staying nearby, in which case you can compare hotels in here . Or use the Map below to see all your options​:

The Best of London in 4 Days

I go into quite a lot of detail in this comprehensive London Itinerary; so, for those who are short on time, here’s an overview of the best places to visit.

• See some of  Britain’s most famous landmarks  such as Big Ben & St Pauls’s Cathedral.
• Take in some of the  best views of the city  from the London Eye or the Shard.
• Meander the various  free museums in London , including the National History Museum and the National Gallery.
• Shop ’til you drop on  Oxford Street .
• Immerse in  London’s history  at the Tower of London.
• Escape the hustle and bustle at the picturesque  Hyde Park .
• Get lost in one of London’s  plentiful markets .
• Hunt for street art  and other quirky pleasures in Shoreditch or Camden.
• Enjoy some of the best Chinese food outside of China in  China Town . 
• Experience the fabulous atmosphere of a  London West End show .

Suggested 4 Days in London Itinerary

Okay, so this is an action-packed London itinerary. It means getting out early in the morning and arriving back late at night. The idea is that you experience as much of the city as you can during your stay.

Of course, this is only a guide. If this 4 days in London itinerary seems a bit much for you, you can cut out anything that you don’t mind missing. I’ll detail it all below, and then you can refine the list to suit your needs.

Here’s a quick run down of what to expect.

• Day 1 : Iconic London Landmarks & Sights
• Day 2 : London History & Culture
• Day 3 : London Museums, Parks, and Shopping
• Day 4 : Offbeat London and Hidden Gems

Related Read

Day 1 of 4 Days in London

Iconic London Landmarks & Sights…

• Big Ben & The Houses of Parliament

St James Park

Westminster abbey, buckingham palace.

• Picadilly Circus & Trafalgar Square
• Covent Garden & China Town

Waterloo is the closest tube station to our first stop of the day. When you have arrived, exit the station following the signs for South Bank. Use this Transport for London journey planner to map out your journey. 

Okay, time to get acquainted with the city you’ll be seeing alot of London in 4 days. There aren’t many better ways to do that than to view it all from above.

The iconic London Eye is a 135-metre Observation Wheel – one of the largest of its kind in the world. Located on the South Bank of the Thames, it’s one of the most recognisable structures amid the London cityscape.

It’s also quite pricy to ride the London Eye. Nonetheless, it’s still the most popular paid attraction in the UK, so it’s worth  buying your ticket in advance  so you can skip the queue.

Big Ben & The Houses of Parliament

Next, we will take a gentle stroll along the Thames and  cross over at Westminster Bridge . The bridge itself is a landmark in its own right, providing an iconic view of Big Ben and the Houses of Parliament.   

The bridge will be bustling with tourists, locals and street performers as well.  Be wary of scammers  in these parts though, which often involve some kind of game. If it seems too good to be true, it probably is.

Big Ben (which is the name of the bell, not the tower) and the Houses of Parliament are considered  national treasures of London .

Most will be happy to admire from the outside. But if you’re at all interested in politics, it is possible to  witness a debate at the Houses of Parliament .  

You will need to book in advance, but it is one of the few  free things to do in London .

A short 5-minute walk from Big Ben is Westminster Abbey – One of the UK’s most notable churches .

Remarkably, it was Benedictine monks that founded Westminster Abbey in 960AD. It’s the final resting place of some of the country’s key historical figures, such as Charles D!ckens, Sir Isaac Newton, and Anne of Cleves.

Alongside a striking facade, the Abbey is a treasure house of paintings, stained glass, and artefacts documenting over 1000 years of British history.

It has also served as a coronation church, bearing witness to several royal weddings. And home to the coronation chair, whereby every King and Queen of England is crowned.

It’s much cheaper to book in advance , than on the day. If you’re interested in British history, architecture, or the Royal family, it’s worth the money.

You’ll find various coffee shops and restaurants nearby the Abbey. But if it’s a nice day, I suggest picking something up to go and having a picnic in nearby St James Park.

One of  8 royal parks in London , this area is incredibly picturesque and an ideal spot to take a break from the hustle & bustle.

On route to the park, you can walk past Downing Street, the home of the British Prime Minister. You can’t walk down the street itself, but you can give Boris a wave (or the finger) through the gate.

To fool your friends, you’ll find a replica of 10 Downing Street 800 metres away.  10 Adam Street  is now a hotspot for tourists wanting a souvenir photo!

A gentle stroll through St James Park will lead you to Buckingham Palace – the official London  residence of the Royal Family .

While it is possible to go inside the Royal Palace, it is only open to the public between July and October. It’s also a rather expensive attraction.

In any case, the highlight for most visitors is to witness the  changing of the guard . This is when the Queen’s guard hands over responsibility for protecting the palace to the new guard.

The guards in their traditional red tunics and bearskin hats are national icons. Many consider the ceremony a quintessential London experience.  It’s free to attend.

Tip – Please note, the days and times of the changing of the guard ceremony, differ from week to week. Always check the changing guard website  on the date you plan to visit.

Piccadilly Circus & Trafalgar Square

From Buckingham Palace, make your way to Piccadilly. Stroll the famous street lined with luxury hotels and designer stores. Eventually, you’ll end up at Piccadilly Circus –  London’s answer to Times Square .

Here you’ll find all things iconic to London. London underground signs, red phone boxes, and red double-decker buses, all make for  the perfect Instagram photo .

8 minutes walk from Piccadilly Circus will land you in Trafalgar Square. You’ll always find something to keep you entertained. Whether it be local street performers and artists, or something on a much larger scale.

Otherwise, admire the monuments and fountains that adorn the square. Or visit the grand  National Gallery  which is free to enter.

Covent Garden & China Town

It’s been a busy day, and I don’t know about you, but I’m parched. To round off your day, I suggest making your way to Covent Garden.

Here you can enjoy a pre-dinner beverage or two at one of its  plentiful bars and pubs . You can expect a great vibe regardless of the day, time, month, or season.  

When I worked in London, after-work drinks in Covent Garden were a religion. All I will say is that  nights in Covent Garden  have the potential to escalate very quickly.

You’ll also find several  excellent restaurants  in the area if you wanted to stick around for dinner. Otherwise, I recommend taking a stroll to China Town, where you will find the best Chinese food outside of China.

Day 2 of 4 Days in London

London History & Culture…

• The Tower of London
• London’s Bridges

Borough Market

Saint dunstan in the east, st pauls cathedral, the british museum.

Tower Hill is the closest tube station to our first stop of the day. When you have arrived, exit the station following the signs for the Tower of London. Use this  Transport for London journey planner  to map out your journey.

Tower of London

The  Tower of London  is one of the  most important historical buildings  in all of the UK. And with that, an essential addition to any London itinerary.

There’s so much compelling history wrapped up in the tower that it’s hard to know where to begin. Today the fortress is most famous for protecting the Crown Jewels.

There have also been many famous executions at the Towers. Guy Fawkes, Anne Boleyn, and Thomas Cromwell to name but a few. It’s this darker history which has earned the castle  a spooky reputation .

The famous  Yeoman Warder Tour  is the perfect way to learn all about the towers grizzly past. Worth noting that areas of the tour that may be frightening for young children.

There are other tours you can do, such as  See the Crown Jewels  or  Meet the Ravens . Either way, it’s a guaranteed fun-filled experience for all the family at this famous world heritage site.  

Next up, cross over the legendary Tower Bridge to The Shard. One of the newest additions to London’s skyline, The Shard is one of the  most recognisable skyscrapers  in the city.

Designed to resemble a shard of glass, the whopping 95-storey structure is home to some of the most high-end offices, restaurants and hotels in London. It’s also London’s highest viewpoint.

Natalie and I went to the  View from the Shard  not long after its opening in 2013. We enjoyed a glass of champagne from the viewing deck. Expensive but worth it for unrivalled views over the city.

There are tons of  food markets in London , especially during the Summer. But Borough Market will always be my favourite.

I don’t know if it’s because it’s one of the oldest in London. Or whether its because of its industrial location beneath the railway arches. Either way, it is  a total vibe !

The only downside to Borough Market is that it gets extremely busy. Not only that, the multitude of stalls selling an amalgamation of cuisines can be overwhelming.

With this in mind, I’ve listed some of my favourites below.

Vegan?  Check out this  Vegan Guide to Borough Market .

• Lebanese : Nana Fanny’s
• Indian : Horn Ok Please
• Meat Lovers : Hobbs Roast Meat
• Bakery Good s: Bread Ahead

Our next stop is somewhat of a hidden gem in London. It’s always been one of my favourite places to escape the hustle and bustle.

What was once a Church of England Parish Church, now lays in ruins following an att@ck during WWII.

The ruins are now a  secluded public garden . The range of plants wending their way around the remains makes for an enchanting scene.

You won’t need long here, but I would certainly stop by en route to St Paul’s Cathedral.

Save Money with a London Pass

Are you going to be visiting all of the cities top attractions and taking full advantage of the public transport network? If yes, you should consider purchasing a  London Pass in advance. The Pass allows free access to many attractions and unlocks tons of discounts around the city.

St Pauls Cathedral is another of London’s leading sightseeing attractions. A  building steeped in history , it should be a priority over your 4 days in London.

The cathedral has played an integral role in British culture for over 1400 years. It was largely destroyed in the great fire of London. It’s gone on to host a number of high-profile weddings and funerals.

If you  purchase a ticket to go inside, you can take a guided tour of the cathedral floor and crypt, climb its three galleries, and enjoy panoramic views from the top of the dome. 

It’s no secret that London is a treasure trove of museums. And our final stop of the day is one of the most well-regarded of them all.

Like most London museums, I’ve visited the British Museum countless times. It’s honestly my favourite London activity.

Not only are most museums  completely free to enter . But I always end up learning or discovering something new.  

There are over 60 mesmerising galleries to explore at the British Museum. My personal favourites are the ancient Egyptian exhibits. Others feature artefacts from ancient Greece, Mexico and Japan.

For the real historians out there, this is an  unmissable addition  to your London itinerary.

Wow, it’s been another busy day. Now is the time to kick back and relax with a cocktail in hand. Tonight, I recommend heading to Soho – one of the  most vibrant districts  in all of Central London.

This area is renowned for being the epicentre of  London’s LGBTQ+ culture , but it’s also home to an abundance of trendy bars and chic restaurants.  

Naturally, we’ve spent a lot of time in Soho, and I could be here all day recommending the best places to go. So, for now, I’ll keep it simple.

Start your evening with a craft beer or two at BrewDog Soho, followed by dinner at Bocca Di Lupo (Italian) or Mildreds (Vegetarian).

Then if you still have the energy, party the night away at one of  Soho’s bars and nightclubs .

Day 3 of 4 Days in London

London Museums, Parks, and Shopping…

• The National History Museum
• The Science Museum
• Afternoon Tea @ Harrods
• Oxford Street & Covent Garden

West End Show

South Kensington is the closest tube station to our first stop of the day. When you have arrived, exit the station following the signs for the National History Museum. Use this  Transport for London journey planner  to map out your journey.

National History Museum

Okay, day 3 in London and we will be spending the morning at some of my favourite London museums. Remember the majority of  museums are free in London , so it’s set to be a cheap morning!

If museums aren’t your thing, I’ve listed some alternative things to do further down the article. If you’re sticking with me, the first museum of the day is the National History Museum.

Often considered the  best of its kind in the world , London’s National History Museum never fails to blow my mind.

I’ve been visiting ever since I was a little kid. I’ll always remember how small I’d feel walking amidst the giant remains of dinosaurs and other prehistoric species.  

One thing I continue to love about the National History Museum is how immersive and theatrical it is. Not to mention, it’s one of the most impressive buildings in the entire city. 

Science Museum

I’ll be honest; you could easily spend the entire morning at the National History Museum. But if time allows, I also suggest checking out the Science Museum, which is just around the corner.

As the name suggests, this museum documents the accounts of groundbreaking scientific achievements throughout the years.

Young children especially, but adults too, are sure to enjoy the interactive displays, designed to both educate and entertain. 

Afternoon Tea at Harrods

Nearby the museums you’ll find several great restaurants. Or, if a Traditional Afternoon Tea is on your London bucket list (which it should be)  Harrods  is just a 15-minute walk away.  

I’m sure Harrods needs little introduction. It’s the most  famous department store in London  and despite its luxurious reputation, has a diverse customer base.

In fact, Harrod’s motto is ‘ Omnia Omnibus Ubique’ , which is Latin for  ‘all things for all people, everywhere’ .

While a little on the pricey side, you’re guaranteed the real deal when it comes to  Afternoon Tea at Harrods .

If afternoon tea at Harrod’s sounds a bit fancy, you could grab something to go and head to nearby Hyde Park.

Hyde Park to London is like what Central Park is to New York. A sprawling open space of meadows, lakes, flower gardens, and beautiful old trees. If it’s a nice day, this is arguably a better option.

Hyde Park is that  idyllic and pretty , it’s easy to forget that you’re in a city at all. I suggest taking some time to wander around.

Enjoy famous landmarks such as the Princess Diana Memorial, The Serpentine Lake, and Speakers Corner. Eventually, you’ll come out at Marble Arch, which is where our shopping endeavours can begin.

Oxford Street & Covent Garden

Everybody knows that London is one of the  fashion capitals of the world . So if you’re looking to glam up your wardrobe, this is the place to do it.

Upon leaving Hyde Park at Marble Arch, your eyes will bulge at the sight of  hundreds of designer stores  that line Oxford Street.

You don’t need to be flash for cash either. Some of the UK’s most affordable high street brands such as River Island, Zara, and even Primark have flagship stores here.  

Continue your spree into Covent Garden, where the large fashion houses are replaced with quaint boutique stores.

Meander down Neal’s Yard – one of London’s most colourful and photogenic streets, pick up some  London-themed   gifts , and find somewhere that appeals for your  pre-theatre show meal .

Listen up; you absolutely cannot spend 4 days in London without experiencing the magic of a West End Show.

I was lucky enough to have family who would take me to shows regularly as a kid, and my love for the theatre continues to thrive.

Some of my favourite shows to date include  The Lion King ,  Wicked ,  Mama Mia ,  Chicago , and  Les Miserables .  

Unfortunately, ticket prices have increased substantially in recent years. So if you’re travelling as a family, it’s going to burn a hole in your wallet.

But honestly, it’s worth it. Unless you’re from New York, where theatre productions are equally impressive, this is a  once-in-a-lifetime experience .

Plus, there are often ways of getting  cheap theatre tickets . My only advice, however, is to check the seats. Often, discounted tickets have heavily restricted views.

Day 4 of 4 Days in London

Offbeat London..

Leake Street at Waterloo Vaults

Leadenhall market.

• Columbia Road Flowers
• Camden Town

Okay, it’s the final day of our London Itinerary, and today is all about offbeat London. We will be exploring some of London’s quirkier neighbourhoods, hidden gems, and alternative cultures.

London’s landmarks may be world-famous and for a good reason. But it’s the unconventional side that gives my beloved city character.

But again, if you wanted to switch up the day with a day trip or another activity, you’ll find some options further down the article.

Waterloo is the closest tube station to our first stop of the day. When you have arrived, exit the station at Exit 2 towards Waterloo Road. Use this  Transport for London journey planner  to map out your journey.

Our first stop is Leake Street at the Waterloo Vaults. A labyrinth of old railway arches beneath Waterloo Station, The Vaults is home to  all things weird and wonderful .

During the evening, is when this venue really comes to life. At night the tunnels are bustling with theatre, comedy, music and other immersive events. But for now, we will be visiting the Leake Stret Tunnel.

Otherwise known as the ‘ Banksy Tunnel’ , it is one of the only places in London where graffiti is not only permitted, but encouraged. The result is a plethora of artwork from various artists.

Next, hop on the tube to Monument or Bank station, and make your way to Leadenhall Market.

Any  Harry Potter fan needs to include this spot on their London itinerary. It is one of many Harry Potter locations in London and inspired Diagon Alley in the films.

Every time I walk through Leadenhall, I pray that a wand store will magically appear, and I’ll finally be the witch I’ve always wanted to be. But so far, no such luck.  

Harry Potter fan or not, you’re sure to be impressed by the ornate Victorian marketplace. It’s home to several designer stores, restaurants, and London pubs.  

* Consider yourself a Harry Potter fanatic ? Check out this best-selling  Harry Potter-guided walking tour  and trace the footsteps of your favourite witches and wizards around Muggle London.

Our next stop is just a short 15-minute walk away. Look out for the infamous Gherkin skyscraper along the way. End up in Shoreditch – one of London’s  most trendy and happening neighbourhoods .

Famed for its impressive street art, diverse culinary & nightlife scenes, antique markets and infectious hipster vibe, it’s one of my favourite spots in the city. It is  offbeat London at its finest . 

You could spend a couple of days exploring all that there is to  see and do in Shoreditch , but Brick Lane is a great place to start.

While meandering around Shoreditch, don’t miss  Box Park  – a unique place to hang out and grab food. Also stop by  Beigel Bake  for the best bagel outside of New York.

If you like Indian food, you’ll find some of London’s best curry houses on Brick Lane. Finally, check out a hip rooftop bar such as  The Curtain  or  Queen of Hoxton . 

If you can find the strength to tear yourself away from vibey Shoreditch, I suggest hopping on the Northern Line and making your way to Camden Town.

As much as I love Shoreditch, if I had to choose my favourite place in London, it would have to be Camden. The vibe feels somewhat less pretentious to me and I’ve had some of the  best times of my life there .

If you’ve heard of Camden, it’s likely because of its legendary music scene. A  cool London fact  for you: Camden has paved the way to success for many iconic British artists, including The Beatles, Madness, Amy Winehouse, and Madonna.

In fact, if you do make it to Camden, checking out a live music venue such as The Roundhouse, Koko, or Electric Ballroom is the perfect way to round off your London Itinerary.  

Ideally, however, you’ll spend more than just the evening in Camden. That way, you can meander the eclectic Camden market, grab some street food at West Yard food hall, and enjoy a pint at one of Camden’s esteemed pubs. 

4 Day London Itinerary Alternatives

While I believe my London Itinerary to be the best way to spend your time, I’m well aware that our interests may vary. With this in mind, here are some of the other top things to do in and around London.

Up at the O2

Thrill-seekers might want to try their hand at some ‘ urban mountaineering ‘ at the UK’s beloved entertainment venue, The O2.

Historically, the iconic white dome was built to celebrate the turn of the Millenium; however, it proved to be such a hit that it’s now a permanent addition to the city skyline. 

While most visit the O2 to eat, drink, dance and sing along to their favourite artists,  Up At The O2  allows you to view the city in a whole new way.

Accompanied by a guide, you’ll embark on an exhilarating 90-minute climb onto the 52-metre-high rooftop.

Notting Hill

With its  ‘Insta-Famous’  multi-coloured houses, a vibrant annual street festival, and the classic Hollywood movie by the same name, Notting Hill needs little introduction.

Beyond the flock of influencers and movie-famous landmarks, its charm is timeless. I love to stroll down Portobello Road hunting for wears at one of London’s oldest markets, before finding a beautiful spot for brunch.  

By all means, do wander around the neighbourhood and admire the pastel-coloured houses. They are gorgeous and well worth a photo or 2. However, I must ask that you remain respectful of people’s privacy.

Try to avoid standing on the steps or sitting on walls outside the property, or you could experience the wrath of a true Londoner. Check out this list of the most  Instagrammable spots in Notting Hill .

Thames River Cruise

Arguably one of the best ways to experience this fast-paced city is on the water. Ditch the crowds and take in the sights without a care in the world.  

Depending on your budget, there are several Thames Cruise packages you can choose from. Some include 1-hour of sightseeing, others you can hop on & hop off. There are even romantic dinner or afternoon tea cruises. 

Get your Guide  has a wide selection of tours to choose from at a competitive rate, so it’s worth checking them out before your trip.

Take a Day Trip

Any longer than 4 Days in London, and I would suggest taking a day trip outside of the city. With our beautiful coastal towns and quaint countryside villages, there’s a lot to see.

Brighton is one of the UK’s favourite seaside destinations and an  epicentre of LGBT+ culture . Located just 1.5 hours by car or 1-hour by train from London it’s the ideal day trip. If you have more time, I recomend checking out Durdle Door on the Jurassic Coast.

Or if you consider yourself history buff, you won’t want to miss out on Stonehenge. A prehistoric monument and world heritage site, Stonehenge remains one of the biggest historical mysteries of all time. 

Consider yourself a die hard Potter fan? Don’t out on miss a wizardly adventure to the   Harry Potter and Warner Brothers Studio .

London Itinerary Essential Info

With London being such a vibrant and exciting city, you’ll find it difficult not to have an incredible time. However, the tips and tricks below can help you make the very best of your trip.

• Save money on public transport, attractions, and restaurants with a  London Pass .
• Book a  hotel or hostel here  or check out these best  air bnbs in London .
• Stay connected in London with a  portable wifi hotspot  or a  local sim card .
• Get to know the city on a  best-selling London tour .
• Don’t forget  travel insurance !

Getting Around in London

You will be covering several neighbourhoods on this London itinerary, so you’ll need to know how to get around.

Thankfully, London’s public transport network is one of the best in the world. OK, it could do with some upgrades here and there (erm, air conditioning on the Central Line), but it’s super reliable and easy to understand.  

First and foremost, I strongly encourage you to get an Oyster Card. The  Oyster Card  will ensure you get the cheapest rates when travelling around London.

It also caps your spends once it reaches a certain amount, which is great if you’re moving around a lot through the day. You get the same deal if you use a contactless payment card.

If you’re travelling with children, order them an Oyster Card 4 weeks in advance. That way, children under 10 travel for free, and under 18s at a discounted rate.

Many transport networks are operating in London, from buses and trams to trains and riverboats. You can plan out your journeys using the  Transport for London journey planner .

The Best Time to Visit London

There isn’t any right or wrong time to visit London, as there is a great atmosphere all your round.

If you are relying on warm and dry days for sightseeing, between May and September will be your safest bet. Though this is London, so you should always prepare for some rain. 

July and August tend to be the warmest months, but it’s also peak season, so expect inflated rates for flights and hotels. A lot is going on in the Summer, however, such as festivals and outdoor food markets. Londoners love to celebrate when the sun is shining, so you can expect a great vibe in the city.

London is also very festive throughout December. The Christmas lights in the city are stunning, and there are a few  Christmas markets . It’s also the season for  Winter Wonderland  which is not to be missed if you find yourself in the city during this time.

Budget for 4 Days in London

It’s no secret that London is an expensive city. I cringe when I think about all the money I’ve spent living there over the years, but  c’est la vie.  

If you plan to see London the budget way, you could comfortably live on £60/$75 a day. But that means eating cheap, staying at hostels, and being selective about the attractions you spend your cash on.

Thankfully, there are plenty of  free things to do in London  if you’re travelling on a tight budget.

On the other hand, if you insist on paying for all the main attractions, eating at trendy restaurants, and staying in fancy hotels, you can expect to double or even triple that budget.

If you hope to visit most of the prime attractions in London, it pays to invest in a  London Pass . The Pass allows free access to many attractions and unlocks tons of discounts around the city.

Is London Safe to Visit?

As somebody who has lived in London for most of my life, I would confidently class London as a safe place to visit. That said, I’ve grown up there. I know the do’s and don’t, and I have the privilege of being a local.

The actual answer is far more complex, and I strongly recommend you educate yourself on  how to stay safe in London  before you travel.

Like many places, theft and pickpocketing pose the most significant risk to tourists. There’s also a trend of gangs on motorbikes who snatch bags, phones, or whatever they can get their hands on as they drive past.

We suggest  keeping your belongings close to you at all times  and using a small padlock or compartmental bag to keep your valuables safe. 

Common scams pose another risk to tourists, and we advise being vigilant at all times. If something doesn’t feel right, trust your gut and walk away from the situation.

Check out this article for examples of  common scams in London .  And don’t forget  travel insurance !

Get the best deals on travel insurance!

If you become sick or injured, those medical bills can really add up. Or perhaps you have your bag stolen, or a flight cancelled.  Although these events are unlikely, they do happen, and having travel insurance gives you that extra piece of mind that you are protected. 5% Discount for our readers using the button below! (discount applicable for non-American citizens).

London City Tours

Some might say that taking a guided tour is the best way to experience London.

We always use  Get Your Guide  when we book tours. They have an endless selection of tours in locations worldwide, including London. Check them out!

Save Time and Book a Tour

For a more local experience, we recommend checking out the guided tours on  Get Your Guide :

Enjoy Your 4 Days in London!

Well, that concludes our recommendations for spending four days in London. What are you looking forward to seeing most? Is there anything else that you think deserves to be on this list?

Let us know! We love hearing from you. You can reach out to us in the comment section below.

Stay adventurous and happy travels.

Planning a trip to England? Check out our UK series  to help with inspiration.

PIN IT FOR LATER

Sharing is caring ♥

Related Posts

5 Responses

• Pingback: Gay London – the best gay hotels, bars, clubs & more Two Bad Tourists
• Pingback: Quirky Things to do in London - My Life from a Bag

Really informative, has been really helpful. Please keep on writing blog like this.

Hi Elena, we’re glad you found it helpful. Thank you

What a fantastic guide to London! You covered so much in four days. I especially liked your suggestions for the alternative and quirky things to do in London. You have a great taste for life!

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

We’re Charlotte & Natalie, a British lesbian couple with a passion for travel and adventure.

Here you will find everything from lgbtq+ travel & lifestyle advice, to comprehensive guides and itineraries designed to make your travel planning easier., we want to inspire you to live the life of your dreams..

💌 Get discounts & updates in our monthly newsletter

Find Hotels Via Booking.com

Book Tours & Activities Via GetYourGuide

Get Travel Insurance Via Heymondo

Get discounts & updates in our monthly newsletter

Destinations

LGBTQ+ Lifestyle

Start A Blog

Teach English

Digital Nomad

Privacy Policy

Guest Posts

Work With Us

© 2022 Our Taste For Life Blog – All Rights Reserved. Website Designed by us via Fresh Creatives

London in 4 Days: The Perfect London Itinerary

Are you considering touring London in 4 days ? If you’re trying to plan a trip to London, then look no further! I have created an awesome 4 days London itinerary for your first-time visit.

Capital of the UK, London is over 1500 square-kilometres in area (900 sq. ml), and home to a cosmopolitan population of over nine-million people. More than the city of New York. 

Throughout its two-thousand plus years history , it has been ravaged by plagues, destroyed by fires and bombed-out. But has always risen bigger and better than before.

Now, a city for the 21st century, it has some of the most iconic landmarks in the world. Places to visit include the Houses of Parliament and Buckingham Palace . While more modern attractions include the London Eye , the Sealife London Aquarium and the Science Museum.

It’s over two-centuries ago that the English writer Samuel Johnson famously wrote, ‘When a man is tired of London, he is tired of life’ . For London’s city dwellers, a sentence as true today, as it was then. 

Read on, for a selection of the best places and attractions to visit , when you choose to tour London in 4 days .

In this breakdown we have tried to put together attractions that are reasonably close together. London has an excellent public transport infrastructure which includes The Underground (Tube), regular buses, hop-on hop-off open-top buses, taxis, Ubers – and even rickshaws.

Everyone works at their own pace, so pick out the number of attractions you feel you can comfortably cover each day. 

If you’re going to visit most of the destinations suggested in our 4 days London Itinerary, then you might want to consider purchasing the  London Pass . You will save money.

Table of Contents

London in 4 days: Day 1

Trafalgar Square

When you’re up and running to explore London in 4 days, Trafalgar Square is a pretty good place to start. For many the centre of London , the square boasts Nelson’s Column , magnificent bronze lions and colourful fountains. 

You will also find a café and public toilets. The square is famous as a meeting place for anything and everything that can be celebrated, especially seeing in the New Year.

Surrounding the square you will find galleries, museums and historic buildings . It is also well served by public transport with Charing Cross tube station on the square, and Leicester Square, Piccadilly Circus and Embankment tube stations all just a short walk away.

National Gallery, London

Who doesn’t like a freebie when they’re on holiday? When you’ve finished taking all those selfies in front of Nelson’s column and the fountains, you can cross the square and visit the National Gallery. 

No admission fee, just walk right in to view over 3,000 works of art from around the world.

The first pictures donated to the National Gallery came from financier John Julius Angerstein in 1823, followed in 1826 by the collection of Sir George Beaumont.

At the time they were displayed in Pall Mall, until the purpose built National Gallery was completed in 1838, on the edge of Trafalgar Square.

London has plenty of accommodation to suit all needs and budgets. You may choose one hotel or apartment to base yourselves for your 4 day stay in London. If are not sure where to stay read this post: Best areas to stay in London 

St. James’s Park

One of eight royal parks in London, St. James’s Park is just a pleasant 15 minute stroll from the National Gallery , or a 10 minute tube or bus ride. 

Covering an area of 57 acres, it encompasses Horse Guards Parade and the Mall . It is also surrounded by a number of attractions you would have on your to-visit list, including Whitehall, Buckingham Palace and Clarence House .

You can enjoy the flower borders with their riot of colourful plants. Watch the resident pelicans , whose ancestors were a gift from the Russian Ambassador to King Charles II almost 400 years ago, and enjoy a coffee in St. James’s Café.

You can also enjoy a lunch-break picnic in the park, while you watch the comings and goings around Buckingham Palace or the Mall.

Buckingham Palace

On the west side of St James’s Park, Buckingham Palace is nothing if not impressive. At 108 metres wide, 120 metres deep and 24 metres high , it has a total of 775 rooms. 

Of these, 19 are state rooms, 52 royal and guest bedrooms, 188 staff bedrooms, 92 offices and 78 bathrooms.

Being the London home of British royalty since 1837, today it is the home and administrative centre of the current monarch Queen Elizabeth II. 

You can arrange your visit to coincide with the Changing of the Guard . And during the summer, book a tour of the state rooms . Although it will use up a bit more time, it is something well worth considering.

The palace is open to visitors in July and August or on Saturdays . You can prebook , or get your tickets on the door but be warned, queues can be long.

Westminster Abbey

Another iconic London landmark, Westminster Abbey has seen the coronation of every British monarch since 1066. 

From the palace, a stroll down Cathedral Walk and up Victoria Street will have you at the abbey in around 15 minutes, or you can get the bus; or a taxi which will take around five minutes.

The first English church to be built Romanesque style, it was completed in 1060 , and consecrated in 1065. 

There are over 3,000 bodies buried under the abbey, including the remains of King Henry V , and all the Tudor kings and Queens except Henry VIII. Other notable remains in the abbey are Isaac Newton, Charles Dickens and Edward the Confessor.

Now a world heritage site , Westminster Abbey is open to the public from 9:30 am until 3:30 pm, Saturday 9.00am – 1.00pm (last entry), Sunday only open for services, and also offers daily services for those who wish to attend.

Westminster Abbey is one of the attractions on your  London Pass , so it will be free if you purchase the pass, or you can buy tickets in advance online .

Palace of Westminster

Just a three minute walk from the abbey, the Palace of Westminster sits on the north bank of the River Thames, and is the home of the British parliament made up of the House of Commons, and the House of Lords.

Built in 1016, the original Palace of Westminster was destroyed by fire in 1834, and work on rebuilding the palace as you see it today in Gothic Revival style , was completed in 1860. 

King Henry VIII was the last monarch to reside in the palace, although the building is still owned by the crown.

Of all Britain’s landmarks, Big Ben is probably the most famous . The tower that houses the clock and the bell, was renamed the Elizabeth tower in 2012, in honour of the Queen’s jubilee, having previously been called the Victoria tower, after Queen Victoria.

When the new Westminster Palace was being built, it was decided a new tower and clock were needed. Built in the early 1850s, the bell first pealed out across London in 1859 and has done, with a few exceptions, ever since. 

From Big Ben, a meander across Westminster Bridge and along the banks of the Thames past the Sealife Centre, will get you to the London Eye in around 10 minutes.

From the day it first started turning, the Millennium Wheel, or London Eye as it has universally become known, has been one of London’s most popular tourist attractions. 

Built to see in the new millennium, construction of the Eye was completed in 1999, and it carried its first fare-paying passengers on the 9th March 2000.

At 135m diameter , it is still the largest cantilevered Ferris wheel in the world , and has won 85 awards from national and international tourist organisations. 

The wheel has 32 pods. Travelling at a leisurely .5 mph, your trip takes around 30 minutes, and awards you some stunning views of the city and the River Thames, so be sure to take your camera.

>>> Get Your London Eye Fast-Track Tickets Here <<<

Covent Garden

After your trip on the London Eye, walking across Waterloo Bridge will have you in one of London’s trendiest areas in just 15 minutes.

After trading for over 500 years, Covent Garden, London’s primary wholesale fruit and vegetable market, closed its doors in 1974, and work began to turn it into one of the city’s biggest tourist areas and night-time venues.

Now a daytime and night-time magnet for London’s young, affluent fashionistas, fine diners and theatre goers, Covent Garden has something for everyone. It is home to the world’s latest designer labels, lifestyle brands and fashion lines.

You can enjoy an early breakfast, an evening of fine dining, or grab a burger to go, as you make your way to one of the many theatres in London’s West End. Daytime or night-time, a visit to Covent Garden should be on everyone’s itinerary.

Piccadilly Circus

Let’s continue with this 4 days London itinerary. After lunch in Covent Garden, a 10 minute stroll along Shaftesbury Avenue will see you in Piccadilly Circus.

Constructed in 1819, Piccadilly Circus is a large road junction and open space . The ‘circus’ in this case comes from the Latin meaning circle, and has spokes to take you down Regent Street, Piccadilly, Shaftesbury Avenue, The Haymarket, Coventry Street and Glasshouse Street.

Famous for its massive video displays, much like New York, the Memorial Fountain and the Statue of Eros , (which is actually the statue of Anteros), Piccadilly Circus is a popular visitor attraction, and a great place to grab a bite and watch London hustle and bustle its way through the day.

Oxford Street

Oxford Street, Europe’s busiest shopping street with over 300 shops is just a short walk, or three-minute tube ride from Piccadilly Circus. Walking, take the Regent Street exit off the Circus and you will stroll through into Oxford Street.

Since 2020, Oxford Street has been wholly pedestrianised , allowing its 500,000 daily visitors a better shopping and browsing experience. Stretching for over 1.5 miles, it includes 90 flagship stores, luxury hotels, and hundreds of restaurants and cafes within a five minute walk.

A shopaholic’s paradise, you will find all the major high street brands such as Primark, Gap, X and River Island, as well as famous department stores like John Lewis and Partners, House of Fraser, Selfridges and Marks and Spencer.

Why not make a day of it with afternoon tea in Scott & Banter or The Cumberland Hotel? Or dine Italian at Alto By San Carlo in Selfridges, or Japanese, at Aqua Kyoto in Regent Street. In Oxford Street there is something for everyone.

If you still have the energy, a short walk down Regent Street and Great Marlborough Street will find you in Soho. At just over a mile square in area, it is London’s equivalent of De Wallen, Amsterdam’s red light district , and just as popular with tourists.

Over the last four decades, much has been done to drive the sex trade out of the area, with a certain amount of success. 

Strolling through the narrow cobbled streets, you will still find the odd sex shop, massage parlour, or blue movie cinema standing alongside designer outlets and independent fashion boutiques with their quirky names. Check out Carnaby Street and Broadway.

Why not enjoy a meal on your way to the theatre? International is the name of the game in Soho and you can indulge in real Spanish tapas, quality French cuisine, gourmet Asian dim sum or Japanese sushi in the many and varied restaurants. 

Not only is a great place for dinner, here you will also find a ton of Cocktail bars, all sorts of pubs, clubs and nightlife entertainment

A visit to Soho really should be on the itinerary, even if it’s just to soak up the unique cosmopolitan atmosphere of the area.

London in 4 days: Day 2

Tower of London

Originally built by William the Conqueror circa the 1070s, the Tower of London was enlarged by Henry III during his reign (1216-72), and by Edward I (1272-1307). 

The Tower has survived a chequered existence. At one time a palace, a fortress, and a bloody prison where monarchs would imprison their rivals, it is one of London’s most visited attractions.

Today you can view the Crown Jewels. Explore the White Tower, the Chapel of St Peter ad Vincula, the Bloody Tower and the Medieval Palace. You will see the ravens, and be escorted by a Beefeater. 

You can learn of the blood curdling history of the Tower, and visit the Torture at the Tower exhibition, the Royal Mint exhibition and browse the Fusiliers Museum.

Buy tickets in advance online , skip the long line and head straight for the ticket exchange counter. The queue for buying tickets at the gate can get extremely long!

There are several great  tours dedicated to the Tower of London , and if you bought the  London Pass , then admission is included and you get to skip the line!

Tower Bridge

Walking alongside the River Thames, you can reach Tower Bridge in less than 10 minutes. 

Opened in 1894, the bascule (seesaw) bridge was originally powered by steam, which lifted the two halves of the roadway up to allow large river traffic through. It wasn’t until 1976, that the old steam system was finally replaced with modern electric driven hydraulics.

If you have an interest in bridge building and old machinery, or just a healthy curiosity, you can visit the bridge’s engine room on the southern side of Tower Bridge where the old steam system has been rebuilt.

HMS Belfast

Leaving Tower Bridge, a short 5 minute walk along Tower Bridge Road will get you to HMS Belfast. 

Launched in 1938, this light cruiser served on the Atlantic convoys, and saw action on D-Day during the Second World War. She was also active during the Korean war of the 1950s, before being retired after 25 years’ service.

There is something menacingly attractive about a grey warship bristling with armaments that makes you want to find out more. Where did the crew sleep? Where did the officers live? What was it like at action stations? 

All this and more you can find out on a visit to HMS Belfast. Tour her nine decks, learn the history, and get involved in the interactive displays.

If you’ve used up just about every square foot of commercial and residential space in town, the only way is up. From HMS Belfast, a six minute walk down Tooley Street will bring you to the Shard. At 309 metres high, the tallest building in Europe .

The building was officially inaugurated in 2012, and the first tenants began moving in during 2013. The architect’s vision of a city in the sky is not far short of the mark. The Shard has 26 floors of office space and 13 floors of residential apartments. 

The 5-star Shangri-La Hotel covers 19 floors. There are three floors of restaurants , and the building has a public viewing platform at the top.

You can book into the hotel, enjoy a meal or drink in one of the restaurants, or get the lift up to the viewing platform, although there is a charge to visit just the platform.

>>> Get Your The Shard Direct Entry Ticket <<<

Borough Market

Leaving the Shard, a five minute stroll down St Thomas Street (A200) will get you to Borough Market. 

Run as a Charitable Trust, the market has, in one form or other, been feeding the population of London since the 12th century, and is the city’s oldest food market.

Located in Borough High Street, the market trades as a wholesale fruit and veg market from 2 am to 8 am seven days a week. However, at 10 am it becomes a retail market selling specialist and sustainable products sourced locally and internationally. 

If you want organically grown salads, particular cheeses or specialist honeys you’ll find them at Borough Market.

With its historic buildings built in the 1850’s , old-style pubs and olde world shop fronts, Borough Market is worth a visit in its own right.

Southwark Cathedral – Golden Hind

From Borough Market, a three minute stroll down Stoney Street will bring you to Southwark Cathedral. To give it its full title, The Cathedral and Collegiate Church of St Saviour and St Mary Overie.

As a place of worship, the area is thought to date back to the 7th century when it was a nunnery, although the first documented link to anything ecclesiastical appears in the Doomsday Book of 1086. The church was declared a cathedral in 1905.

Next to the cathedral, the Golden Hind is a true replica of the Golden Hind built in 1575/76, and the ship used by Sir Francis Drake when he sailed around the world in 1577. 

The ship you see today was faithfully reproduced from the original plans by Appledore Shipyard in Devon, and launched in 1973. Like its namesake, it too has circumnavigated the world, in fact the equivalent of five times.

Shakespeare’s Globe

If you have a love for the performing arts, Shakespeare and the theatre, then a 10 minute stroll from the Golden Hind, along Clink Street and Bankside, will bring you to Shakespeare’s Globe Theatre.

The third Globe Theatre was opened in 1997. The first Globe was built in 1599 , and burnt down in 1613. The second was built in 1614 and demolished in 1644. Just 750 feet from the site of the original theatre, the third Globe has been faithfully constructed in as much original detail as possible . 

The theatre performs both Shakespeare’s original works with a twist and new plays, and you can take in a show, or enjoy a guided tour .

Tate Modern

If you have a love of modern art, then the Tate Modern is the place to head for. From Shakespeare’s Globe, head back to Bankside then towards Cardinal Cap Alley, before heading for Holland Street, the walk should take around five minutes.

A converted power station, the Tate Modern opened in 2000, has attracted over 40 million visitors and is in London’s top three visitor attractions. 

Exhibiting modern art from around the world, in 2009 the institution was expanded, this time converting the power station’s old fuel tanks to provide more gallery space. 

The Tate exhibits the UK’s collection of British art, an international collection of contemporary and modern art and various special exhibitions. 

Entry to the main galleries is free , with a charge being made for some of the standalone exhibitions. The Tate also has a small café with views of the river where you can get a range of sandwiches, snacks and drinks to eat in or take-away.

Millennium Bridge

A short stroll from the Tate along Hopton Street will bring you to The Millennium bridge, the first new bridge to span the Thames in over a century and a definite must do during your 4 days London itinerary. 

As might be concluded from the name, it was designed to commemorate the new millennium and opened to the public in June 2000, two months behind schedule.

It also closed again two days later, when the number of people using it caused the bridge to start swaying. After fitting hydraulic dampers to absorb the sway, the bridge re-opened on the 27th February 2002, forever to be known, by Londoners at least, as The Wobbly Bridge.

Crossing the Wobbly Bridge today, you will also find over 400 interesting works of street art on the walkway . Painted by London street artist Ben Wilson (the chewing gum man), his canvases are the trodden down chewing gum spat out by others using the bridge. 

The bridge has two river supports, and stretches 1066 feet across the River Thames.

London in 4 days: Day 3

British Museum

Halfway through your exploration of London in 4 days and we start off at the British Museum. Located in Great Russell Street, the British Museum first opened its doors in January 1759. 

As the centuries progressed and the British Empire expanded, so too did the collections, and the museum was continuously expanded and upgraded in order to display the growing number of artifacts.

Today the museum covers over 800,000 square feet in 94 different galleries , and has over eight million objects on display. It also has a large coffee lounge where you can get everything from sandwiches, savouries and cakes to full meals. 

Entry to the museum is free except for any collections on loan. You can book a tour here .

St Paul’s Cathedral

You can walk from The British Museum to St Paul’s Cathedral in around 30 minutes, but most visitors choose to use the bus or tube. Both take around 15 minutes to complete the journey.

A cathedral has overlooked the city for over 1400 years. The current building is at least the fourth, the previous one having been destroyed in the Great Fire of London. 

Designed by Sir Christopher Wren, planning and construction of St Paul’s Cathedral began in 1675 and was completed in1710. 

Located on Ludgate Hill, the highest point in the City of London, the imposing structure is a mix of Neoclassical, Gothic, and Baroque architectur e and a grade 1 listed building. The cathedral is also the mother church of the Diocese of London.

The price of admission is included with the London Pass . You can buy fast track entry tickets online.

The City, or the Square Mile as it is often referred to, is a separate area within the city of London. 

Settled by the Romans over 2,000 years ago and named Londinium, it is the original settlement that went on to expand into what is now called London or Greater London.

At just over one square mile in area The City stretches from the Tower of London, to Liverpool Street in the east and Chancery Lane in the west. 

It has its own offices as well, including its own mayor (the Lord Mayor of London), its own council and its own police force, the City of London police.

You may well have spent time in The City without realising it, when visiting nearby attractions, but other places of interest include The Monument , constructed as a monument to the 1666 Great Fire of London, the Old Bailey courthouse, Guildhall, the Bank of England and the Barbican Centre for the performing arts.

Leadenhall Market

Wherever you are in The City, you’re not far from Leadenhall Market. Worthy of a mention in its own right, Leadenhall has been a market as far back as the 14th century.

Today, with its cobbled streets, impressive architecture and prestigious heritage, it is a modern, progressive open and covered retail market area, with independent boutiques, specialist shops, wine bars, craft ale pubs and fine-dining restaurants.

From Leadenhall Market to Sky Garden is a short three minute walk. Situated at 20, Fenchurch Street, Sky Garden is London’s highest public gardens , taking up three floors of the building. 

Housed in a massive glass bubble, it provides an amazing 360°vista of London’s skyline .

The gardens are landscaped with drought-resistant plants from the Mediterranean and South Africa , and include such species as Red Hot Poker, Bird of Paradise and African Lily alongside fragrant herbs. It also houses a Brasserie, seafood grill, and the Sky Pod bar.

London in 4 days: Day 4

Speakers Corner

Are you finding all the rushing about is getting too much trying to get to as many attractions as possible during your 4 days London itinerary? Take some time out and head for Hyde Park.

Although you can visit Speakers Corner in Hyde Park any day of the week, if you want to listen to the orators on their soapboxes, you’ll need to visit on a Sunday between 11 am and 5 pm. Speakers Corner is situated at the Marble Arch entrance to Hyde Park.

Although the first time public speaking occurred in Hyde Park was back in 1855, it wasn’t until 1872, after further demonstrations, that the ‘freedom to speak freely’ was granted. 

You will likely find a number of speakers, all standing on their soap boxes, shouting and gesticulating about their own particular issues and trying to convince those who listen to join the cause. It makes for an interesting, and at times amusing, way to pass an hour or two.

Steeped in history, the park was set up by Henry VIII in 1536 as a private hunting ground. A century later, in 1637, it was opened to the public and has been ever since.

Covering 350 acres , the park has nearly 5,000 trees, flower beds and gardens, a lake (the Serpentine) , and a meadow. 

With facilities for a range of team games, tennis courts and a large children’s playground, it is the ideal place for the kids to release all that pent up energy. There are bridleways for the horse riders, cycle paths, and boating and swimming in the Serpentine.

The park also has two restaurants on the edge of the lake where you can enjoy a three course meal, or buy a coffee to go. You will also find the Serpentine Bridge, the Achilles Statue, the Joy of Life Fountain and the Diana Memorial Fountain .

Kensington Palace

If you want to get from Speakers Corner to Kensington Palace you can enjoy a stroll across the park, the walk will take around 20 – 30 minutes. Or catch the tube from Hyde Park tube station to Kensington Palace, the journey takes around 5 minutes.

Another design by Sir Christopher Wren, Kensington Palace was completed in 1605. Known then as Nottingham House, it was picked by William III and Mary II as their country retreat. It was also the birthplace and childhood home of Queen Victoria.

Today, Kensington Palace is the official London residence of the Duke and Duchess of Cambridge and their children, the Duke and Duchess of Kent, the Duke and Duchess of Gloucester and Prince and Princess Michael of Kent.

>>> Get Your Kensington Palace Sightseeing Tickets <<<

Notting Hill

To get to Notting Hill from Kensington Palace, walk to Queensway tube station (6 min) then take a 10 minute tube ride, getting off at Holland Park.

Although Notting Hill is most famous for its annual carnival held the last weekend of August, it has a lot going for it in its own right. 

For a start, the beautiful Victorian terrace properties around Portobello Road, Westbourne Grove and Clarendon Road painted in a range of attractive pastel colours.

The Portobello Market is itself a big visitor attraction. Billed as the world’s largest antique market with over 1000 stalls , you can buy everything from cracked porcelain to retro-fashion to stamps, bric-a-brac and junk, so choose carefully.

Street art also has moved up a notch since arriving in Notting Hill. Visit the Graffic Gallery of street art. Here you will find pieces from the world’s most renowned street artists, including Banksy. 

Another interesting stop is the Museum of Brands . The story of advertising through the years and the psychology behind it. For that down time, you will find plenty of chic cafes and pubs to take the weight off.

Natural History Museum

To get to the Natural History Museum from Notting Hill you can catch a bus from Kensington Sheffield Terrace to Cromwell Road, South Kensington, the journey takes around 10 minutes. Or the tube from Notting Hill Gate station to South Kensington, which takes around six minutes.

Established in 1881, the museum holds a massive collection of earth and life specimens totalling over eighty million items from different areas and times in natural history.

Located on Exhibition Road, it is one of three popular museums located there, the other two being the Victoria and Albert Museum and the Science Museum. All are free to visit.

A walk from the Natural History Museum to Harrods will take around 15 minutes, with the bus taking about the same amount of time. A cab ride will take around 5 minutes.

Probably the most famous department store in the world , Harrods has been emptying the pockets of the rich and famous since 1849.Established by Charles Henry Harrod, as a one room grocery store, within 30 years it had expanded to become an increasingly popular department store. 

Today, the epitome of luxury shopping , it is owned by the Qatar Investment Authority and has over one million square feet of retail space split into 300 departments and is one of Europe’s largest department stores. 

The store boasts over 5,000 different brands and has a motto in Latin over the door stating ‘All Things For All People, Everywhere’ .

So there we have it. One of the big bonuses of London’s excellent transport network is none of your favourite attractions are too far away. Allowing you to mix and match your days (and evenings) to avoid premature burnout when exploring London in 4 days.

READ MORE UK TRAVEL TIPS

• Best things to do in London
• How to get from Heathrow to London
• How to get from Stansted to London
• Best places to stay in Manchester
• Best places to stay in Belfast
• Best places to stay in Glasgow

Photos: Shutterstock

Leave a comment Cancel reply

Ultimate London 4 day itinerary perfect for first timers and families

By: Author Wandermust Mummy

To quote the great Dr Johnson “When a man is tired of London, he is tired of life” and I can see why he came up with the quote. I have lived in London on and off for the past decade and still to this day I don’t think I have even scratched the surface of everything London has on offer. So let’s be honest seeing London in 4 days is going to be a push for most tourists. But you don’t need to worry about what to do in London in 4 days as here I have put together the best London 4 day itinerary with info on what to do, what to eat and how to get there to help you make the most of your 4 days in London. So whether you want to do this London 4 day itinerary with family or without, I am sure it will delight. 

In this London 4 day itinerary guide we will cover over the course of the itinerary 

• Central London, Covent Garden and the South Bank 
• Best London Museums (including the British Museum) and South Kensington 
• Best London Attractions such as Buckingham Palace, museums, Tower of London, ST Pauls Cathedral and London eye to name but a few! 

Table of Contents

Day one of the perfect London 4 day itinerary

Note : This itinerary is designed with the idea that you have a whole four days in London however if you need to factor in transport time then choose which half day you are least interested in. For advice for getting from Heathrow Airport to London via public transport or for more London travel tips click on the links. 

The first day of your London 4 days itinerary is all about exploring the central part of London. Start your morning at

Borough market This is an iconic London market. Peruse the stalls that offer some of the finest produce in London. Borough Market is actually the oldest market in London having existed on this site since the 13th century in one form or another. Today the stalls at Borough Market represent the comospolitanism of London with the diversity of stalls and food it has on offer.  The market can get exceptionally busy especially at Lunch times which is why I always recommend starting this day of your itinerary at Borough Market.

If you are a film buff or a rom com fan you will notice the door to Bridget Jone’s flat is in Borough Markets.

As you are starting your day at Borough I would recommend grabbing a coffee and a bite to eat on the go. You are going to need the fuel for the day’s itinerary.

For foodies with a bit more time on their hands you could try  booking on a food tour of Borough Market! 

From Borough you are going to take a walk along the south bank on route to your next destination. The walk without stops should take roughly 30 minutes but leave yourself plenty of time as there are lots of photo opps along the way.

Some of the best Photo ops and sights that you will see on your walk are:

The Golden Hinde 

Although only a reconstruction, not the original 0 the ship is still a sight to behold. The Golden Hinde once belonged to Sir Francis Drake and if you would like to you can climb aboard. On the scale of London attraction business this is actually one of the quietest. It is sure to be a hit if you are travelling with children to London.

The next site you will see is the famous

Old Clink prison

There is no way you can miss the Clink on your walk along the South Bank. Outside of this quasi- museum there is a large skeleton hanging in a cage to represent some of the criminal punishments of old. I wouldn’t recommend this for sensitive tourists or young children but if you are into dark tourism destinations you might enjoy it.

Just along from the Clink Museum is one of my favourite places in all of London – 

The Globe Theatre 

The original globe theatre as Shakespeare would have used was actually very short lived having been burnt down by fire just 14 years after its first use. In 1997 the Globe Theatre was reconstructed to the match the original as much as possible and in my opinion is a must visit in London.

The Globe Theatre used to only be a summertime event however with the addition of a new indoor candlelit theatre you can attend the Globe Theatre even if you are visiting London in Winter. However, if I am honest summer is still my favourite. There is nothing like sitting in the traditional recreation theatre from Shakespeare’s time seeing the plays performed as they were in Shakespeare’s time.

It is definitely worth booking your tickets well in advance as they do sell.

Top Tip : if you are buying seated rather than standing tickets I definitely recommend reserving a cushion with your seat. Shakespeare’s plays can be long and the traditional wooden seats are very uncomfortable. 

If you do opt for standing tickets please remember that the roof is open on the standing area (seating is covered) so if it rains you are going to get wet.

If it does rain while you are in London then check out this post.

Also along this stretch of the walk you will also get great views of both the Millennium Bridge and also St Pauls Cathedral. In my opinion this is one of the most photogenic spots in the whole of London. If you want to walk over the bridge and check out St Pauls Cathedral now is the time to do it.  The Cathedral was designed by Britain’s most famous architect Sir Christopher Wren and was completed in 1708 and since then has survived fire and the London Blitz.

Once you are back on the Globe side of the river you will go past the best contemporary art gallery in the UK – the Tate Modern. If you love modern art then this is going to be a must for you but even if you aren’t interested in art it is worth heading in simply for the beautiful view. It might not be the highest view in London (The Shard takes this honour) but it is the cheapest.

The Tate Modern is free to enter but donations are encouraged.

Your final destination from your walk along the South Bank will be the London Eye. This London landmark is a must for any visitor to London offering unrivalled views of the London skyline.

Now this is a bit of a marmite attraction (you love it or you hate it). It is quite expensive however it is definitely one of the biggest icons on the London skyline and does offer great views.  If you want to ride the London Eye I definitely recommend booking your tickets in advance as this is one of the busiest attractions in the city – and definitely has one of the longest queues especially if you are visiting in the summer or at a weekend.

London Eye – perfect thing to add to your London 4 day itinerary with family

You can book your tickets online here! 

For lunch head back towards the BFI. One of our favourite lunch time stops is ping pong for dim sum but there are loads go great eateries in this stretch of the South Bank such as Wahaca and Giraffe – this place is particularly great if you are travelling to London with toddlers or young kids but all offer great lunch time meals.

After lunch your next stop is the Houses of Parliament.  Walk across Westminster bridge To get there. It should take no more than 15 minutes. You’ll have plenty of time here to see Big Ben, Westminster Abbey and the Palace of Westminster.

London 4 day itinerary – 4 days in London itinerary with family

Fun Fact:  Big Ben is not the name of the tower. The Tower is actually called the Elizabeth Tower. The name Big Ben actually refers to the Bell inside the Tower.

Please Note:  Big Ben is currently under refurbishment and will be under scaffolding until 2021. The only time you will be able to hear the Bells during this period is on New Years Eve.

Things to do on your london itinerary 4 days – Houses of Parliament

I definitely think taking a tour of Westminster Abbey is worthwhile. It was most recently used as the site of William and Kates wedding back in 2012 but the abbey has over a thousand years of history and has been the site of most of the coronations of British royalty. The Abbey is home to the graves of many of England’s Kings and Queens (17 in total) and its most famous figures. Inside the Abbey you can see the tombs of Charles Darwin, Elizabeth I, Edward the Confessor and John Keats to name just a few.

And if there is only one thing you should see while in the abbey it has to be the historic Coronation Chair.

The queues can get long here so get your tickets in advance HERE!

Once you have taken enough selfies and marvelled enough at the British political institution, head down towards embankment pier. The walk should take you ten minutes.

At embankment pier pick up a rib boat.  I love nothing more than reenacting some of my favourite movie scenes while on holiday and taking a rib boat ride down the Thames will make you feel like James Bond. Advance booking essential – you can book your tickets online here.

After the days excitement you are probably feeling hungry so head to Covent Garden for dinner. Covent Garden is one of my favourite areas of London and must be on your 4 day itinerary in London.

Visiting the Covent Garden area is a must because it is brimming with great restaurants for all budgets. For cheap eats I recommend the Mexican Wahaca and the steak place – Flat Iron. The great thing about both of these are that they don’t require reservations.

If you have a bit more to do then try our high class steak place Hawksmoor or head to classic English eateries Browns or the Ivy.

If you are doing this day on a Thursday or Friday then I would recommend visiting the London Transport Museum for one of their lates.  The museum is a must for transport enthusiasts and tells you the history of transport in London. It also has an amazing poster collection and the lates offer you a chance to see the all of the collections swell as enjoy some drinks and special events.

After dinner take a stroll around the piazza and watch the street entertainers before heading home.

Note about itinerary – if you want to do this 4 day itinerary with family in tow just allow yourself a bit more time to complete. The itinerary mainly relies on walking and public transport to get between places. This itinerary is ideal for the first time visitor to London but if you have a bit longer in London or would like to experience some neighbours outside of the centre then why not check out our 7 day London itinerary here. 

Day two of the perfect four day London itinerary

Day 2 of your 4 days London itinerary starts with a big breakfast, a proper full English. Some of my favourite places to go for breakfast are plum and split milk at the Great Northern Hotel. 

Or why it try out the aptly named The breakfast club.

Once you are fully fuelled head to the British museum for a morning of culture. With all of the world’s treasures to admire in the British museum it is impossible to see all in once go. In fact you could spend four days in the British Museum and still not see everything.

Having been to the British Museum countless number of times I would personally prioritise the Egyptian and Greek galleries to see the Rosetta Stone and the Elgin Marbles (otherwise known as the Parthenon Marbles which are longingly subject to repatriation calls).

Other must sees in other galleries include the Benin Bronzes and the bog body known as the Lindow Man. To get the most out your tour, you could book onto a tour of the museum galleries to ensure you don’t miss a thing.

To continue your high brow day head for a fancy afternoon tea – a true English staple. There are lots of fancy afternoon teas and some quirky ones too. If you want to spend more time at the British Museum it is possible to have an afternoon tea there but if you want a British tradition head to the Ritz. Out of all the places in London that I have tried afternoon tea at (and believe me I’ve tried a few) none hold a candle to the Ritz for me. Held in the beautiful Palm Court of the Ritz the food is incredible and topped off by a pianist taking requests at the piano.

Top tip : advance booking essential. 

Alternative to make this a London Family  Itinerary : If you are travelling for 4 days in London with kids and want to make this a more London Family Itinerary then I would recommend looking at a themed afternoon tea. There are several Disney themed afternoon teas (including Mary Poppins at Aqua Shard and the Mad Hatters Tea Party at Sanderson Hotel),  a Harry Potter Themed one in the Potion Room at Cutter and Squidge in Soho and a Charlie and the chocolate factory one at one of my favourite London hotels – One Aldwych.

If you would like to find a London itinerary designed specifically for kids then check this post out.

There is also an afternoon tea bus which combines afternoon tea and a bus tour. I have not done this and it does lack some of the fanciness of the traditional afternoon tea but for those that want a bus tour too it might be a nice compromise.   For more information click here.

Next Read :  kid friendly London Guide

After such a cultured day, you’ve earned a bit of a break so why not head to Oxford Street, Carnaby Street or Saville Row for a bit of retail therapy.  Oxford Street is the busiest shopping street in Europe (and it feels it especially if you are in London for Christmas),  The most famous shop on Oxford Street is Selfridges and is definitely one of the best shops in London for those that enjoy a bit of retail therapy.

Carnaby Street is a little quieter and offers some great boutique stores. There is also the famous cake shop Choccywoccydoodah which is perfect for the traveller with a sweet tooth. And men will love Saville Row, home to London’s best and most famous tailors (it is where Kingsmen is set in the film Kingsmen). Also, one of my favourite no reservations restaurants – Flat Iron is in Carnaby. This is a great place for affordable steak in London. 

Family friendly alternative : Head to the toy store Hamley’s for a treat. 

If you don’t think 4 days in London with family is enough check out our 5-7 day itineraries. These  London itineraries are aimed at travelling with children! 

End your day with a trip to the theatre.  There is so much to see on the west end stage but I recommend the british tradition – Mousetrap just don’t spoiled he ending for others. You can book your tickets in advance here! 

Otherwise why not head back to the Globe for a truly English experience. 

For suggestions on family friendly musicals check out this handy guide!  A favorite for us at the moment is Matilda.

If you are still hungry head for a post theatre dinner.

Day three of the perfect London in four days itinerary

A note about day 3 of this four days in London itinerary – the order of the days is not arbitrary. We recommend actually checking which day changing of the guard is on during your stay. It is a common myth that the changing of the guard occurs daily. Once you have this information you can modify your itinerary accordingly.

Start day 3 of your 4 day itinerary, London with breakfast at your hotel. After breakfast head our go visit the beautiful St James park.  Our favourite thing to see in St James park is all the pelicans in the park. These white pelicans have been a fixture in St James Park since 1664 when a Russian Ambassador gifted them.

Any four days in london would be imcomplete without visiting Buckingham Palace and the Changing of the Guard

Your walk from the park will take you to your next destination – Buckingham Palace. Time is definitely of the essence for this part of the itinerary as you need to be here before 10:45am (10:30 if you are visiting during the summer.) to get a good spot to watch the Changing of the Guard. An iconic thing to see on any London trip. The process starts at 10:45, and the actual change over happens at 11 and lasts around 45 minutes.

For some tips on the best places to watch the changing of the guard check out this post.

Prep for Changing of the Guard at Wellington Barracks

Depending on your dates of travel will depend whether or not you can actually go inside and tour Buckingham Palace. The dates that the Palace Staterooms are open are very limited only happening between July and September and then periodically over December. If you are a fan of  royal history and palaces  then this is an absolute must on your itinerary.

And for those traveling with small children, you don’t need to worry that this isn’t family friendly. The tour ends in the Garden and there is a lovely soft play area to let your smalls loose in.

  YOU CAN CHECK OPENING DATES AND BOOK YOUR TICKETS ONLINE HERE

After this, you are having a bit of a walk. Alternatively you could take the tube.

Your ultimate destination is the museums of South Kensington.  On the way you walk past Harrods which is worth a stop in for a browse around this London icon. It is one of THE shopping destinations in London. You could also stop for lunch for here but be warned it is a pricey place to stop. For those that love afternoon tea, Harrods also have their own afternoon tea which is pretty good. Be sure to check out the food hall if you aren’t stopping here for lunch as they have lots of nice foods to take away and again great for souvenir shopping to take home.

Alternatively keep walking ready to have lunch at South Kensington.  Favourites of ours  include carluccios, comptoir libanais and the v&a cafe. However my favourite place is to head to the pub the queens arms in queens gate news. It is a truly stunning pub and also offers some of the best food in the Kensington area in my opinion.

Spend the afternoon walking around one of the National museums in South Kensington. There is a museum here for every taste. This is great especially if you have a rainy day during your stay.  The museums in South Kensington are 

• Natural History Museum 
• Science Museum 
• Victoria and Albert Museum 

The great thing about these museums is that they are some of the best FREE things to do in London (although a small donation is encouraged).

If you are having a tough time deciding between which museum to visit I personally would recommend visiting the Natural History Museum or Science Museum for those travelling with kids. The Science Museum has interactive exhibitions for toddlers and older children which makes this a family favourite in our house while the Natural History Museum being full of dinosaurs is always a crowd pleaser.

Next read : Best museums for toddlers!

The Victoria and Albert Museum, locally known as the V&A, is the best museum in the world for art and design in my opinion. Whenever I am in South Kensington I always stop in to look at the costume collections and be sure to check out what temporary exhibitions they have on as they have a very active programme. 

After an afternoon of culture wander or tube back towards Soho for a trendy dinner. Or perhaps have another night of theatre. This would be the perfect time for you to head to the Globe to see some Shakespeare.

For more theatre inspiration click here! 

Day four of the perfect London itinerary 4 days itinerary

The final day of our perfect 4 days in London guide and there is so much left to explore.

Today the starts at St Paul’s Cathedral.  A London landmark and full of exciting history. Spend the morning inside this marvellous church. To make the most of your morning be sure to book your tickets in advance here! 

Then head towards the impressive Tower of London.  The Tower of London has a history dating back to 1066 and since then has been a military fortification and prison. I definitely recommend going inside the Tower of London as you don’t get a true feel for the place looking from outside the thick fortified walls.

This is a great place to learn about some of the more gruesome history of London. For instance the Richard III kept his nephews, known today as The Princes in the Tower, locked up in the tower when he seized the crown and were never seen again. It was also the site of some of the most famous beheadings in British history for instance Anne Boleyn was executed here as was Lady Jane Grey and Katherine Howard to name but a few. 

It is definitely worth taking the tour (included in the ticket price), with one of the Yeoman Warder who can reveal fascinating insights on the Tower and its history.  These tours last an hour and leave every 30 minutes.

Once you have had enough at the more gruesome gruesome history be sure to go and check out the Crown Jewels Exhibit where you can see the crown and other jewels belong to the British monarchy. 

Tower of London perfect for a family trip to london

Be sure to book your tickets in advance here! 

If time allows, head to see the exhibition at the top of   Tower bridge ( often mistakenly called London Bridge) a true engineering marvel in central London. Now you could just look at the bridge but for a small admission you can actually climb to the top of the bridge where you can learn more about the engineering feat (be warned there is a glass floor) and you can also see the engine room.

You can book your tickets in advance here! 

london 4 days itinerary must include Tower Bridge

An alternative to visiting Tower Bridge would be to visit the Sky Garden (depending on how long you plan to spend at the Tower.) The great thing about the Sky Garden is that it offers some of the best views of London but most importantly it is free. However tickets must be reserved in advance as this does get fully booked quickly. 

You can reserve your ticket online HERE!

For dinner today, head to Brick Lane for another British institution – a Curry. Brick Lane is a really vibrant part of London and I don’t think I have ever eaten a bad curry on Brick Lane. Our favourite place is Aladdin’s but everyone has there own favourite. Before dinner be sure to check out the street art that this area has become famed for and has included a piece by the elusive graffiti artist Banksy. 

After an early dinner head towards Aldgate East Station and pick up the famous Jack the Ripper Tour ! This was one of the first things I did when I moved to London and it is still up there as one of my favourite things to do at night in London. On the tour you will discover all about the infamous and uncaught serial killer that terrorised London in the summer of 1888.

You can book your tour HERE! 

Getting Around During Your London itinerary

London is a really easy to city to get around and I would say public transport is the best way to get around the city after walking.

One of the confusing things for international visitors to London is that there are many airports that you could fly into. Depending what airport you are flying into you can get one of the many public transport options to get into the city such as the Heathrow Express. Depending on the time of day this is probably your quickest way to get into the centre of the city.

However if you are arriving late you can either pick up a taxi outside or arrange a private transfer. 

Click here for private transfer options! 

Although we recommend walking for most part of this itinerary, if you prefer you can take public transport either bus or the Tube. To use the public transport in London you can not use cash but instead can either buy an Oyster Ticket (the London transport card), a contactless debit card or Apple Pay. 

Note about Oyster Cards: This requires a 5GBP refundable deposit and works on buses, the underground, ferries, the overground and the Docklands Light Railway.

Where to Stay in for this London in 4 days itinerary

Covent Garden is a great place to stay during your London in 4 days itinerary as it is centrally located, with great tube options and also is the place where you have ended your first day. Below are options for each price bracket in Covent Garden 

Where to Stay in Covent Garden

Budget Option : Fielding Hotel

You can compare prices and book online for this hotel HERE!

MidRange Option : Radisson Blu Edwardian Mercer Street

Located in a the beautiful Seven Dials area. A chic and trendy area close to some amazing shops and great for those wanting great eats or to be close to theaters.

You can Compare prices and book online for this hotel here!

Luxury Option : One Aldywch Hotel 

The place we choose to stay when we are looking for a bit of luxury in London. It has a fab pool which is great for relaxing after a busy day exploring. Be sure to dive under water when there for a musical surprise.

For more information on doing a family trip to London on a budget check out this post. 

Best Places to Stay Near Borough Market

Budget Option: Premier Inn County Hall

This chain hotel offers comfortable rooms in an ideal setting for exploration. If we are looking for a more budget friendly stay while in London then this is the place we book. 

You can compare prices and book online HERE! 

MidRange Option : Hilton London Tower Bridge

This mid range hotel is situated perfectly to explore some of London’s greatest icons.

You can compare prices and book online HERE

Luxury Option : Shangri La at the Shard

If you want to stay in a bucket list worthy hotel in London then this is the one for you. 

You can compare prices and check availability online HERE

For a more complete guide on where to stay in London click here! 

Essentials to Pack For Your London itinerary 4 days in the Capital

We will address your essential London Clothing Packing List in another post as this varies so much by seasons but things you should never travel to London without and are essential for this London itinerary 4 days in the Capital I recommend packing: 

• A Travel Adaptor 
• Small Umbrella 
• Rain Coat or Poncho
• Camera 

FAQs About our 4 days in London itinerary 

Is 4 days in london enough time.

As Samuel Johnson said “When a man is tired of London he is tired of life” and I like to interrupt that there is never enough time to see and do London. I’m a Londoner myself and I don’t think I have seen everything that I want to in London. My bucket list for the city seems to be never ending. However, with 4 days in London you can definitely start ticking off some of the major bucket list items and see many of London’s main tourist attractions. 

What is the best time to visit London? 

In my opinion there is no bad time to visit London and there is no one best time to visit London. Christmas is a magical time in London – so magical we have written a whole Winter Itinerary because we love it so much. There are also loads of great places you can do day trips too in London in the Winter. 

If you don’t like rain then you probably won’t like November – February is probably not the time for you but the great thing about this period is there are less tourists.

Spring is lovely because London is a great floral city. In Spring places comes alive with cherry blossoms such as one of my favourite outdoor places in London – Kew Gardens! Also London is beautiful when it gets Wisteria Hysteria and of course there is the great Chelsea Flower Show in Spring. 

Summer is the best weather (well theoretically is the best weather though this is never guaranteed in the UK) but is also the time that has the most tourists and therefore queues at attractions. 

Can I do this 4 day London itinerary with family?  Is this the best family trip to London itinerary? 

You can totally do this 4 day London itinerary with family in tow. Depending on how good of a walker your littles are you may want to take a stroller to London with you for some of the heavier walking days. To do this 4 days in London with family itinerary be sure to check out our family friendly London hints that are in the post to be make this the best family trip to London itinerary. 

What are the best day trips to take from London?

If you are staying in London longer or want to replace one of these days or even half days then you could check out our longer 7 day London itinerary or replace one of these days or half days with a day trip.

We have seasonal London day trips for summer and winter posts here or otherwise consider heading to one of these no matter what time of year of 

• Harry Potter Studio Tours  One of, if not the most popular day trip from London at the moment. It is a must for any Potterhead. But we warned advance booking is absolutely essential and I would book this as soon as you book your trip to London as this can sell out months in advance.  Book your tickets online in advance HERE
• Hampton court Palace Getting to Hampton Court Palace is really easy on the train. You take the train from Waterloo station in central London and the journey takes only 35 minutes and trains run every half hour. The train station is a short walk to the palace. This is especially good for those that love royal history and Henry VIII in particular. The palace also has loads of things for children to do
• Windsor Another one for the Royal History fans. Windsor is home to Queen Elizabeth II and is great for history lovers. You can also explore Eton or Legoland if you have a whole day. 
• Oxford One of my favourite day trips from London, Oxford is a very quaint town and one of my favourite things is to explore the colleges of the University. This is also great for any Harry Potter lover in your life as here you will see many of the filming locations for Hogwarts.
• York This is definitely a full rather than a half day trip as it takes just under two hours on the train to get to York.  But with London this is my favourite city in the UK.  It isn’t as crowded as London and has a beautiful Minster, River and tons of great museums and shops.

We hope you like our suggested 4 days in London itinerary and would love to hear if you follow it or tell us how you spend a London 4 day trip by sharing your London travel itinerary. 4 days is it enough do you think? 

Other London Reading on Wandermust Family 

• 50 + things to do in London with kids 
• 4 Day London Itinerary 
• 5-7 Day London Itinerary with Kids
• London Bucket List 
• UK Bucket List
• 50 Things to do on a Rainy Day in London
• Hampton Court Day Trip 
• Guide to Visiting London with a Baby or Toddler 
• Children’s Books set in London

Perfect 4 Day London Itinerary

Saturday 13th of July 2019

Wow this is an awesome post. There is so much to see and do in London and to have it broken down into bite sized chunks as you have is great. And I didn't know the changing of the guard doesn't happen every day.

Cath - Passports and Adventures

Saturday 6th of April 2019

This is a great itinerary. No matter how many times I visit London (I've been too many times to count) I always discover or visit something totally new each time. I'm there in 4 weeks and can't wait to see what's in store for me x

Saturday 24th of November 2018

Great itinerary for your first visit to London, it's overwhelming how much there is to do when you first start planning a trip! Love the rib boat idea, that sounds so much fun!

Sounds like the perfect four days! I love the Tower of London - one of my favourite attractions in the city.

Claire at Tin Box Traveller

Sunday 10th of June 2018

Great suggestions! I've done a lot around Westminster but there's still so much of London I'm yet to see. I'd also love to go back and do the Tower of London again! #MondayEscapes

All Destinations , Europe , London , United Kingdom

The best london itinerary: 4 days in the british capital.

London’s a city that every travel-lover has to visit at some point in their lives (and somewhere I should stop taking for granted).

It’s got nearly everything you’d want in a city: history, culture, good food, nightlife, entertainment in all shapes and sizes and attractions for literally anyone.

The only thing we’re missing in ol blighty is some decent weather.

No, I’m being mean here. We do get sunshine sometimes – and London’s worth visiting even in the rain, trust me.

I was born in Bromley, the largest London borough, and lived there for the first 18 years of my life.

While I travel around now, London is my official ‘home’ base, so I feel like it’s about time I created a London itinerary to show you all the best of my home city.

I’m going to guess you know the main highlights of London already, but this itinerary will really help you when you’re trying to work out exactly what to do when on your 4 days (or more!) in London.

This 4 day London itinerary covers the highlights of the city, including attractions like Westminster Abbey, Buckingham Palace, the Tower of London and St Paul’s Cathedral.

I also feature the best entertainment facilities and some other attractions that you might not know about, including some of the best free things to do in London .

Plus, this guide includes some of my favourite restaurants in London and some recommendations of where to stay in London.

While 4 days in London is a good amount of time to scratch the surface, you could spend an almost unlimited amount of time in this city.

I lived in London for 18 years and I’m still nowhere near seeing it all!

If you’re wondering how much time to spend in London, I’ll include a section at the end of this post about ideas for extra days, including some day trips from London.

But London is worth visiting to visit no matter how much time you have. And the beauty is, you can come back to it time and time again.

London changes each season, each year, each week. It’s hardly the same now as it was an hour ago.

It’s such a dynamic and evolving city that constantly keeps people coming back for more.

And I’m so lucky that I can keep on coming back for more.

Without further ado, let’s delve into this 4 days in London itinerary for first-timers.

Day Zero – touch down in London town

Obviously, for this London itinerary, 4 days is the optimal amount of time, but I’m writing presuming that you have arrived in the city on the evening before this itinerary begins.

If you arrived at a different time, adjust accordingly!

London is very well connected to almost everywhere in the world – there’s even a direct flight from London Heathrow to Perth, Australia nowadays.

Arrive at the airport and travel to your hotel – your options include (from cheapest to most expensive) coach, tube, train or taxi. Here are some of the best places to stay in London for a week , if you’re yet to book!

If you’re visiting London from Europe, train or coach from the continent might be a more budget-friendly option than flying (plus it’s better for the environment !) – and you’ll be dropped a lot closer to the centre.

If you’re travelling to London from elsewhere in the UK, the best ways to reach the centre are by train or coach (the coach, especially the Megabus, is much cheaper).

London Itinerary Day 1: The Highlights

Westminster abbey.

Begin your day at Westminster tube station.

Served by the Circle, District and Jubilee lines, it’s the perfect launching pad for Westminster Abbey – one of London’s most famous attractions .

Westminster Abbey has a photographer’s dream for an exterior; but once you’ve got a very British snap for the exterior (the more union jacks you can get into the frame, the better!) you’ll want to check out the inside.

The building was erected between 1245 and 1272 and is the place where various famous people from British history were buried, including:

• Edward the Confessor
• Elizabeth I
• Anne of Cleves
• Sir Isaac Newton
• Charles Darwin
• Charles Dickens
• And many more!

It was also the wedding venue of Prince William and Kate Middleton, making it a popular spot with fans of the royal family.

Another highlight is the Coronation Chair, which every king and queen since at least 1399 has been crowned on. Westminster Abbey is really one of the essential places to visit in London to learn about British culture and history.

It costs £22 to purchase tickets on the door or £20 to buy them in advance online .

I know that’s a bit of a painful amount to cough up on your first morning, especially if you’re paying for a family, but it’s worth it.

Buckingham Palace

Once you’ve got your fill of the abbey, it’s a 14 minute walk to Buckingham Palace.

You can only go inside two months of the year (and it’s expensive!) but the guard change is year-round – although not daily. Check whether the guard change will be on here .

The exterior of Buckingham Palace is grand and is perfect for exploring, even if the change of the guards isn’t on.

It’s a huge place, and there are some great photo angles to catch.

After you’re done walking around Buckingham Palace, take a stroll through Green Park. This is a leafy area that’s a pleasant green lung in the city.

You’ll eventually reach Picadilly (great for you monopoly enthusiasts!), which is an iconic London street to stroll down.

You’ll walk past the Ritz Hotel and will see London cabs, red phone boxes and equally scarlet double-decker buses go past.

Lunch in Soho

Taking a left from Piccadilly, you’ll start to reach Soho.

This is a fun spot to walk around and is also great for lunch! I’d highly recommend the delicious all-vegetarian restaurant Mildreds  which harks back to 1988.

It can get busy there and they don’t take bookings, so be prepared for a short wait, but know that it is well worth it!

The British Museum

After lunch, it’s time to check out a museum!

The British Museum is one of the best collections of global history and art in the world. And it’s completely free to enter!

It was the first national museum to be open to the public in the museum and has findings made by British explorers from home and abroad.

It includes exhibits from Ancient Iran, Greece, China, Egypt and more.

Big Ben, the Houses of Parliament, the London Eye and The Thames

Once you’ve finished at the British Museum, it’s time to walk towards Big Ben (which is actually the name of the bell, not the tower, which goes by Elizabeth Tower ) and the Houses of Parliament.

While these attractions are generally admired from the outside, it is possible to witness a debate at the Houses of Parliament .

You’ll need to book in advance, but they are free to attend.

If you don’t fancy watching Boris and Keir have a jolly old showdown in the houses (disclaimer: they may not be there, even if you do book tickets), just take a stroll by the Thames and enjoy soaking in the quintessential London atmosphere.

Nearby is the London Eye, which is a must-do while in the capital.

You can purchase tickets in advance or buy them there .

They are slightly cheaper in advance and you won’t need to wait, but you will be locked into a time.

With any luck, you’ll see the city spread out beneath you in light, at dusk, and in dark (I mean, you’ve got to time it really well, but let’s presume you’re lucky).

Afterwards, I recommend checking out a film at the IMAX and having dinner nearby.

London Itinerary Day 2: The City of London

St paul’s cathedral.

It’s time to see the City of London for your second day in the capital.

Start your day at St Paul’s Cathedral . The nearest tube station is the creatively named St Paul’s tube station.

St Paul’s is one of London’s prime attractions. Tickets cost £18 and doors are open from 8:30am, with the galleries opening at 9:30am.

Highlights of St Paul’s Cathedral include:

• Seeing scenes of the life of St. Paul
• The Duke of Wellington monument
• Walking up to the top of the Dome and the Whispering Gallery which is where the slightest whisper can be heard around the cathedral
• The Stone Gallery and the Golden Gallery
• The crypt, which is the resting place for some of London’s most notable characters including the Duke of Wellington and Admiral Nelson.
• Ocolus which is inside a theatre in the crypt, with a 270 degree film detailing the history of St Paul’s.
• Other chapels including the All Soul’s Chapel, St. Micheal and St George Chapel, Middlesex Chapel and the American Memorial Chapel

Tower of London

Next up is the Tower of London.

Located a 22-minute walk from St Paul’s Cathedral, it’s a great spot to visit. You’re in the bridge region of London (disclaimer: I just made up this name), so go via Millennium Bridge.

This bridge was used in Harry Potter and the Half-Blood Prince as the site of a dementor attack. Spooky!

Walk back over the iconic Tower Bridge to reach the Tower of London.

Tower Bridge is a great photography spot in London; you’ll be able to snap the bridge itself from different angles and the view of the castle and the rest of the city from the side.

Then it is time for the Tower of London . This spooky joint is one of the best attractions in London and is oozing with British history.

It has had a varied past; enjoying life as the Royal Mint, a jail, and even a zoo.

You’ll get to learn some fun facts about the history of London while you walk around the tower and see the Crown Jewels, which reside there.

It costs £22.70 for adult entrance.

Lunch: Borough Market

After ticking off two of Britain’s top attractions, you’ll most likely be a tad peckish! Have no fear, nearby is Borough Market.

Borough Market is London’s oldest food market and has been around for a whole 1000 years. It’s made giant leaps and bounds in the last millennium and now nods to London’s cosmopolitanism by having a fantastic range of world food stalls.

There are a few vegetarian-only stalls in Borough Market , most of which have lots of vegan options.

These include The Big V with seitan mushroom burgers and hotdogs, the Egyptian stall Koshari Street, Gujarati Rasoi which is a vegetarian Indian stall with some vegan options, middle-eastern meze stall Arabica and Sweet Roots which serve vegan sweets.

Oxford Street

After enjoying the bustling market, take a tube to Oxford Street.

It is the busiest shopping street in Europe, but even if you don’t want to shop here it’s worth a stroll around to soak in the atmosphere. (I actually don’t think I’ve ever bought something from Oxford Street – shopping stresses me out).

Selfridges is probably the most famous shop on the street, with six floors and 11 places to eat.

There are also many British high street stores – more often than not it will be the largest branch in the country. If you’re like me and aren’t a fan of clothes shopping, check out Foyles which is a huge independent bookstore.

I’d probably spend my entire 4 days in London here, but there are some other attractions to check out in the area, like Marble Arch.

This monument is a famous London landmark and used to be a place of public execution. Just in case the Tower of London wasn’t enough of London’s gory history for the day!

If Oxford Street really isn’t your thing, Hyde Park is nearby.

It’s the green lung of the city and is home to walking trails, flora and fauna, boating opportunities, a Speaker’s Corner which has been the site of speeches and debates since the 1800s and many memorials, fountains and statues.

Covent Garden

Phew! Once you’ve done about as much hiking in London as you can – whether it’s through the stores or around Hyde Park, check out Covent Garden for dinner.

It’s lovely at any time of day, but the evening is when it comes alive, with live street performers, buskers and a lovely atmosphere. Grab some dinner in town – I highly recommend the all-vegan By Chloe in Covent Garden, where you can grab some veganized British classics.

My favourite is the ‘fish’ and chips, but there is also shepherd’s pie, macaroni cheese and more – all completely vegan!. With amazing options for cruelty-free British food, there’s no reason to want to reach for the meaty options.

The West End

After a yummy dinner, head to the West End to see a show. There are a range of shows throughout the year, including the Lion King, Wicked and more. Buy tickets from here.

London Itinerary Day 3: The East and West Ends

Natural history museum.

Day 3 kicks off with another free museum.

The Natural History Museum is one of London’s best and displays a range of artifacts from British and national history.

You’ll learn all about the dinosaurs that once roamed the country (and see some huge skeletons!), educate yourself in the flora and fauna of Britain and even get the chance to go inside an earthquake simulation.

If you have time the natural history museum can be twinned with a visit to the V&A (Victoria and Albert) museum.

This museum is one of the world’s best collections of art and design objects.

With many national collections of the UK as well as examples of architecture, furniture, fashion, textiles and photography, visiting the V&A is an enthralling experience.

It is just a short walk from the V&A Museum to Harrods.

I’d recommend having lunch here – although it will come with a hefty price tag, it is a quintessentially British experience.

There are a few different restaurant options within Harrods, from fine dining to afternoon teas . Pick your favourite depending on your tastes and appetite!

The East End – Self Guided Walking Tour

After a fairly elegant morning in eastern London, take the tube to London’s east to explore this neighbourhood.

Take the tube to St Paul’s (and say hello to the cathedral again!) before exploring the east.

The rest of day 3 of your 4 day London itinerary will take you on a walking tour slowly east, to see some of the best parts of this area of London.

The Great Wall of London

First up, the remains of London’s Roman Wall are quite significant – and a tourist attraction that many do not see.

There’s hardly any of them now, but they are worth the trip. They are close to St Paul’s underground station and the cathedral.

One New Change Shopping Centre

Next up, head to One New Change shopping centre. ‘Another shop?!’ I hear you cry. Don’t worry, I’m not recommending any time in Topshop – head to the rooftop to catch a winning view of the City of London.

Trust me, you won’t be disappointed. If the mood takes you, you could also visit the rooftop bar, Madison, for a glass of prosecco while gazing over St Paul’s massive dome.

Leadenhall Market

Walk through the streets of east London, enjoying the old buildings that are brimming with history throughout the decades. Eventually, you’ll get to Leadenhall Market, which is a must-see for any Harry Potter fans among you!

It served as part of Diagon Alley in the first film of Harry Potter.

The doorway to the Leaky Cauldron pub is actually an optician, located at 42 Bull’s Head Passage.

As you walk around Leadenhall, you’ll get a real sense of the magic of the wizarding world and your main question will be should I buy my wand or my wizarding hat first?

The Gherkin

As you head north-east, you’ll walk right past the Gherkin.

This interesting building has been used as an icon for London’s business focus since it was constructed (have you ever seen The Apprentice?) and it’s certainly an interesting shape, great for some photos!

Jack the Ripper Tours

Jack the Ripper tours leave from near the Gherkin.

If you fancy being spooked, this hour and a half trip will show you around the east end and detail some of its goriest history. Jack the Ripper was a serial killer in the 19 th century, who remained unidentified.

It will give you a good understanding of the perils of 19 th century London, with some interesting stories to boot.

Old Spitalfields Market

If you don’t fancy the ghost tour, you can carry on with this self-guided walking tour.

Next is Old Spitalfields Market.

Harking from the 17 th Century, Old Spitalfields serves lots of delicious food stalls – perfect for an afternoon snack! – and is home to jewellery, books and clothes vendors.

Be sure not to eat too much at Old Spitalfields though, because it’s dinner time!

Brick Lane is one of the most vibrant parts of the city of London and is perfect for Britain’s favourite meal… curry!

Before dinner, take a walk around Brick Lane to see some of the intriguing street art that tells the tale of this area of the city.

Another fun thing to do near Brick Lane is seeing the street art.

Artists like Banksy, D*Face and Ben Eine have all decorated the walls of the street. Other highlights on the road are the Great London Mosque, historic buildings like The Director’s House, the Vat House and the Engineer’s House.

And of course, there’s nowhere better than Brick Lane for curry. Eateries line the streets, all offering authentic dishes from India and Pakistan. There’s even an all vegan curry house, City Spice .

After your meal, head into Shoreditch high street for some nightlife.

Bar-hopping is one of the best things to do in Shoreditch , and it has a great vibe any day of the week.

Favourites include Ballie Ballerson (which has giant ball pits!), the Book Club (of course I’m recommending a club involving books – there’s more beer than Bronte there though I promise!) and the Blues Kitchen.

London Itinerary Day 4: The Suburbs of London

Shoreditch is a good time, but it has a tendency to make people’s heads hurt the next day.

If you’re not too under the weather, get up early to visit Greenwich on your last day in London.

South of the CBD, Greenwich feels like a town within itself – which it is, really. It is home to a beautiful park, the Cutty Sark, the east and west hemispheres and lots of pubs, bars and restaurants. It’s an absolutely beautiful place for a stroll around as well.

In Greenwich observatory it’s possible to visit the planetarium to find out more about the cosmos that surrounds us – a humbling experience.

After, learn about the history of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) which will detail how clocks changed the world.

You’ll get to learn all about why the Meridian Line is there – and then head to the line itself to stand with one foot in the east and one in the west hemisphere!

Next, move on to Cutty Sark. The fastest ship of her day, the Cutty Sark now resides on the Thames at Greenwich.

The ship can be climbed upon, giving visitors the chance to learn how to steer the ship.

It also tells guests the story of the boat and there are spectacular views from the boat. It costs £12.15 for adults to visit the Cutty Sark, and £6.30 for children.

Once you’re sarked out, there is also a brewery next door which is worth a visit, especially if you’re a beer connoisseur.

Brewery tours are a little limited – they are at 7pm every weekday and at various times over the weekend – but you can still purchase a couple of bottles outside these hours for the next stop on your London itinerary… Which is a picnic in Greenwich Park!

This huge green space is ideally situated over the London skyline.

Purchase some goodies from one of the mini supermarkets in Greenwich (not tryna brag, but London’s to go food section is probably the best in the world) and enjoy your lunch while looking over the capital of Britain.

Help your food go down by a stroll around the park afterwards.

This green space in the middle of such a busy city is a lovely way to spend an afternoon.

If you’re visiting London in the winter and it’s not quite picnicking weather, grab some lunch at one of the many charismatic pubs or restaurants in Greenwich.

After eating, you have a few options to spend your afternoon.

Climb Up the O2

If it takes your fancy, you can scale the O2, Britain’s favourite concert arena!

It was built for the Millenium and was only meant to be a temporary part of the city, but because people loved it so much it was made into a live music venue. It also accommodates clubs, restaurants and bars.

It is 52 metres at its highest point and climbing up this building is known as ‘urban mountaineering at its finest’.

Tickets for Up at the O2 start at £30 and must be booked in advance.

If you choose this option you may prefer to get dinner in the O2 rather than going to Camden in London’s north, as suggested in this guide.

There are tons of restaurants within the arena, so you won’t have any trouble finding somewhere! Also check the Indigo2 website to see what is on.

Chislehurst Caves

If you have time, it is well worth the 30 minute journey to Chislehurst to see the Chislehurst Caves.

They are actually manmade mines and hark back from the Saxon age and served as London’s largest air raid shelter in World War Two. The cave network was known as “The Town Underground”, and had facilities such as a shop, a school, a church and a citizens advice bureau!

In more recent times they have been a concert venue, and the likes of David Bowie (a local star), Pink Floyd and The Who have all played there!

Tours leave every hour on the hour. From Chislehurst, you can take a train directly to London Bridge.

Ice Skating at Canary Wharf

If you prefer and it is winter, from Greenwich consider taking the DLR to Canary Wharf to go ice skating amongst London’s tallest buildings.

Imperial War Museum

Another option is, if I haven’t museum-ed you out yet, to take the DLR from Greenwich to Bank and then the Northern Line to Elephant and Castle.

From here you can go to the Imperial War Museum. While horrific and devastating in parts, the museum is very beneficial to visit to understand the wars that the UK has been involved in.

If you aren’t feeling another museum, or are low on time, head to Camden straight away (via the Northern Line from Bank) to soak in the atmosphere of the cool suburb.

If you’re a Harry Potter fan, stop of at King’s Cross/ St Pancras on the way to take a snap of the trolley heading towards the Hogwarts Express!

Highlights of Camden include Regent’s Canal, the many vintage shops and Primrose Hill, which has beautiful views of the city – from the other side!

Whatever you end up doing in the afternoon, I recommend having dinner in Camden to get the chance to see this hip suburb. The markets are open until 6 pm and there are a variety of restaurants in the area.

There are lots of bars and pubs in Camden that are perfect for enjoying your last night in the city in, many with live music.

The Northern Line runs 24 hours on weekends and failing that there are night buses back into the city, so don’t worry too much about getting home and enjoy your time!

Substitutions – Half-Days

If you don’t fancy one of the half-days on this London itinerary, then feel free to substitute it with one of these alternatives.

These attractions aren’t in the centre of London, but they can be reached easily and quickly in just a morning or an afternoon.

Windsor Castle

The home of the queen, Windsor Castle is a great half day trip from the city. It is the oldest and largest lived in castle in the world and makes for some amazing photos.

Highlights include St George’s Chapel which has the tombs of some monarchs (if you didn’t get enough in Westminster Abbey) and was the wedding destination of Harry and Meghan, the State Apartments which welcome you to the interior of the palace and Queen Mary’s Dolls House.

Hampton Court

Two palaces – one heralding from Tudor times and another built by William III and Mary I – stand together at Hampton Court. It was Cardinal Wolsey, and then Henry VIII’s, stomping ground, and remained as a royal residence until 1760.

Visitors can see areas relating to its history, the highlight being the Tudor Kitchens.

Black Cab Tour

A black cab tour is one of the most unique things that you can do in the city. It’s a wonderful bespoke tour that you can do to find out more about London’s fascinating tales!

What to do with extra days in London or substitutions for whole days

If you’ve adjusted this itinerary to suit your tastes and have a whole day free, or if you’re spending 5 days in London or longer, check out these day trips from London that take a whole day.

Thorpe Park

London’s largest theme park, Thorpe Park is great for all ages.

With rides ranging from loop the loop rollercoasters to spinning teacups, it’s a great visit for any adrenalin seekers or families visiting London. It is only open in the summer.

Hever Castle

Wonderful in the summertime, Hever Castle takes a bit of getting to from central London but it’s well worth it.

It was the childhood home of Anne Boleyn, a character that every British schoolchild learns about at least 10 times in school. She was the second wife of Henry VIII – the king who cut everyone’s heads off – and guess what he did to her? That’s right, cut her head off.

Before this lover’s tiff, they had quite a loving marriage – so loving in fact, that Henry changed the entire religion of Britain so he could divorce his previous wife and marry Anne.

Hever Castle was a major setting during their courtship, and you can see their bedrooms, love letters written by them and other prestigious castle features.

In the grounds, there is a maze, a water maze, Italianite Victorian Gardens and a really fun children’s playground.

Beautiful Brighton is many people’s favourite coastal British city, for good reason.

It’s got a really chilled out atmosphere, with lots of quirky shops lining the seafront.

It’s also home to Brighton Pier, which could rival Thorpe Park for its rides and is seaside entertainment at its finest and Brighton Pavilion which was inspired by Asian architecture.

To reach Brighton, take a train from London Victoria.

Downton Abbey Tour

For fans of the popular TV show – Downton Abbey Tours operate from London, visiting Highclere Castle in Newbury.

It’s a 9 hour tour leaving and arriving back in London – and is possibly one of the most British things you can do in the country!

Home to a UNESCO world heritage site in its centre, Canterbury is one of the most historically significant cities in the UK – and has been so since 1170.

The Canterbury Tales attraction is a must-do for anyone interested in literature and medieval history. The town itself is very pleasant for a stroll around; there is a cathedral, St Augustine’s Abbey and St Martin’s church that are all well worth exploring.

Famed for the prestigious university, Oxford is home to museums, a covered market and some historic pubs, some dating from the 13 th century.

Many visitors to Oxford go to explore the university campuses, some of which offer guided tours. Christ Church is the most famous, which was used in Harry Potter as the Hogwarts courtyard!

Beautiful Cambridge has a rival university and is also home to many university campuses that are worth exploring. Also in Cambridge are punting tours on the river, museums and restaurants and a Pink Floyd tour.

Just over two hours by coach, and under two hours by car, Bath is a little far but is a great day trip from London if you can hack the journey (if you want to stay overnight, there are some good and cheap hotels there as well!).

The city is known for its Roman Baths, which can be explored, its Thermae Spa (perfect for some pampering after exploring London!), its Georgian architecture and its wonderful Abbey.

One day in Bath is doable – although you will be cramming a lot in – but a visit to this city is well, well worth it.

Where to Stay in London

I’ve written a whole post on this, so check out my London hotels and hostels guide by clicking here . Alternatively, if you want my ‘best of the best’, read on.

Best Hostel in London: Wombats City Hostel, London

This jazzy hostel is a great place for travelers looking to rest their head in London. The dorms are creative and spacious, with lots of natural light and individual plug sockets.

The hostel has a huge bar, a courtyard and a hangout area that make socializing a breeze. They’ve also won Hostel World’s ‘Cleanest Hostel Worldwide’ award not once, but twice. Click here for rates and to book.

Best Cheap Hotel in London: 72QT, Notting Hill

This is one of the best bed and breakfasts in London . With a budget rate including a cooked breakfast, it’s a great place for travelers on a budget who prefer not to stay in hostels.

The rooms are decorated well in a modern style and feature free WiFi and a bar, open Fridays and Saturdays. The B&B borders Hyde Park and is close to an underground station to reach central London. Click here for rates and to book .

Best Hotel to Stay with Kids in London: Oliver Plaza Hotel

Oliver Plaza Hotel is located in Kensington, a great place to stay with kids in London, and offers double or triple rooms with included breakfast.

The hotel has been recently refurbished. Each room is kitted out with all the amenities you need for a comfortable stay. Click here for rates and to book .

Best Mid-Range Hotel in London: Z Hotel Victoria

Z Hotel has branches throughout London; I recommend the Victoria branch for value for money and to be close to the centre. The rooms are compact but cosy, with air conditioning, heating, WiFi and a TV with satellite channels.

Breakfast can be purchased for extra. Click here for rates and to book .

Best Luxury Hotel in London: The London EDITION

The London EDITION is a five-star hotel with lavish rooms. Each is decorated in a regal style and features amenities such as views of the city, a minibar and luxury bathroom.

On-site is a fitness centre, a restaurant serving delicious food and a cocktail bar. Click here for rates and to book. Click here for rates and to book .

What to pack for London

You don’t need anything too crazy to visit London, but here are a few ideas for things that may come in handy:

• An umbrella – we’re not joking about the rain!
• A rain poncho if you like to stay super dry
• Sturdy shoes for walking
• A good camera to capture all of the London highlights
• A high-quality backpack to keep all of your sightseeing essentials in
• A Lonely Planet Guide to London

Hey! I’m on YouTube too!

I’m currently travelling from Bali to London without taking a single flight! I’m documenting my journey on YouTube and would love it if you could follow me there! Here is a video detailing the journey a bit more:

Click here to go to my channel – I’d love it if you subscribed and joined the community!

Your Complete 4 Day London Itinerary

I hope that this 4 day London itinerary helps you to enjoy the best of the British capital! If you’re hanging around in the UK for some time, check out my other very British posts. If you enjoyed this article, please give it a share or follow me over on Facebook or Instagram !

28 thoughts on “ The Best London Itinerary: 4 Days in the British Capital ”

Very exhaustively explained 4 days London your. I am to visit London in 3rd week of May , can u help we with short guide with itinary? I will be staying in Wembley. Also guide in transportation as I will be my own to travel to London with my wife. We are 68 -and 66 year senior citizens from India.

Hi Vikram! My itinerary details all of the best things to do, if you haven’t booked accommodation yet I recommend going to my where to stay in London post https://clairesfootsteps.com/where-to-stay-in-london/ which will help! For transport, get an oyster card and use the tube – it’s much more efficient than the bus. If you can avoid travelling during rush hour (7:30-9:30 and 5-7) you’ll have a much more relaxed time. Let me know if you have any more questions!

Hello Claire, Good day, We are planning to tour London and Scotland for 10 days in August 2019 from New Delhi India. We are Sr CTZN of age 70 yrs and 68 yrs with limited capacity to walk around.Please tell me where to stay with a per night budget of GBP 150-200 . Also please suggest the itinerary. Thanks Kulbhushan Garg India

Hi Kulbhushan,

Thanks for your comment. I have a where to stay in London post here – https://clairesfootsteps.com/where-to-stay-in-london/ which should help – this itinerary post should help with things to do as well. I’ve never been to Scotland so can’t advise there!

Hey there. It’s a wonderful post and I loved the very details you have put in. I would be in London in a few weeks time, however, I am a bit confused between an oyster card or using a contactless card such as Monzo in tubes. What do you think which one is the best bet- Oyster or Monzo? I have come across few videos which says contactless is cheaper than Monzo but the more videos I see the more confused I get 🙁

Hey, Oyster card is the same cost as using a normal contactless card. I don’t know about Monzo so I’m not sure if it’s different but it shouldn’t be. But if you’re worried you can get an Oyster card – you need to pay a 5 pound deposit but that is refundable 🙂

Hello Claire, I came across your site and really liked it very much. My husband and I are planning to visit London ‘hopefully’ next year. It will be the first time we are travelling on our own. We are of 59 and 56 years of age and from Malta. Would like very much to keep in contact for future advise and planning. Thanks and regards Annette

Hi Annette, I’m glad you liked it! You’ll love London, it’s very easy to travel in. Let me know if you have any further questions 🙂

Hi Claire, Thanks for such informative itinerary,actually I am planning in 1st week of september to London and Scotland, so this 4days itinerary perfectly suits me.

Hi Claire, thanks so much for sharing your fabulous list! In a few weeks I’m heading back to London for the first time since living there for 18 months almost 30 years and am so looking forward to just being a tourist this time around. I shall print out your list and carry it around with me. Take care, Karen (Melbourne, Australia) xx

Hi Claire, Love your iternary posted. I’ll be visiting London with my daughter for 4D3N. Appreciate if you can kindly assist to narrow down the iternary accordingly. We’ll reach London at 10am and to leave for 7pm flight to Oslo on 4th day.

Hi Claire, great text you wrote! 🙂 We are from Bosnia and Herzegovina and we plann to visit London this year, with our 9 y.o. son. He is big Harry Potter fan, so we have to include one day HP tour (visit WB studio) 🙂 So, we would probably need to stay at least 5-6 days in total, in order to see everything we want… Do you think July would be too hot for walking? Second option is end November, but I would like to avoid rain. All the best

Hey! Thanks for your comment – I love Harry Potter too and the WB studio is awesome! British weather is never predictable, so while there’s a chance you might get temperatures in the high 20s in July (that’s hot for us!) it may also be 15 degrees! It’s rarely too hot for walking in London, so don’t worry about that too much :). To be honest it could rain either time! End of November will be cold but it will be nice and Christmassy which is really magical.

Hey !it was lovely reading ur very informative n detailed itenary n is excited to read more n know more about London before we reach in Dec with pur kids..so kindly tel me more about things to do with kids in Dec

Dearest Claire, My wife, aged 50 years and myself, aged 57 years, are visiting London in August 19.

We have a arrangement for our stay.

Kindly help us plan and fix our schedule to visit major tourist places in five days.

What will be the approximate cost for the same?

What will be the weather be like?

Is it compulsory to carry raincoat / umbrellas?

Hope, we are not inconveniencing you in any way.

Thanks in advance.

Hi Rajkumar,

You can use this 4 day itinerary, and add a day trip onto the end 🙂 Unfortunately our weather is very unpredictable, it might be warm and sunny like it has been recently or it could be cold and raining! I’d definitely prepare for any weather (it shouldn’t get under 10 degrees though) and definitely pack a raincoat or umbrella is it definitely could rain!

Hi Claire, Me and my sister will be arriving at London on December 25th and will be there till the end of this year. We are 25 and 18 year old. Will be staying near Swiss Cottage area. Considering most public transportation is closed on Christmas day, what are the sightseeing we can do on that day. Do Ubers operate frequently from Heathrow Airport on Christmas Day.

Great itinerary! This is a perfect itinerary for our family of 5 including 3 teenagers! We will be following it to the T! I was thinking of renting a car to take to the Cotswolds to see the Christmas markets. We are Americans so we drive on the right side of the road. Do you think it is too dangerous to attempt the drive on the left side since it is winter and we will not know the road conditions this December? My husband and I are good good drivers, but have never driven on the left side. We have 1 or 2 extra days. I will follow you and your Bali adventure on Instagram! Enjoy! Tonia

Thanks for your comment and I’m glad the itinerary was super helpful! The Cotswolds are beautiful and definitely worth visiting while you’re in the country. So generally the roads in the UK are very good, you might be going down a few country roads around the Cotswolds but most are gritted so risk of traffic incidents is low as long as there’s no snow (it only snows a couple of days a year here and not normally in December). Regarding driving on the left, it depends on what you’re comfortable with but I drove on the right recently on a trip to France and didn’t have too many problems with it – especially if there are two of you making sure you’re on the right side of the road, you should be alright! Let me know what you end up doing! 🙂

hi Claire, i plan my first trip to london with my sisters for six days, do you recommend getting The London Pass + travelcard plan on the oyster card for £184 per person for travel and the included discounted access to the attractions they offer?

Your itineraries sound great, but unless I am mistaken, the Pier in Brighton has yet to be rebuilt, or am I mistaken?

I think you migth be mistaken, in my lifetime Brighton pier has never needed to be rebuilt!

John Keates is actually buried in Rome at the protestant cemetery near Piramide.

oooh ok I’ll fact check, thanks!

We will be traveling to London in April and we will be following most of your itinerary …. This is a very good itinerary for our family of 3, including my 12-year old daughter… she may adding a bit more shopping and musicals … this is her Birthday trip. BTW… we will be in Bali in July… for my Birthday! My wife being from Indonesia we travel often there…. Best regards, Hervé from Switzerland

I did not read carefully your itinerary because I am looking at the Stonehenge but I found none. I have question. Can the Oyster Card be used as well on buses? When you say, “Tube” is it a train? Thank you.

Hello, the tube is our subway/ metro 🙂 And you can use your Oyster card on trains, buses, or the tube.

Hi, is there a printable version of the 4 day tour, I can study. Thanks

Comments are closed.

• New Zealand
• The Philippines
• The Netherlands
• United Kingdom
• Inspiration
• Overland Itineraries
• Packing Lists
• Travel Tips
• Working Abroad
• Accomodation Guides
• Overland Travel
• Preserving Cultures
• Protecting Animals
• Living Abroad

4 days in London itinerary: Plan a trip to London 4 days

Love it? Share it!

Cosmopolitan – cultural – (sometimes) crazy, that is London for you! If you’re thinking of spending 4 days in London itinerary, you’re in for a treat! 

A London 4-day itinerary will be full of history, culture, and an endless array of things to do. From iconic landmarks to world-class museums, there’s something for everyone in London. And with a vibrant nightlife and dining scene, you’ll never be bored. 

So start planning your trip and get ready for an unforgettable experience.

4 days in London itinerary: Plan a trip to London for 4 days

Disclosure: This post contains affiliate links. If you click one of them, we may receive a small commission at no extra cost to you.

Planning your trip to London: London Travel Tips

Planning a trip to an iconic European city like London might be overwhelming, and to fit everything in four days is also difficult, and it’s understandable why. The bustling metropolis of the British Capital City is literally overflowing with things to see, making it all the more bewildering if you’re a first-time visitor.

So how do you fit everything that London has to offer in 4 days? Choose only activities that interest you (musuems, shopping, attractions, etc.) and keep a few hours each day to enjoy green parks, walks, and dining. 

We have tried to include the must-do London bucket list experiences , a day of museums (we picked history museums, but we also got natural and art museums on this list), afternoon tea, and shopping!

4 day London Itinerary: Snapshot

Day 1 of 4 day London itinerary: Arrive in London, visit Kensington Palace, Royal Albert Hall, Hyde Park, explore Buckingham Palace, St. James Park, West End

Day 2 of 4 days in london itinerary: national gallery, trafalgar square, hop on and hop off tour, london south bank, big ben, houses of parliament, westminster abbey, london eye, churchill war rooms, night tour of london (optional).

• Day 3 of 4 days in London itinerary : Day of museums (Natural History Museum, Victoria and Albert Museum), Oxford Street, Piccadilly Circus, Leicester Square
• Day 4 of London 4 day itinerary : Imperial War Museum, Tower Bridge, Tower of London, Afternoon Tea Cruise, Sky Garden, Dinner at an old English pub

Getting to London, United Kingdom: 

London has six major airports: London City Airport, Gatwick Airport, Heathrow Airport, London Luton Airport, London Stansted Airport, and London Southend Airport.

When traveling from North America or Asia, Heathrow and Gatwick are your best options, considering flight deals and frequencies. We have stopped at Heathrow many times, so you know that makes London an excellent stopover destination. 

For our first trip to London, we flew from Toronto, Canada to Gatwick, London. We booked a transfer from Gatwick to London Victoria Coach Station via National Express. You can take the train as well. We had some luggage and just preferred a coach for comfort. 

Travel and commute in London: 

So we walked a LOT in London and used public transportation only a few times. 

Depending on where you stay during your 4 day London trip, you may need a London City Pass, which includes transportation for 1 to 6, and 10 days along with a sightseeing bus tour and access to attractions like the Tower of London, London Zoo, Windsor Castle, and more. 

So essentially London Pass is a transport, sightseeing, and hop on and hop off ticket – all bundled into one. We found this pass useful for savings on attractions tickets and the one-day sightseeing tour. You can purchase your ticket here.

The 48-hour hop-on and off tour is handy – night or day. The nighttime tour is worth it – to relax and enjoy sightseeing after a day of museum hopping!

Without the London Pass , an affordable and convenient way of using public transportation to get around the city is by buying the Visitor Oyster Card London. 

It is valid for travel on the overground and underground network in Docklands, on the tube, buses, and trams, the Emirates cable car, the Thames River Ferry, and on many National Rail Trains.

Where to stay in London for first-time visitors?

As you prepare for your trip to London, you will need to plan well. Since you are visiting for the first time, it is important to choose a hotel that is centrally located. Doing so will also allow you to take trains or coaches to places nearby and explore more of England. 

We did a lot of research and found the Victoria Coach station area perfect for us. We stayed in a friendly and clean 3-star property (and there were many in the neighborhood), and attractions like Hyde Park, Buckingham Palace, transportation, and restaurants were located within walking distance. 

Our second and third area options include Covent Garden and Mayfair, as they enjoy a prime location and offer a wide range of accommodation to choose from. Covent Garden is home to the London Transport Museum, and The Royal Opera House.

Here are some of the top picks: 

• Sidney Victoria Hotel: This is a reasonably priced hotel in the heart of London, near the Victoria Coach and train station. We stayed here in a room with street views and loved it. The suite was clean and comfortable, and we walked to attractions like Buckingham Palace, St. James Park, and restaurants. Note that the rooms are a bit small though, but also affordable. Click to view hotel room availability here
• Club Quarters Hotel Trafalgar Square: This is a nice 4 star property located near Trafalgar Square. This is perfect as you are in the midst of tons of shopping, and fun dining options. There are attractions also near the Square, and you can walk to museums as well as Buckingham Palace (like we did). Click to view photos and availability
• Marriott Grosvenor Square: This luxury Marriott property is only a few minutes away from many tube stations and Bond Street. It is located in the Mayfair area – great access to sightseeing and restaurants. Book your stay here

Now, here’s our recommended 4 day London itinerary 

This London itinerary assumes that you are in the city the night before, allowing you to enjoy the four full days. 

If you are arriving on day 1, in either of these airports, – Heathrow, Gatwick, Luton, or Stansted, set aside the first half of the day for arrival, getting to your centrally located hotel, and then sightseeing.

We recommend staying in and around the Victoria Station and then walking to Buckingham Palace and nearby parks. You can skip the Kensington Palace on day one if you are pressed for time. 

Also, note all airports have trains which will take you to Central London quickly. 

Start your morning (or afternoon) from your centrally located hotel such as this one, and then walk to the pretty pink cafe – Peggy Porschen Belgravia – for coffee and cake. It is recommended that you book a table so that you can enjoy a nice breakfast.

This cafe is great for London Instagram photos, and also for a lovely all-girls afternoon tea party!

Peggy Porschen Belgravia is a little pricey, and the area near it has many other local cafes and bistros where you can enjoy a nice breakfast. 

Do remember to carry your credit card for payment, as many cafes near Victoria Station won’t accept cash (British Pounds).

Kensington Palace and Gardens

After breakfast, head to the area around Kensington Palace. Kensington Palace is one of the most popular tourist destinations in London. 

Located in Kensington Gardens, the palace has been a royal residence since the 17th century. Today, it is open to the public and houses a number of historic artifacts and works of art.

We recommend buying a morning ticket to visit the staterooms. They are open to the public from 10:00 am to 5:00 pm. Although entry is £20 for adults , it is free for London Pass holders.

Do spend some time at the Kensington Gardens, which is home to the Italian Garden, the Peter Pan Statue, the Diana – Princess of Wales Memorial Playground, and of course the Palace itself.

Royal Albert Hall

A walk across the palace gardens will bring you to the Royal Albert Hall , inaugurated by Queen Victoria in 1871 in memory of her husband Albert. From movie screenings and the annual Proms to tennis matches, there is always something going on here. 

Entry is free for London Pass holders.

Hyde Park is one of the largest parks in central London, and one of the Royal Parks of England. Covering 342 hectares (843 acres), it is the largest of four parks that form a continuous chain along the north side of the River Thames.

It is located next to the Kensington Gardens. Both parks are administered by The Royal Parks.

Hyde Park is the site of Speaker’s Corner, where open-air public speaking, debate, and discussion are allowed on almost any topic. And it is busy with visitors and locals enjoying a walk, picnic or jogs almost all the time. Access is free. 

You can also enjoy the Serpentine Gallery, a contemporary art gallery housed in a converted tea pavilion; the Princess Diana Memorial Fountain; the Albert Memorial; and the Serpentine Lake, located at the Hyde Park.

Boating is also possible at The Serpentine. It is open from April until October 31st, from 10 a.m. to around 4 p.m. (during the winter) and 10 a.m. to 8 p.m. (during the summer).

Buckingham Palace 

Up next is Buckingham Palace . We recommend walking to this spot, and it is a lovely stroll, especially in the spring and fall months. Walk to the Palace grounds via Hyde Park from Kensington Gardens. 

Try to get there at least by the late afternoon so that you can finish sightseeing with St. James Park nearby. 

First off, set aside 45 minutes to view the Changing of the Guard ceremony. It is perfect to do so after the crowds disperse, and it is a little calmer and quieter.  

Note that the Changing of the Guard takes place daily in summer but only on Monday, Wednesday, Friday and Sunday in winter. It gets called off on occasions so check timings before you go. You can book a Changing of the Guard tour here

It is important to note that there are night tours that take place in the summers, so this is another reason you should see the palace at the end of the day. 

If interested to view the State Rooms, you must aim to be there by afternoon as well. There are tours/passes for 2:00 pm or 3:45 pm on selected days. Check availability here .

St. James Park

St. James Park is a perfect place to end sightseeing on day one. This green oasis in the heart of the city is perfect for a nice evening stroll. 

In the warmer months, you can see flowers blooming everywhere. There is a cafe on-site where you can enjoy some drinks – tea or coffee, before nighttime activity. 

Nighttime activity 

No trip to London would be complete without seeing a West End show. Book your tickets in advance and enjoy a night of entertainment at one of the world’s most famous theatres, some of which have been running for many years. 

From The Lion King to The Phantom of the Opera there is a musical or show for every taste. 

On the morning of day 2 of London itinerary, try to utilize your one day hop on and hop-off tour that comes with the London Pass.  

Trafalgar Square

Plan to get down to the Trafalgar Square . Located in the heart of the city, this historic square is home to Nelson’s Column, the National Gallery, and the National Portrait Gallery. 

The Houses of Parliament and Westminster Abbey are also nearby, making this area a must-visit for any first-time visitor to London.

Spend time around the square admiring the various structures and the ambience of the surroundings. 

National Gallery

The National Gallery is a must-visit for art history fans. It is home to many masterpieces of art from the 13th to the 19th centuries.

Admission to the collection is free, but for special exhibitions held in the Sainsbury Wing, there is an entry fee, which can be purchased online. 

If you are not a museum fan, we recommend completing one round of the hop on and hop off tour , and then get down by the Big Ben stop.  

If walking, make your way to the south bank of the River Thames from the National Gallery to see three of the most iconic landmarks of the city –  Big Ben, the Houses of Parliament, and the gothic building of the Westminster Abbey, the site of the country’s coronation church since 1066.

Big Ben and the Houses of Parliament

Big Ben is a must-see – it’s an iconic London landmark that you won’t want to miss. On our trip, we were able to see it, in all its glory without any scaffolding. Take a walk around the clock tower and marvel at its beauty. It makes for a nice photo spot in London as well. 

The Houses of Parliament is the seat of the British government, and it’s definitely worth a visit. You can take a tour of the Houses of Parliament, or simply admire the architecture from the outside. Either way, it’s a must-see when you’re in London. 

Set aside 1-2 hours for sightseeing here. 

Westminster Abbey

Westminster Abbey is one of the most famous churches in the world, and it’s definitely worth a visit. From the Houses of Parliament, it is only a 3-minute walk. 

It is a gothic church and a well-known UNESCO World Heritage Site in London. The architecture of the Abbey is incredible, and there’s so much history inside. It has been the coronation church of the British monarchy since the 11th century, and the final resting place for over 17 monarchs. 

Plus visitors love to see where Kate and William got married! 🙂 

Make sure to check out the Royal tombs (where 30 royals are buried), and the beautiful stained glass windows while you are there. 

You will need to book an entrance ticket for the Westminster Abbey, and it is free with the London Pass .

Across River Thames is the London Eye or the Millennium Wheel. This is a great spot to soak in 360° views of London. 

A ride to the top takes about thirty minutes, and the views are worth the effort. We do recommend booking tickets in advance so that you can skip the line. Buy your fast track tickets for the London Eye here.

After visiting the London Eye, take a walk along the banks of the Thames to see the skyline of London at its best which includes the Millennium Bridge and Shakespeare’s Globe. 

Optional: So we did squeeze in the Churchill War Rooms on this day. It was an easy visit as we stayed in Victoria and the museum is on the way from here to Big Ben and back. 

Coming from the Big Ben/London Eye it will be a 7 to 10-minute walk. 

This is a paid museum, but it is worth it! The War Rooms had been on my bucket list for a while. Both Salil and I loved WWI and WWII history, and if you do too, then you must visit this museum. 

Plan to spend at least 1.50 to 2 hours here. This is where the then Prime Minister Winston Churchill lived and worked during WWII. 10 Downing Street is also located nearby.

Here is a walking tour of the area, along with the entrance ticket for the Churchill War Rooms. 

Nighttime activity

We personally liked a night tour of London City. This tour is all of 1.50 hours, and it was amazing to see the various landmarks under the night lights. Here is a ticket to book

If you are not interested in a night tour, walk to Chinatown (20 minutes) for dinner!

Day 3 of 4 day London itinerary: Day of museums (Natural History Museum, Victoria and Albert Museum), Oxford Street, Piccadilly Circus, Leicester Square

On day three of the London itinerary, start with some museum hopping and then go shopping in the evening. 

If you are not into shopping, you will still love to walk through various neighborhoods and find spots and hidden gems for photos, and places to eat.

Explore some of the finest museums in London, as they are free! These museums are also located pretty close to each other and can be reached on foot. 

Natural History Museum

Start with the Natural History Museum, which is one of the must-see attractions in London. It’s free to enter, so there’s no excuse not to go! 

The museum is home to over 80 million specimens, including dinosaurs, animals, rocks, and minerals. You could easily spend a whole day here, but if you only have 4 days in London, make sure to at least see the dinosaurs!

Victoria and Albert Museum

If you’re a fan of art, history, or simply beautiful architecture, then a visit to the Victoria and Albert Museum is a must during your time in London. 

Founded in 1852, the museum is home to over 2 million objects from a range of different cultures and periods, making it one of the largest collections in the world. 

Victoria and Albert Museum is United Kingdom’s popular art museum, with one of the world’s most comprehensive and significant collections of Chinese art, as well as one of the West’s largest. 

The collection of South Asian Art here is the most important in the Western world. The scope of coverage includes items from South and South East Asia, Himalayan Kingdoms, China, and more. 

The Victoria and Albert Museum is open every day from 10:00 am to 5:45 pm, with a late opening on Fridays until 10:00 pm. Admission is free, although there may be charges for special exhibitions.

After museums, we stopped at a cute and Instagrammable cafe – EL&N. It is all pretty in pink, and they serve brunch, light lunch, and coffee! The nearest tube is South Kensington. 

You can spend time shopping here, or make your way to Piccadilly Circus and then Leicester Square.

Piccadilly Circus

Piccadilly Circus, a vibrant square is always buzzing with activity, day or night. You can catch a show at the world-famous theater, do some shopping at one of the many nearby stores, or just hang out. 

No matter what you do, you’re sure to have a great time at Piccadilly Circus! 

Leicester Square

A short walk from Piccadilly is Leicester Square, the area noted for movie premiers in London. It is not only known for its theatre shows, but also for food joints and shopping. 

This area is also close to Chinatown and Covent Garden (see London is very walkable), but you can take your pick for dining! 

When you walk 5 to 7 minutes from Leicester Square you will be at the Apple Market in Covent Garden, and here you will also find lots of cool bars and restaurants for dinner. 

More shopping

If you’re looking for some retail therapy, Oxford Street is the place to be. This busy shopping street is home to all the major retailers, as well as plenty of smaller shops and boutiques. 

Day 4: Imperial War Museum, Tower Bridge, Tower of London, Afternoon Tea Cruise, Sky Garden, Dinner at an old English pub

Spend your last day in London at the iconic Tower of London. In the afternoon, take a cruise down the River Thames with an afternoon tea. To round off your trip, enjoy dinner and drinks in Soho or at an old English pub near your hotel!

Imperial War Museum

As you make your way to the Tower of London (from Victoria), you will pass the Imperial War Museum. We enjoyed our stop here. 

It is a free museum and has permanent exhibitions from the World Wars and other present-day conflict exhibits. 

We spend a lot of time at the Holocaust Galleries and highly recommend it. 

Borough Market

If you are not interested in a museum, consider a stop at the Borough Market before arriving at the Tower of London. 

London’s most renowned food market, Borough Market is a must-visit for any foodie. With over 100 stalls selling everything from fresh produce to artisan cheese and meats, you’ll be spoilt for choice. 

Be sure to try some of the delicious street food on offer too – the chorizo burgers are a personal favorite!

Tower Bridge

From the Borough Market, it is a short walk to Tower Bridge (15 minutes). You must walk across the bridge for getting nice pictures and views of HMS Belfast, once a WWII ship now converted into a museum. 

There are a lot of places to take photos of the Bridge – from either side of the river, near the Shard, outside where cruises leave, or from the Tower of London entrance areas. 

Note that you can access the top of the Tower Bridge, and even walk on the glass floor and enjoy an exhibition after. These exhibits will provide an insight into the fascinating history of this impressive structure. 

Tower Bridge and London Bridge are two different entities. There are a few bridges in London known as the ‘London Bridge’, but they aren’t very spectacular like the Tower Bridge and many visitors confuse between the two. 

When you see pictures of a gorgeous bridge with blue guardrails that is massive and iconic – then that is the Tower Bridge, which we are referring to here!

Tower of London

Near the bridge is the Tower of London, the place where many infamous prisoners were publicly executed. Also home to the Crown Jewels and a vast variety of other gemstones, this is a must visit fortress on any London itinerary . 

Remember to book tickets in advance, (included in the London Pass ) and keep at least two hours to see all the main sights. 

Try to get all the sightseeing done before 3:00 pm so that you can enjoy a lovely cruise after. 

Afternoon tea cruise on River Thames

We really enjoyed our afternoon tea cruise on River Thames. It was a great way to check out all the city highlights from the Big Ben, the Houses of Parliament, St Paul’s Cathedral, and more with cups of tea, scones, sandwiches, and desserts!

You can book a spot online here . The tour lasts 2 hours, and you can access the meeting point at the Lower Pier by the Tower of London. 

Another fast and cheap alternative option is to opt for a Thames River Cruise only (without afternoon tea). This is operated by the same company as above, but it is a budget option. 

You can also take advantage of hop-on and hop-off river services to see more places along the river on your way to/from the Tower. 

A ten minute walk from the Tower will bring you to Sky Garden, which offers epic views of the city similar to the London Eye, but from the opposite side of the Thames. 

Entry is free but you have to book a slot beforehand. 

We found the drinks fairly costly here, but considering the ambiance, it was worth it. Try and get here by sunset to watch the skyline turning into gold.

In the evening, enjoy a traditional English dinner at a pub or restaurant. We opted to stay closer to our accommodation in London Victoria and dined at the Marquis of Westminster. 

We order fish and chips with a chilled pint of beer and absolutely loved the ambiance here. This English pub dates back to the year 1839 when it was established as a corner house. 

The restaurant has four fabulous red telephone boxes opposite it – perfect for photos!

London 4 day itinerary sightseeing Map

More things to add to your London itinerary 4 days

We tried to add a mix of history, museums, shopping, and a fulfilled city break to London in this itinerary. However, there is still a lot that you can do in London. We have compiled a list of attractions, especially musuems which you can swap for any of the activities above,

Tate Modern London

If you’re looking for something a little different, check out the Tate Modern – it’s a modern art museum with some really interesting pieces. 

This is a free attraction and can be best explored when you are on the south bank of the River Thames (it is a 3-minute walk from Shakespeare’s Globe and Millennium Bridge).

British Museum 

If you’re looking for a bit of culture, the British Museum is a must-see. One of the largest museums in the world, it houses a vast collection of artifacts from all over the globe. 

From Egyptian mummies to Roman coins, there’s something for everyone at the British Museum. This museum is also free to explore, and we recommend planning a visit in the morning to beat the rush. 

If you are following this itinerary, swap one of the museums on day 3 of the London travel itinerary to make room for this attraction.  

St Paul’s Cathedral

We saw the St Paul’s Cathedral on one of our walks in London. It is one of the most iconic landmarks and is definitely worth a visit for epic photos. 

St Paul’s Cathedral boasts of one of the biggest domes in the world at 366 feet high. You can walk up the steps to reach the top of the cathedral for panoramic views whilst checking out the stunning architecture.  

This is where the wedding of Prince Charles and Diana took place. You can book an entry ticket here .

Notting Hill

Noting Hill is one of the most popular tourist destinations in London. A lot of people come here to see the famous Notting Hill Carnival, which is held every August. 

If you’re not visiting for the carnival, you can still enjoy the area’s vibrant atmosphere and stunning architecture by strolling through its charming streets.

In addition to being a great place to people-watch, Notting Hill is home to some of London’s best markets. Portobello Road Market is the most famous, but if you’re looking for something a bit more low-key, try Spitalfields Market or Camden Lock Market.

Wandering Notting Hill is perfect from South Kensington – in the late afternoon or evening for dining and shopping!

Camden Market

If you’re looking for a more alternative market experience, Camden Market is a good option. This vibrant market is full of unique stalls selling everything from vintage clothes to handmade jewelry. There’s also a great selection of street food on offer, so you can refuel after a day of shopping. 

This is a great afternoon or evening activity to add to your London itinerary. 

Old Spitalfields Market

If you want to get a feel for the local London scene, then make your way to Old Spitalfields Market. This is one of the city’s most popular markets, attracting locals and tourists alike.

It is a covered market in Spitalfields, located just outside of the City of London. This market has been on the site for over 350 years.

You’ll find everything from fresh produce to vintage clothes, so there’s something for everyone. Make sure to try some of the delicious food when you are there.

Day trips from London England 

Planning to extend your visit, or swap one of the 4 days in London to include a day trip? Great choice! 

London is one city that deserves to be visited often to actually feel its pulse and discover all the attractions. 

You can surely take a break from the hustle and bustle of the city and venture on a day trip of your choice (we did too. Actually we stayed in England for over a week, and included day tours from London). 

Here are some of the options,

Windsor Castle: 

Windsor Castle, with its 700-year history as the official residence of the Queen and home to the royals for more than 900 years, is a stunning example of medieval architecture. 

The castle is a major tourist attraction, from seeing the magnificent cabins and vast castle property. 

You can take the train from Waterloo station, which takes around one hour to reach Windsor station. Admission tickets should be booked online , for those who do not have the London Pass. 

Harry Potter Studio Tour: 

Even if you are not a Harry Potter fan, you should find time to take this studio, especially if you are traveling with kids. These tours last anywhere from 7 to 11 hours and include round-trip transportation. 

This experience gives you an insight into Harry Potter filming. So if movies are your interest, then the special visual effects section will showcase the incredible Potter film location of the Forbidden Forest among others. 

The best way to get to the studio is by taking a bus tour from either Victoria Station or King’s Cross.

Tours for Harry Potter fans

• Ticket to Warner Bros Studio with Transfer : Book here
• Harry Potter Studio Tour and Oxford Day Trip (full day): Book here
• Harry Potter Walking Tour with Platform 9 ¾ (3 hours): Book here
• Harry Potter London Walking Tour: Book here

If you’re looking to get outside of London for a day, Stonehenge should definitely be on your list. This prehistoric monument is about 2 hours away from the city and is one of the most famous sites in all of England. 

Built over 5000 years ago, the architectural marvel of Stonehenge was on top of our England bucket list. It is a UNESCO World Heritage site today, and pretty popular with tourists of all ages.

Not that you can’t go inside the stone circle, but you can walk around it and learn about its history. 

Trust us, it’s definitely worth the trip! We booked a half-day tour and it was absolutely enjoyed it.

Another day trip option from London is the city of Bath. This picturesque city is home to the Roman Baths, which are well-preserved Roman ruins that you can actually go inside and explore. 

There’s also a lovely Abbey and plenty of cute shops and cafes. Bath is the perfect place to spend a day if you’re looking to relax and soak up some British history.

The Cotswolds

For something a bit more rural, head to the Cotswolds. This area of England is known for its rolling hills, cute villages, and quaint country pubs. 

It’s the perfect place to go for a day of hiking or biking, and you’re sure to find plenty of photo-worthy spots along the way. 

The Cotswolds is also home to some great castles and gardens, so there’s plenty to see and do. You can also book a full-day tour that combines a few villages stop.

White Cliffs of Dover

The best spot to see some of the impressive white Cliffs of the Southern Coast of England are from Dover. 

They are easy to explore on a day tour that combines a few more stops along the way to make the most of your England trip! 

This one includes the White Cliffs of Dover and Canterbury on a guided day tour.

More London Travel Tips

To further help with your London trip planning, here are some additional tips to make your visit more enjoyable. 

Wear comfortable walking shoes and walk as much as possible : Despite the excellent public transport system, London is actually a great walking city. We walked a ton (30k steps every day) and LOVED it.

Tons of cute cafes, historic sites, and neighborhoods allowed us to break without being tired or bored. 

Exploring Victoria and the city of London was like a self guided walking tour for us, and were able to cover a lot of places in a short period of time!

Coaches are not bad: Coaches in London were actually very convenient to get to the airports and back, and affordable too (as compared to Express trains). Plus you can enjoy the views outside! 

UK is not a part of the EU, and Schengen Visa won’t work: If you require a tourist visa to visit London, then know that the usual Schengen Visa for Europe won’t work. You will need to apply for a separate/different travel visa prior to your arrival.

Passport holders from the USA and Canada do not need a visa and can stay there for up to 6 months. 

The United Kingdom is no longer an EU member, so Euros won’t work here either. Ensure you carry pounds (or exchange for them).

Credit cards are widely accepted and are preferred over cash in many places like restaurants, tour buses, etc. 

Take insurance : If you want your London trip to be perfect, do apply for travel insurance to protect you from any untoward incident or any potential risk associated with it, including medical emergencies. This is a requirement for visa purposes. 

Download travel apps: Download some of these handy apps prior to your London trip. Such as The London Pass App (sightseeing), Google Maps app (save our map from this itinerary), Citymapper (transport system), XE (for currency exchange), etc.

Budget for 4 day London trip

London can be an expensive trip if you don’t plan it right. It is possible to experience the best of what London has to offer by allotting a budget for accommodation and flights first and then getting a transportation savings card.

If you are planning on staying in a hostel, you can surely save money. Hostel dorms can be reserved for one around $35 USD. 

Hotel accommodation is definitely expensive in central London, or in areas close to popular attractions.

When we were researching hotels (we stay in 3-4 star properties) we found that the City of London properties were in the range of $250 to $500 USD. 

Victoria London had a ton of options in the $150 to $280 USD and that’s what we went for.  

These were 3 star properties with clean rooms, sort of standard accommodation, but walkable to attractions in Westminster and transportation (both coach and train stations were nearby). 

When it comes to food, you can surely splurge in cute cafes or pubs. But can also get groceries or eat in fast-food restaurants (pick healthy choices like salad, etc.). 

Set aside $50 to $100 USD per person when eating out all day.

Transportation can be as low as $40 USD set aside just for getting in and from the airport and then walking to various attractions (as long as you choose a centrally located hotel). 

With airport transfers and everyday rides, you will be averaging $15 to $20 USD per day. 

There are a lot of free things to do in London, particularly the Royal Parks and museums. 

Visiting Staterooms in various palaces and access to them with a tour guide will cost anywhere from $30 to $80 USD per person. 

In this case, getting a London Pass will be beneficial as you can get savings on transport and free/discounted entrance tickets to attractions.

So, all in all, for those on a budget it will cost between $65 to $100 per day depending upon the neighborhood you choose to stay in and where you eat. 

If you want a room upgrade + attractions tickets, add another $50 to $120 to your budget (can be saved with the London Pass).

Safety in London

London is relatively a safe city. Being a popular tourist destination and with many sad/negative recent events, we made sure to be aware of our surroundings and avoided crowded areas. 

Scams and pickpocketing incidents are common in London attractions, so do keep your personal belongings – cell phone, money, and cameras close to you. 

When someone asks you for a passport or any ID, always check to confirm that it is a real official – and not bogus police or border security personnel. 

The overall safety risk is low, but we recommend checking your government advisory for travel (against threats, terrorist events, etc.). 

Also, be careful when using public transit for pickpockets. 

In spite of the warnings, we felt safe walking around London – night or day. As a female traveler, I felt safe, and I think London is a nice solo travel destination – full of culture, shopping, reliable metro, and a plethora of tours to choose from (in case you are lonely)!

Lastly, be careful when you cross roads in London. We are so used to the way traffic moves here in Canada, but in London, the traffic moves very fast, and so do pedestrians. 

We are told that traffic accidents are common here, and caution should be the key while crossing the roads or driving.

At a minimum, you do need 3 days in London . That is 3 full days. On our first trip to London, we had 3 days and we utilized it to check out all timed attractions (musuems and cruises).  In the early morning and evening hours, we checked out various neighborhoods and shopping areas, parks, and London spots meant for outdoor pleasures!  With four days in London , you can go easily and cover the most important sites (important as per you). If you are in London for more than 3 or 4 days and taking day trips – you can surely explore markets and parks in the evenings. The city actually never sleeps so definitely utilize all the time you get! Prior to our trip, we had a long list of things to do in London (not including day trips) and felt that we needed 5 days to comfortably explore all the museums.  We had to skip a few museums on our first trip but made up by utilizing the evenings in London after our day tours.

Probably not, but it’s a good start. Try to add a mix of popular attractions, shopping, and some wandering in various neighborhoods.  When it comes to intimate sightseeing, choose museums and tours that appeal to you, instead of trying to see it all! London is one city, which requires repeat visits to explore all that it has to offer.

We hope you enjoyed our London itinerary and found it useful to plan your trip!

London is a city that has something for everyone. If you’re looking for a world-class museum experience, historical landmarks, or a vibrant theater and nightlife scene, you can find it all in London. 

The city is also home to some of the best shopping in the world. With four days in London, you’ll have plenty of time to check out numerous attractions and highlights. 

If you liked this post, read our UK and Europe travel guides below,

• London virtual tours
• Europe itinerary 2 weeks

Pin: 4 day London itinerary and guide

Mayuri is the founder & editor of ToSomePlaceNew. An Indian-Canadian globetrotter, she has traveled to over 100 cities and 35+ countries. Mayuri has a graduate degree in History and is an MBA. She loves traveling the world, capturing historical nuances, and discussing that over a cup of coffee with her husband, Salil. She currently resides in Edmonton, Canada, and plots travel plans to Europe, the Americas, and beyond. 

Similar Posts

Epic Iceland Itinerary 5 days (+5 samples)

Iceland is a country of many wonders. From the massive glaciers and black sand beaches to the powerful waterfalls, there is much to explore in this beautiful country. You can enjoy a variety of activities, such as hiking, sightseeing, and even geothermal baths. So here’s an epic Iceland itinerary 5 days to make the most…

Best Playa del Carmen Itinerary 4 – 5 days

Playa del Carmen is a stunning coastal resort town located in the Riviera Maya, Mexico. Mexico is known for its white-sand beaches, warm weather, and wonderful hospitality. The capital of Mexico is Mexico City, and it’s also one of the most populous cities in the world. Mexico’s rich history pulled us towards it and we…

One day in Tulum Itinerary: Ruinas de Tulum Playa del Carmen (Tulum Ruins Tour)

Our one day in Tulum itinerary began from Playa del Carmen, but you can use this Tulum guide to explore highlights from Tulum itself or Cancun. We have also included Tulum Ruins tour options, to explore this beautiful Mayan site in Mexico. This in-depth guide on the Ruinas de Tulum Playa del Carmen (Tulum ruins…

Belfast vs Dublin: Should you visit Dublin or Belfast

Embarking on a journey to Ireland and finding yourself torn between the vibrant cities of Dublin and Belfast? Don’t worry, you’re not alone. We will share our top tips that will help you choose if you should visit Dublin or Belfast.  Knowing that both cities are brimming with rich history, culture, and unique experiences, stand…

3 Days in Porto Itinerary: From Port wine to epic views

If you’re looking for a beautiful European city to visit that isn’t overrun with tourists, Porto is the perfect place for you. This charming city in Portugal’s north has everything you could want on a trip, from stunning architecture to delicious food and wine. And best of all, this 3 days in Porto itinerary covers…

One Day in Budapest Itinerary: See Budapest in a day

One of the stunning European cities, Budapest has been attracting travelers for decades. The capital city of Hungary is laced with tons of history, UNESCO heritage sites, and ruin bars; it is also gastronomic heaven! Here’s the perfect one day in Budapest itinerary and how to make the most of your time! One Day in…

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

• NEW: Submit your Testimonial

4 Days London Itinerary to have a perfect Trip (without rushing it)

After how many visits can you authoritatively claim that you have seen the better part of London?

Well, anything from 4 days will be a good starting point, although you may have to come back over and over again in order to tour the city inside out. You need time to see its iconic infrastructure, tourist attraction sites, ethnic eateries, and beautiful and diverse neighborhoods.

If you have the time and resources, staying in London for a week or even a month would be okay.

But because we understand that this may not always be possible, let’s look at the bare minimum: 4 days.

Read this guide to where to stay in London . It will help you pick the right accommodation based on your budget and preferred location.

What can you do in London within 4 days in order to have the perfect trip?

For the purposes of this itinerary, we will assume that you arrived in London yesterday and that our first day will start right from when you wake up.

If you are planning to spend the trip on a low budget, exploring the city on foot is ideal. However, initially, you should start off by booking a great hostel.

The top hostels in London are:

• Hostel One Notting Hill  – best for backpackers
• Destinations Hostels @ The Gallery  – best for a very British atmosphere
• Wombats City Hostel London  – best for solo-travelers

Read: full guide to 3 best hostels in London

We highly advise that you explore most of the city on foot by taking advantage of the free walking tours , as they provide a better opportunity to get closer to the real city culture. You can also find unique tours in London with Walks of Italy and Airbnb Experience .

Now let’s get to the real experience you can get for 4 days in London.

Day 1: The City of London

Starting from the St. Paul tube station, you will be able to see most of London City on your first day.

You will need to be at the station by at least eight in the morning so that you can enter St. Paul Cathedral when it opens at 9.30am.

In there, you will see the Duke of Wellington monument, the Stone and the Golden galleries, and other key chapels.

After like an hour in the cathedral, take your leave and head to the Tower of London where you will see the Millennium Bridge where the legendary Harry Potter movie was filmed.

Before noon, you should be fully acquainted with British history at the Tower of London, cross over to the Tower Bridge where you will take the best pictures of the city, and enjoy watching the Crown Jewels.

You are just in time for lunch at Borough Market, London’s biggest food market.

All the traditional and multicultural foods are found here.

After your lunch head out to Covent Garden for some live street performances, Hyde Park for leisure walks and some boating, and the West Yard for your dinner.

Day 2: The Museums

Start your itinerary at the Museum of Natural History, Victoria and Albert Museum, and British Museum.

Did you know that Natural History and the British Museum are totally free?

It is incredible how much will learn in regards to the history of mankind, the animal kingdom, and space exploration. You will also have the chance to enjoy some British breakfast at the Museum of Natural History café.

By the time you are done with the two museums, it will be lunchtime or thereabout.

If you are planning not to spend so much on this trip, there are several options for you. Try out the ethnic food, which involves kebab shops, whereby you can eat and have a drink for no more than $10.

Additionally, if you have booked a hostel with a kitchen, preparing something for yourself on the go would save you quite some money.

Get some food as you prepare for some afternoon shopping at Carnaby or Oxford Street.

You will then close your day by having a cool dinner at Opium Dim Sum.

Day 3: Indulge in British Royalty

Start your day at the Buckingham Palace, the home to British royalty for over 170 years and the home to the current Queen of England, Queen Elizabeth II.

Be there by 10.30am in order to witness the changing of the guard ceremony at 10.45.

If you are visiting during the summer, you will be allowed to book a ticket into the 775 royal rooms. However, you can also gaze it from outside and enjoy the guard ceremony and save up your money.

Before heading for lunch, you can take a stroll in the very beautiful St. James Park, visit the 1000-year old Westminster Abbey, ride the London Eye, and cross over to the Westminster Bridge for some photos.

It is now time for lunch and some afternoon tea at Wallace, the cheapest joint in the neighborhood but with impeccable foods.

More the coffee type? Find here 10 cute coffee shops in London .

After that, you can choose to try some London Pubs or take an afternoon tea river cruise .

Day 4: A Tour to the Outskirts

We made it to day 4 on our London itinerary. London boasts of suburbs that would easily pass as smaller cities.

Start your day in one of these small cities- Greenwich- and enjoy the many amenities it has to offer. It has parks, pubs, and restaurants that aren’t as crowded as those in the city.

Here, you will learn everything about the Meridian line and how it affects time all over the world.

You will also enjoy some time in the Cutty Sark and the east and west hemispheres.

For your lunch, try the local delicacies in one of the Meridian restaurants.

After lunch, you can opt to take a bus to the Chislehurst to see the Chislehurst Caves or go ice skating, or scale the O2 concert arena.

Bottom line

London has too much to offer. With time and a flexible budget, you will have too much to do within four days. And who knows, you can even choose to extend to a 5th or 6th day, or more.

BONUS TIP: THE BEST MARKET

Don’t forget to visit during your stay the best market in London: Borough Market

I spent my first few months in London going to every market I could.

There are a ton of them, and they range from:

• the touristy: Spitalfields, Camden
• the not-so-touristy: Petticoat Lane)
• the posh: Portobello
• the uber-posh Greenwich

They are all worth going to.

But Borough Market is the best, and the most deserving of your repeat business. The reason is that the food at Borough Market is insanely good, and, for a market that’s literally under railroad tracks, it’s surprisingly beautiful.

It also fits nicely into our perfect one-day walking tour of London.

Budgeting your 4 days London Itinerary

One of the greatest trouble is choosing the right monetization for daily spending.

According to research, the average daily spent by real travellers in London is 90£ .

This reflects what everyday travelers tend to spend in the city of London:

• Eating Out: £40
• Entertainment (bars, tours & attractions): £28 per day
• Transport: £13 per day
• Shopping: £40 (but you wouldn’t go shopping every day)

This puts the average cost of a trip to London for a week at around £500-650.

We haven’t gone high-end and we haven’t gone “living-on-a-shoestring” either. Think, most of the major attractions, a few cab rides, maybe a big night out, and a bit of shopping on the side.

Those numbers don’t include the cost of accommodation or car hire as these are often booked in advance.

On our proposed itinerary, we dropped that daily budget!

With some tips for transport and taking advantage of the free museums and attractions, you could

Travel on a budget and in style for £40

Of course, this budget might increase if you add more activities.

London would be nothing without its attractions: bars, museums etc.

Most travellers coming to the capital tend to gravitate to the center of town for their entertainment fix.

It’s worth remembering that whilst the West End (Soho) has a great buzz, places like Angel, Notting Hill, Camden, and Dalston are great alternatives with tons of great bars, fringe theater, and other things going on.

For example:

• The London Eye (at Airbnb Experience ): £27
• Sherlock Holmes Experience : £12
• British Museum: Free
• Southbank Centre: Free
• The Comedy Store, Leicester Square: £17
• Evensong at St Paul’s Cathedral: Free
• West End Show: prices vary

Tips for visiting London on a budget

Decide what time of year to visit london.

London weather can be quite unpredictable. Londoners are known to regularly carry sunglasses and umbrellas throughout the year.

But London weather is never so extreme as to detract from all the great things to do in the city, and the major attractions are not seasonal.

The city sees a large increase in visitors in July and August (the hottest time of the year, usually). The shoulder seasons (outside the main school holidays in spring/fall) can be a great time to visit if you’re looking to avoid the crowds.

There are school holidays in February, Easter, August, October, and at Christmas.

Travel Document Requirements for London

All overseas visitors will need a passport when traveling to London and some visitors will need a visa. US citizens are encouraged to register any overseas travel with the US Department of State.

Arriving in London

You can get to London by air, rail, road, or ferry.

Obviously, where you are traveling from and how much time you have will influence your transport options.

Need a flight?

Check out our latest booking flight hack and score the best prices.

Public transportation

Public transportation is great. The prices are fairly reasonable for buses and the tube. Just remember that there is NO cash on buses!

An Oyster Card is your best bet and could save you up to 50% when compared to a single ticket. The daily cost maximum is £4.40 per day if you’re only using buses and trams AND use the same card for payment each time.

If you were using single tickets or multiple forms of payment, you wouldn’t benefit from this daily maximum.

You could also use a contactless card, but read the guidelines for this option first to ensure your credit card qualifies.

Not only are there peak times of the year to travel to London, there are also peak times of the day to travel within London on public transport.

Peak times are Monday to Friday from 6:30am to 9:30 am and from 4pm to 7pm. If you use public transport to travel outside of these times, you’ll save as the off-peak rate is much cheaper.

Cars drive on the left so make sure to look the appropriate way when crossing the street!

We also don’t suggest trying to drive in London. Driving outside of the city is fine, just avoid London if possible.

A bonus tip to save money and get fast entry access into attractions is to purchase the London Pass .

It’s an all-inclusive sightseeing card, that grants pass holders free entry to the top London attractions.

There are 5 duration to choose from (1, 2, 3, 6 & 10 days) and pass holders can enter as many of the tourist attractions included on the pass that they wish to, without paying.

The key benefits of The London Pass are:

• Free entry to 60+ attractions (including Tower of London, Kensington Palace, Westminster Abbey…)
• Fast track entry to popular attractions
• Free hop on hop off bus tour
• Added Oyster Travelcard option
• Free 160+ page guidebook
• Money back guarantee
• Additional special offers

There is never a good reason to take a cab

The Underground is really easy to navigate, and if it’s late, you can just take the buses.

Buses might be hard to navigate sometimes, and it can be a pain if you’re going from, say, Brockley to Liverpool Street Station while drunk at five in the morning and have to transfer twice, but they are a tenth as expensive as cabs, and the top of a double-decker is actually a pretty great way to watch the sunrise over the London skyline.

Things to know before visiting London

Know the lingo.

Yes, the Brits speak English, but all countries have their own slang and unique terms.

Let’s make an example:

Money – You will usually hear the British say “pee” rather than pence, as in 25p (25 pee). You might also hear a pound referred to as a “quid”, a five pound note as a “fiver” & a ten pound note as a “tenner”.

A few more terms that you have likely heard but are worth noting:

• Loo = bathroom (toilet is also acceptable)
• Cheers = thanks
• Lift = elevator
• Queue = line
• Bin = trash
• Boot = trunk (used in the context of a car)
• Fag = cigarette
• Cashpoint = ATM
• Trainers = tennis shoes
• Zebra Crossing = Pedestrian Crossing
• Chemist = Drug Store
• Biscuit = cookie
• Chips = french fries
• Crisps = chips
• Ground floor = first floor
• Petrol = Gas

Football games

Yes, our 4 day London itinerary covers this as well: Go to a football game, even if you don’t give a crap about football

The songs they sing alone make the experience worth it.

It is not like any sporting event I’ve gone to in the US.

And seeing soccer players up close may actually give you some appreciation for the huge amount of athleticism and skill you need to play the beautiful game.

Secret bars in Shoreditch

Shoreditch is one of London’s trendiest neighbourhoods.

Filled with an array of amazing bars, secret hangouts and hidden clubs, this place is the perfect place to visit for a night out.

Take a wander and discover this unique bars that are often hidden from view… or even need a password to gain entry!

Currency – Pounds or EUR?

London’s official currency is the British pound.

As for tipping, some restaurants and cafes may add a service charge to the bill, upward of 12 percent. If a service charge is not allotted, it’s customary to tip between 10 and 15 percent, especially if you’re in a restaurant.

If you’re drinking at a pub or wine bar, tipping is discretionary.

And in a cab, tip the driver to the nearest pound or about 10 percent of the cost.

Major credit cards are accepted at most restaurants and shops.

London is generally a very safe city; however, travelers should take note of several safety tips:

• Official cabs

The U.S. State Department advises tourists to only use London’s licensed black cabs. Unlicensed cab companies and private cars posing as taxis have been known to rip off, mug, or even sexually assault customers. To be safe, travelers should call the taxi company and hire a car directly (hotels can help arrange transportation as well).

• Pickpockets

Travelers should also be wary of pickpockets.

Like any big city, London has pickpockets. They always tend to target tourists on the Tube or at popular attractions like nearby the Big Ben tower.

Culture & Customs

Aside from a few select phrases and words, Americans find the city accessible because of London’s official English language.

British people are very polite and quite friendly to tourists, so don’t be afraid to ask for directions if you’re lost.

More often than not Londoners are happy to point you in the right direction, or even offer a recommendation about their city.

But keep in mind that the British like order.

There is no better example than how you are expected to behave on the Tube (London’s subway). Make sure to stand to the right when going up or down escalators.

The other side to the Brits, especially among the young adults, is their penchant for drinking.

Unlike coffee shops in the U.S., pubs are the prime watering hole for the Brits.

Most pubs serve meals and are open the majority of the day, so don’t be alarmed if you see people walking in with young children.

Once 5 o’clock rolls around, the hunger for a post-work pick me up is rampant in London, and pubs, as well as bars, tend to fill up throughout the week. Expect to see hordes of people congregating outside pubs in the warmer months and some stumbling out nightly at around 9 p.m.

Also, since London is one of the fashion capitals of the world, you’ll see locals dressed to the nines throughout the city but especially around Oxford Street, where many fashion houses and publications are located.

If you ever wanted to go the extra mile with your style game, London is the place to do it.

Day trips from London

One of the best things about London is how easy it is to leave London.

I love London to death, but I wish I’d known earlier just how many cool things are within a short train ride of London.

Brighton, a truly beautiful seaside town, is only an hour away by train.

Cute, extremely British towns like Windsor and Henley-on-Thames are a short train ride away.

Even doing a quick overnight in Edinburgh is extremely doable (though to be honest, you’ll want to spend more than a day there).

The UK is much easier to travel around than the United States, and, if I could do it all over again, I would’ve skipped spending another day on the South Bank of the Thames, and would’ve gone out and explored more of the country.

Summary 4 days in London Itinerary

So, enough ideas and information for your perfect 4 days London itinerary? Obviously, you can stretch these 4 days as well to 5 or even 7 days in London. We hope so as we gave you really good ones in this article.

Still need some additional information?

Check our articles about London:

• Best hostels in London
• 62 Free things to do in London
• 31 Fun things to do in London

Also, if you are looking to splurge in London, what about staying in a cute boutique hotel in London ?

That might increase your daily budget, but we gave you many ideas to save money…

Safe travels, The Hostelgeeks

– – – pin it now, read it later

We are 100% Independent: Some links on Hostelgeeks are so-called affiliate links. If you decide to book through these links, we earn a small commission at no extra cost to you . Your support allows us to keep producing high-quality, independent content free of influence from hostels or external advertisers. Learn more here . 🙏

✏️ Read our Editorial Guidelines

I recommend spending three to four days in London, especially if it is your first time there. There is so much to do and see that it can be exhausting, so I recommend adding one more day to your itinerary than you think you will need. Three to four days in London should be enough time to see most of the major attractions. Summer is a pleasant time to visit London, with a mix of rain and sunshine. Temperatures range from 13 to 30 degrees Celsius. This is an ideal time to visit London, go sightseeing, and enjoy many music festivals as well as outdoor attractions such as its beautiful parks, gardens, and rooftop bars.

Thanks for this additional info, Travel Pro! Absolutely agree!

Safe travels, Matt

This is indeed the perfect trip! I will definitely use your tips for my upcoming trip to London. Thank you for sharing!

Leave a Reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Send me the smartest newsletter from Hostelgeeks.

• Search for:
• The Caribbean
• South Carolina
• Eastern Europe
• Switzerland
• The Netherlands
• Travel Anxiety
• Fear of Flying
• SOLO FEMALE TRAVEL
• PRIVACY POLICY

Travel Itineraries , Europe , Travel Destinations , Travel Tips

4 days in london itinerary: the best things to do in lovely ldn.

FMTC Affiliate Disclosure: Blond Wayfarer contains affiliate links. If you make a purchase through these links, I earn a commission at no extra cost to you. This disclosure pertains to all affiliate links.

London is one of my favorite cities in the entire world. Actually, London is one of my favorite destinations period. I love busy cities. As a solo traveler, nothing makes me happier than melting into the crowd and not standing out like a sore thumb.

And London? Is huge. Absolutely huge.

As a traveler, this is wonderful news if you don’t want to constantly change hotels or locations. You can easily spend two weeks in London, and feel like you’re barely scratching the surface of this remarkable metropolis. 

So, obviously, London is perfect for travelers who want a classic “big city” experience. I think I’ve made that very clear, haha. At the same time, though, it’s easy to find small neighborhoods that you make you feel as if you’re outside the bustle of London.

However, one of the most difficult things about travel to London is that there is TOO much to see and do on any single trip. It was actually pretty hard for me to write this 4 Days in London Itinerary without making it impractical (re: too busy) to follow. You need to make compromises. 

Table of Contents

My TOP Tip for Four Days in London

Don’t, don’t, don’t plan a million activities each and every day, and then try to schedule each second of your trip once you’re on the ground. I, uh, was guilty of this error.

Which is understandable! I was so excited to come back to London that I felt as if I had to do as much as possible.

I broke my own travel rules, which is always allow a little of bit of leisurely time. Honestly, I tried to accomplish WAY too much on my most recent trip to London. My busiest day consisted of 36,000 steps, and I didn’t arrive back at the hotel til nearly 9 in the evening. 

… I had an amazing day, of course, but my feet absolutely hated me. I was exhausted. And I wish I had more time to simply explore, you know?

Don’t make my mistake, friends.

Instead dream of the future. London is a place that you have to tell yourself that you’ll visit again. Otherwise, you’ll overexert yourself.

I truly want you to avoid making my mistakes, hence I decided to write this 4 Days in London Itinerary to give you a rough idea on what’s reasonable to accomplish in London within that timeframe. 

Let’s talk about it.

London Travel Tips

Without a doubt, London is a dream trip for many people. London is also expensive. Seriously, my credit cards aren’t a big fan of London, even though I adore this city. 

Since you’ll spend money, you want to do whatever possible to make your 4 days in London a magical experience. In addition to not over-planning and rushing all over this enormous city, you’ll want to take care with your packing and public transportation skills.

Best Time to Visit London

As a big city, London is a great destination to visit anytime of the year. Of course, summer promises the very best weather, although you’re still probably going to experience some rain. This is  England, after all.

Summer is also “high season,” so you’ll want to book hotels and activities well in advance. For example, I visited London in August, and bought tickets ahead of time for Westminster Abbey. No joke, they were completely sold out on that day, so anyone who wanted to purchase tickets in person was out of luck.

The weeks leading up to Christmas is another popular time to visit London. This city is absolutely gorgeous at Christmas time, and will allow you to fully embrace the holiday spirit. Keep in mind, though, that London absolutely shuts down on Christmas Day and Boxing Day, so even though December is gorgeous, I don’t necessarily think the holidays themselves are the best time to travel.

All in all, though, I don’t think any season is bad. I would even go to London in the dead of winter when it is dark and bleak outside. 

Don’t let the season discourage you from a trip to London. You can honestly come whenever you want, and still have a fantastic time. Even in rain and snow, London has soooo many wonderful indoor attractions, such as massive free museums, to keep you occupied and happy.

Getting Around London

London has an extensive public transportation system that you will definitely want to use. Taking taxis everywhere will ruin you. And don’t even think about renting a car either. London isn’t where you want to learn how to drive on the left side of the road.

Ultimately, with 4 days in London, you’ll have to board the Tube to effectively see the best areas of the city. 

The Tube (London’s metro) goes absolutely everywhere. Despite its size, it’s pretty easy to use and each station has maps and stops available. Just remember to stand on the right of the escalator. The left is for travelers who are in a hurry.

Recently, the Tube has gone completely cashless. Of course, you can still buy an Oyster card and “top up” the amount of money as you ride, but the Tube will also let you use Apple Pay to board each and every time. 

Simple, right?

Where to Stay in London

London has such a wide variety of neighborhoods. Where you stay is entirely up to you and your budget. Personally, I love the glamor and elegance of West London, but realize that everyone has different priorities. 

I’ve listed a couple of accommodation ideas in different neighborhoods to help you figure out where to stay.

Accommodation for 4 Days in London

• Andaz London Liverpool Street: I adore Hyatt’s Andaz brand, which is young and hip and boutique-y. You don’t feel as if you’re in a corporate hotel at all. This East London location is the perfect spot for a solo traveler. See prices on Booking.com and Expedia.com.
• The Rockwell:   I stayed here in a single room on my last trip to London and absolutely adored it. It’s affordable and clean, and very close to Earl’s Court Station to easily connect you to other areas in London. See prices on Booking.com and Expedia.com.
• Wombats Hostel London:   This centrally-located budget option is part of a popular hostel chain. Wombats hostels of are high quality, and are perfect for travelers who are looking to socialize with others. See prices on Booking.com and Expedia.com.

What to Pack for 4 Days in London

• Lonely Planet London Guidebook:  A physical guidebook is always a great essential to have on a trip. You can either pack your London guidebook or download pdf copies of relevant chapters.
• Sneakers:  Most people who I encountered in London wore sneakers! Which is perfect since you will do so, so, so much walking. A high quality pair of sneakers will go a long way on your trip here.
• Travel Insurance:  London is very safe for a large international city, but travel insurance is essential. As a non-citizen, you won’t have access to the NHS and will need to pay for your own healthcare if something goes wrong. I use World Nomads for my shorter trips, and think the price and quality of the plan is perfect! 
• Travel Umbrella: You’re in England, so you’ll probably have rainy weather at some point during your stay. I’m not saying London has rain 24/7, but better safe than sorry! Pack a travel umbrella for your 4 days in London.

Quick Glance: 4 Days in London

4 Days in London: Detailed Itinerary and Guide

Time to break down your four days in London.

I really tried my hardest to lump areas of London together (such as East London and Central London), so you’re not spending hours on the Tube. I cannot repeat enough how massive of a city London is. You don’t want to go back and forth if you absolutely don’t need to do so, even if the Tube is efficient and fast! 

Lastly, I also kept a bit of “wiggle room” in this itinerary to allow you to modify it and add your own touches. I understand that we all like different things on our travels. 

Day 1: Westminster and Covent Garden

Welcome to London!

On your first day, you’ll go to Westminster to see some of the greatest sites that the city has to offer its visitors. First, head to Westminster Abbey . It’s a bit expensive to enter, but totally worth the cost of admissions, especially if you’re interested in royal history, as well as literary history. Some of the most famous people in British history are buried here.

Buy your Westminster Abbey tickets in advance, particularly in summer and weekends. Time slots do sell out. Plus you will avoid having to wait in line, and your time in London is valuable. Tickets include audioguides. 

After visiting Westminster Abbey, you will definitely have to snap a picture of London’s iconic Big Ben . Big Ben is such a symbol of London that no matter how many times I see it, the gorgeous clock brings a big smile to my face!

Don’t forget to take pictures of the Houses of Parliament too. Keep in mind that Parliament tours need to be scheduled in advance and are only available at certain times, so do your research! 

While in Westminster, you will also want to make a little time to see a museum. For example, the Churchill War Rooms aren’t too far away, and the perfect spot for World War II history buffs.

Lastly, in Westminster, you can go to Westminster Peer and board a Thames Sightseeing Cruise. London’s central attractions are even prettier from the water, and the boat’s narrator will teach you a lot too. Just make sure to bring a jacket so you don’t get too cold.

Once you’re done sightseeing, Covent Garden is a wonderful area to explore for dinner and shopping. A lot of the shops stay open late (usually 8:00 pm) here.

As for meals, book a reservation if your heart is set on a certain place. Believe it or not, even the bar seating is reserved. So you need to plan ahead. And don’t even try coming here on a Saturday without a reservation. I’m serious.

Day 2: South Kensington, Hyde Park, Buckingham Palace

Are you ready to see more of London’s best museums? We’re going to start our morning in one of my favorite areas of London.

South Kensington is one of the classiest areas in all of London and well-worth exploring. You will also discover some of London’s best free museums. My personal favorite was the Victoria and Albert Museum . This museum focuses on design and art throughout the ages, and you can easily spend hours exploring British design. I especially loved all the old books in this special collection.

You can also visit both the Natural History Museum and Science Museum for free. My advice is to pick one museum based on your interests, and then take your time wandering through all the exhibits. 

After the museums, take time to explore London’s larges green space: Hyde Park.

This historic and royal park is famous for a good reason. You could easily spend an entire day in Hyde Park in beautiful sunny weather. I know that I could. I also loved seeing the swans at The Serpentine Lake.

If you feel up to it, Buckingham Palace isn’t a far Tube ride or walk from the easternmost corner of Hyde Park. Sure, unless you’re traveling in summer and have tickets to go inside the Palace, there isn’t much to do here. You can time your visit for the Changing of the Guard, and while this is a cool and classic London experience, the crowds can also be a bit overwhelming. 

As for the evening, treat yourself to a fun show. For instance, I went to Ronnie Scott’s, which is a world-famous jazz club, and very, very fun (I even recommend going alone). The food is delicious, too, so treat yourself to a solid dinner too.

Day 3: Bloomsbury, Literary London, and Mayfair

Bloomsbury is another amazing area in London that’s well worth exploring. This area of the city is steeped in literary history. However, this area is most well known for the British Museum.

Like South Kensington’s great museums, admission is also free to the museum. While the museum has had its fair share of controversy, if you love museums, then it’s still worth checking out. For example, it’s really cool seeing the Rosetta Stone in person, especially after learning about it in school.

Another possible option is a 20 minute walk away to  the British Library.  Lovers of English literature will not want to miss this stop. This library has a ton of literary treasures on display including a stunning copy of Shakespeare’s First Folio. Like many other attractions, admissions to the British Library is free.

You will also want to see some of the prominent literary attractions in the area. For example, I spent about an hour exploring the Charles Dickens Museum and learning all about this famous author’s life (what can I say, I love the novella A Christmas Carol ).

If you’re tired of museums, Bloomsbury has a lot of wonderful bookish walking tours that will shed light onto all the marvelous history that surrounds you. You can even do a self-guided walk around the neighborhood. Don’t skip unique spaces such as St. George’s Gardens and Tavistock Square Gardens — where you’ll see a statue of Virginia Woolf! 

Wrap up your day by exploring nearby Mayfair . This is a very wealthy neighborhood. Very wealthy.

In Mayfair, you will come across some of the most expensive properties in all of Western Europe. Not going lie, it’s rather fun checking out the beautiful Georgian townhomes while imagining that you can buy one, haha. 

You can also check out designer shops on Bond Street. However, my favorite thing to do in Mayfair was Mercato Mayfair.  This hip market is easy to find and is right off Oxford Street. This market is in a unique setting – St Mark’s Church – and even if you don’t eat a ton, it’s a very cool spot to take pictures and do some shopping.

Day 4: Tower of London, Southwark, and East London

For your last day in London, we’re going to focus on East and parts of South London. You will definitely want to go to  The Tower of London.  This is one of my  favorite  attractions in the world, and is a “must see” for history buffs coming to London. 

Like Westminster Abbey, The Tower of London is another attraction where you ought to buy tickets in advance so you’re able to skip the line. Your entrance to the Tower of London includes both admissions to see The Crown Jewels, as well as a guided Beefeater Tour, which is informative and wickedly funny!

Take your time going through the Tower of London to appreciate it. There is SO much to see and do and learn. I actually spent three hours here, and it was my second time visiting.

Afterwards, Shakespeare fans will want to head across the Thames River into Southwark. Here, you’ll find Shakespeare’s Globe Theater . During the day, you can take a fun tour of the Globe and learn all about Shakespeare and his iconic plays. Obviously, I loved it. However, if you’re not a Shakespeare person, then the Tate Modern, another one of London’s fantastic museums, is located nearby and well worth exploring.

If you’re hungry, I suggest stopping at  Borough Market.  This huge market is one of London’s oldest, and the perfect place to devour high-quality food. I had fish and chips, and then pastries while exploring the market (so healthy), and the people-watching experience here is top-notch. 

At night, I recommend going on a Jack the Ripper Tour. Now I understand some Ripper tours are a bit ethically … problematic. It’s important to remember real women were brutally murdered, which really shouldn’t be viewed as entertainment. With all that said, I personally suggest going on Rebel Tours What About the Women? Jack the Ripper Tour . This tour focuses on the victims’ lives and the difficulties of living in the Victorian Era. Very thought-provoking.

Last but not least, most Jack the Ripper Tours depart near Brick Lane. It’s well worth checking out some cool street art before going on your tour. The art here changes every single day, so you’ll have to come back again on your next trip to London to see how this street changed!

I hope you enjoyed reading my 4 Days in London Itinerary and have plenty of great ideas to start planning your trip here. London is a fabulous city. You’ll have a wonderful stay – no matter what you decide to do!

Rachel Elizabeth

At 22, I took my first overseas trip to Bermuda. Took a break to follow the "American Dream." Had my self-esteem broken. Embarked on my first solo trip to Scotland at 26. The travel bug dug its way under my skin. I now book multiple trips a year.

Privacy Overview

Username or email address  *

Password  *

Remember me Log in

Lost your password?

Spend Four Days In London – Example Holiday Itinerary

An example itinerary with the best places to visit during your four-day stay in London

Day #1 – London Eye, landmarks around Big Ben, Trafalgar Square

Four days is plenty of time to see the best attractions, but it’s not quite enough to see them all . The difficult bit is trying to decide how many you can squeeze into your itinerary without wasting too much time rushing around on public transport.

Our number one tip is that you want your first morning to be exciting, so we always recommend starting with a ride on the London Eye . This will give a you great view of all the landmarks you’ll be visiting later, and it only uses up 30 mins of your day (plus 30 mins queueing – but you can reduce that by buying your tickets in advance).

You will have seen Big Ben from the top of the wheel, so when you’re finished cross over Westminster Bridge for one of London’s best photos . Then take some more of the Houses of Parliament and Westminster Abbey .

Everyone has different interests so we’re going to give you three different options now. You won’t have time to visit them all, so just pick two out of three.

Option 1 – Westminster Abbey

Westminster Abbey is one of the most historic buildings in London and contains the tombs of Edward the Confessor, Henry V (Battle of Agincourt), Edward V (War of the Roses), Elizabeth I (Spanish Armada), James VI (Gunpowder Plot) and Charles II (allow for 2 hours).

Walk down Whitehall and stop outside Downing Street . You’ll have to get lucky to see the Prime Minister, but you should be able to see the famous front door easy enough – it’s halfway down the street.

Next-door is another one of London’s most popular photos – the mounted soldiers outside Horse Guards . There’s usually a big crowd of tourists crowding around them and they all take it in turns to stand next to the horses and pose for a photo.

It’s worth walking through the central arch to have a look at the parade ground afterwards. This is where they hold all the big military parades .

Option 2 – Churchill War Rooms

If you’re interested in WWII then you’ll find the entrance to the Churchill War Rooms next to the parade ground. This was where Winston Churchill directed the war during the Blitz (allow for 2 hours).

Return to Whitehall and keep walking until you reach Trafalgar Square and Nelson’s Column .

Option 3 – National Gallery

If you’re interested in art then our third option is spending a couple of hours inside the National Gallery . This is our finest gallery with artworks by the likes of Rembrandt, Raphael, Titian, Turner, Da Vinci and Van Gogh.

It should be late afternoon by now so how about finding somewhere to eat? If you walk through Leicester Square towards Piccadilly Circus you’ll find yourself in the heart of the West End . They are plenty of pubs and restaurants around here.

Day #2 – Changing the Guard, Sightseeing bus & Tower of London

Your second day will include another three attractions from our London Bucket List , plus a sightseeing bus that drives past lots of iconic landmarks that we didn’t see yesterday.

Start at Trafalgar Square and buy an Tootbus Tour ticket from their shop on Cockspur Street. Don’t board the bus just yet, though, because we’re going to see Changing the Guard first.

We’ve got a bit of time to kill before the parade starts at 11.15 AM, so maybe you can take some photos in St. James’s Park ? You can get a great photo of Buckingham Palace by standing on the central bridge over the lake, and if you turn around you’ll get a great shot of Horse Guards as well.

If you want a decent view of the parade then you’ll need to get there by 10 AM (or as early as 9.30 AM if you want a really good view). Craig’s review goes into detail about the best places to stand .

When the ceremony ends around 11.30 AM find the bus stop for the Tootbus Tour in Buckingham Gate and catch one of their Yellow Route buses and get your camera ready. The route will take you past Big Ben , Parliament and the London Eye .

The Royal Courts of Justice and St. Paul’s Cathedral are highlights along the way, and the sights will just keep on coming until you roll over Tower Bridge . Get off outside the Tower of London.

Hopefully the entire route will have taken around 50 mins which will give you around 2½ hours to look around the Tower of London . Ideally we’d recommend at least 3-4 hours in here, but seeing as you’re only visiting London for four days you’ll have to settle for 2½ – that’s more than enough to see the Crown Jewels, Bloody Tower, Traitor’s Gate and Tower Green.

After that get the tube from Tower Hill to Embankment (10 mins). You had a meal in the West End yesterday, so how about a meal in Covent Garden instead?

Day #3 – St. Paul’s Cathedral, view from The Shard & West End show

Day three begins with St. Paul’s Cathedral . After you’ve walked around Christopher Wren’s spectacular interior and seen the tombs of Nelson and Wellington in the crypt, try climbing to the top of the dome for a fantastic view of the skyline (allow for 2 hours).

We’re going to give you a choice of three different attractions now, but you’ll only have time for two. All three of them are across the other side of the river so come out of the cathedral and cross over the Millennium Bridge.

Option 1 – Tate Modern

Tate Modern is one of the most visited attractions in London and is home to the country’s largest collection of contemporary and modern art. It won’t be to everybody’s taste, but if you’re into Rothko, Pollock, Picasso and Matisse then give it a try (allow for 1½ hours).

Option 2 – Globe Theatre

Next-door to the Tate is Shakespeare’s Globe Theatre . There are two ways of sneaking a peek inside: a guided tour or watching a play . Unfortunately it’s an open-air theatre which means they only hold plays during the sunny months, so unless you come during the summer then you’ll have to settle for a tour. They’ve also got an interesting museum underneath which explores the life of Shakespeare (allow for 1½ hours for a tour, and 3 hours for a play).

Option 3 – The Shard

The third choice is a climb to the top of London’s tallest skyscraper: The Shard . You can find it by walking along the river, past the Golden Hinde and Southwark Cathedral.

You can see the whole of London from up there and it’s amazing how small it seems. You probably thought that St. Paul’s was high when you climbed it this morning, but from the top of the Shard it looks tiny! (allow for 1½ hours)

If you chose The Shard then you might like to pop into Borough Market next-door. It’s an undercover food market and they have lots of gourmet food stalls selling arty breads, meats and cheeses. It’s a nice place to stop for something to eat.

Now catch the RV1 bus from Southwark Street or Borough High Street and ride it all the way back to Covent Garden . You should be familiar with the West End by now so find a nice pub or restaurant and spend the evening watching a West End show .

Most of the big shows start at 7 PM or 7.30 PM and are within walking distance down the Strand and Shaftesbury Ave. There are more down Aldwych, Haymarket and Drury Lane.

It’s always best to buy your tickets in advance, but if you leave it to the last minute then try one of the ticket seller shops around Leicester Square . If you want the cheapest theatre tickets then try the discount TKTS booth in Leicester Square itself.

Day #4 – Boat to Greenwich

Day four takes you away from central London for a change of scenery. Tourists always think about trying a sightseeing bus but they rarely think of a sightseeing boat, so how about a boat ride from Big Ben to Greenwich? Thames Clippers , City Cruises and TRS all go to Greenwich, but we recommend TRS because City Cruises are too busy and Thames Clippers don’t have very many outside seats.

Get your camera ready because the 60-min ride will take you past lots of landmarks including Cleopatra’s Needle , St. Paul’s , the Globe Theatre , Tower of London and HMS Belfast . It will then pass straight under Tower Bridge and head towards the skyscrapers at Canary Wharf .

When you pull into Greenwich pier the first thing you’ll see is the Cutty Sark and the front facade of the Old Royal Naval College, but don’t rush over to them just yet because you have a choice to make. There are four attractions worth visiting and you won’t have time for them all, so we recommend choosing just two of them (or three if you don’t mind rushing).

Option 1 – Old Royal Naval College

Christopher Wren’s Old Royal Naval College is one of the most beautiful buildings in London. Tourists can only enter two rooms – but what rooms! The famous Painted Hall is often described as London’s Sistine Chapel (allow for 45-60 mins in total).

Option 2 – Cutty Sark

The Cutty Sark is an old clipper ship that used to carry tea from China in record speeds. The hull has been suspended in mid-air so you can walk underneath it and then explore the cargo decks and crew’s quarters (allow for 1½ hours).

Option 3 – National Maritime Museum and Queen’s House

If you’re interested in boats then you might like to visit the National Maritime Museum which tells the story of the British navy from the days of the British Empire. One of the best exhibits is the actual jacket that Admiral Nelson was wearing at the Battle of Trafalgar. Queen’s House is where they keep the museum’s collection of artworks (allow for 2 hours in total)

Option 4 – Royal Observatory

The final choice is the Royal Observatory on top of Greenwich Hill . You can explore the 16th-century house where the original Astronomer Royals used to live, and the museum is full of old clocks and telescopes. It also has a planetarium with a 360-degree movie dome (allow for 3 hours in total).

You might like to walk into the town centre at some point and have lunch in one of Greenwich’s lovely old pubs.

Bear in mind that your return boat might leave as early as 4 PM depending on the date, and which company you chose. Or you could just catch the tube from Cutty Sark to Westminster .

View this itinerary on the planner

Your comments and questions

Derby Hi. We will be arriving at Kings Cross at 10:30 am on a Monday morning. We would like to visit the Tower of London, maybe the London Bridge Experience, and The Shard. The next day we are thinking about seeing Big Ben (just pictures from outside), Westminster Abbey, British Museum, Trafalgar Square, and then a night tour on a sightseeing bus after dinner. On Wednesday we are planning a bus tour of Stonehenge & Bath. On Thursday we'll see the Changing of the Guard at Buckingham Palace and maybe a river cruise, and then catch a train at Kings Cross by 2:30PM. My first question is whether this schedule seems feasible? My second question is with this schedule, would it make sense to purchase a London Pass? Thanks for your help

Craig Hi Derby. If you're getting to Kings Cross at 10:30, presumably you've still got to go to the hotel after that and maybe have something to eat, so you probably won't get to the Tower of London until midday-ish. I would normally give the Tower at least 3 hours, but you'll have to do it a lot quicker than that if you want to squeeze in the other two. Luckily the Shard stays open late, but personally I would scrap the London Bridge Experience and give the Tower a decent amount of time. Day two is easy enough. You can probably fit something else in as well. Maybe the National Gallery or London Eye which are nearby. Or you could go and have a look at Leicester Square and Piccadilly Circus. Day Four is okay, but you should check the schedule for Changing the Guard closer to make sure that it's actually running on that day because it does't happen every day. Be aware that by the time you have walked to the river after the ceremony to catch the boat, it will probably be 12:30-ish (it's a fair walk from the palace to the river). Which won't leave you very much time to ride a boat if you've got to get to kings cross by 2:30, especially if you've got to pick your bags up from the hotel beforehand. I would definitely advise against getting a London Pass. You have to use it on consecutive days so you'll have to buy a 4-day one, even though you're spending the whole of day three outside of London. You won't save any money.

Derby Thanks for your advice, we will probably have a re-think!

Andrzej Hi, I am from Poland and are going to spend 4 full days in London staying in Westminster. I think I will be able to attend/see the following attractions: Westminster Abbey, Churchill War Rooms, Kensington Palace, Tower of London, St Paul's Cathedral, Hop on Hop off Bus Tour + Thames River Boat Cruise, all are included in London Pass. I think I should buy 3 Day London Pass to be able to attend all above with a lower price. And how about the option 'With Travel'? I should choose this option I think, but I am not sure as I will be able to have travelcard and to buy it at Heathrow. And if it is really cheaper option of travelling? Regards, Andrzej

Craig Hi Andrzej. You can buy a travelcard at Heathrow if you want but you'll get an Oyster card with the London Pass, which has cheaper fares. But one important thing to remember with the 3-day London Pass is that you have to use it on consecutive days, and you said you're here for 4 full days. So your three days will have to follow on from each other.

Anna Hi there! My fiance and I are planning a trip to London and we've got a list of great things we want to see and do but not really sure how to group them for the best. Here's our list of what we want to do: Westminster Abbey, Tower of London, Tower Bridge, London Eye, Riverboat cruise, Zoo, Household Cavalry Museum, Royal Mews, Wellington Arch, St Paul's, Southwark Cathedral, Borough Market, Camden Market, Shard, Harrods, Fortnum & Mason, National Gallery, British Museum, Churchill War Rooms, Leicester Square, Piccadilly Circus, Tea somewhere. We have 4 full days to do everything. The Zoo is the most expendable. Would love any help! Thank you so much!

Craig Hi Anna. I've had a go at putting them all together based on where they are and how long they take, but I think you're going to have to rush around a bit too much to squeeze every single one of them in. If you don't mind missing London Zoo then I would suggest missing Camden Market as well because that's in the same area and it's a bit of a waste of a journey getting the train all the way up there just for that. Day 1) You want your first day to start with something good so I would go for the London Eye first. Then get your riverboat cruise from Embankment Pier to Tower Pier. Then you can do the Tower of London and Tower Bridge. If you get a return ticket on the boat then you can ride it all the way back to Embankment again and then walk past Trafalgar Square and into the West End for the night. Day 2) Start at Westminster Abbey and have a look at Big Ben and the Houses of Parliament. The Churchill War Rooms is just around the corner and the Household Cavalry Museum is two minutes away. Don't forget to look at Downing Street next door. Then walk down to the National Gallery. You can walk to Leicester Square and Piccadilly Circus as well. If you still want to visit a market then maybe you could put Covent Garden in here. Day 3) The Shard, Southwark Cathedral and Borough Market (for lunch) are all within walking distance of each other so you can do them all together. Then maybe do St Paul's Cathedral in the afternoon. Day 4): Start with the British Museum (or maybe the Royal Mews instead, but I would do the British Museum), then get the bus to Fortnum & Mason, and another bus past Wellington Arch to Harrods. (I wouldn't bother going inside Wellington Arch myself because the view isn't all that great, and you've already been up The Shard and London Eye). If you want tea somewhere then maybe you could try one of Harrod's restaurants

Anna Thank you so much! I really appreciate your help and you've given us some good ideas

You must enable javascript to leave a comment

> Forum: London Landmarks, Attractions & Events

London in 4 Tagen: Reiseroute + Meine besten Tipps

4 tage in london: die beste reiseroute + unterkünfte.

Du planst einen 4-tägigen Aufenthalt in London und bist auf der Suche nach den besten Must-See Attraktionen und Unterkünften?

Dann bist du hier genau richtig!

Um dir bei der Planung deines Aufenthalts zu helfen , habe ich für dich diese 4-tägige Reiseroute in London zusammengestellt .

Während deiner Reise entdeckst du die wichtigsten Sehenswürdigkeiten der Stadt wie Big Ben, Westminster Abbey, Buckingham Palace, Soho, Camden Town und vieles mehr!

Zusätzlich zu den besten Sehenswürdigkeiten und Aktivitäten gebe ich dir auch (wie immer in meinen Reiseführern) meine besten Tipps , sowie eine Liste mit den besten Unterkünften, für jedes Budget.

Also, was kann man in London in 4 Tagen sehen und machen? Wo befinden sich die besten Unterkünfte?

1. Der London Pass

2. skip-the-line tickets für londons beste touristenattraktionen, ein letzter tipp für einen perfekten 4-tägigen aufenthalt in london, b. westminster abbey, c. buckingham palast, d. trafalgar square/ national gallery, e. london eye, f. tate britain und/oder tate modern museum, a. st. paul’s cathedral, b. the city of london, c. tower of london, d. tower bridge, e. the shard, a. notting hill, b. natural history museum, c. hyde park, d. oxford street, f. piccadilly circus, g. covent garden, a. hampstead village, b. camden town, c. regent’s park, d. abbey road (optional), e. madame tussauds oder british museum, unterkünfte in london, london in 4 tagen mit kindern, noch mehr sehenswürdigkeiten in london, karte deiner 4-tägigen reiseroute in london, für 4 tage nach london fliegen: flugpreise, du reist in england herum diese artikel werden dir helfen, meine tipps um die warteschlangen in london zu vermeiden.

Da London eines der beliebtesten Reiseziele der Welt ist, ist es sehr nützlich zu wissen, wie man stundenlanges Anstehen an den ikonischen Wahrzeichen der englischen Hauptstadt vermeiden kann.

Jeden Tag strömen Tausende von Besuchern zum Tower of London oder zur Westminster Abbey.

Du stimmst wahrscheinlich zu, dass es nichts Ärgerlicheres gibt, als wenn deine Pläne für deine 4 Tage in London über den Haufen geworfen werden, weil du 3 Stunden mit Warten vergeudet hast!

Zum Glück gibt es 2 sehr einfache Lösungen , um diese Unannehmlichkeiten zu vermeiden und keine der Sehenswürdigkeiten zu verpassen, die du während deiner 4 Tage in London unbedingt gesehen haben musst.

Du fragst dich welche?

Dann lies schnell weiter!

Erste Lösung: Um (viel) Zeit und Geld zu sparen , während deinem 4-tägigen London Aufenthalt, solltest du den London Pass kaufen.

Diese Art von Stadtpass gibt es für alle touristischen Städte der Welt.

Mit dem London Pass erhältst du direkten Zugang zu den berühmtesten Sehenswürdigkeiten, ohne dass du erst anstehen musst, um deine Tickets zu kaufen.

Das Tolle daran ist, dass es sich um einen digitalen Pass handelt , d.h. du kannst deinen London Pass direkt auf dein Smartphone herunterladen und ihn am Eingang jeder im Pass enthaltenen Attraktion scannen .

Er ist zwischen 1 und 10 Tagen gültig (Dauer nach Wahl).

Dieser City Pass ist ein digitales Sightseeing-Credits-Paket: Die Gutschriften werden, bei jeder Besichtigung, abgezogen.

Der 4-Tage-London-Pass enthält zum Beispiel 515 Credits, was 515€ an Eintrittsgeldern entspricht, obwohl der Pass nur 147€ kostet!!!

Er ist zweifellos der umfassendste Pass, also ideal wenn du 4 Tage in London verbringst!

Was ist im London Pass enthalten?

• Zugang zu mehr als 80 Londoner Sehenswürdigkeiten : Westminster Abbey, Tower of London, Tower Bridge…
• Fahrt mit dem Hop-on-Hop-off-Touristenbus, mit dem du London ganz entspannt erkunden kannst, vor allem, wenn du London mit deinen Kindern besuchst oder nicht zu viel laufen möchtest.
• Ermäßigungen in bestimmten Souvenirläden
• Stadtplan mit Öffnungszeiten und Anfahrtsbeschreibungen zu den einzelnen Attraktionen

Um deinen London City Pass zu kaufen, musst du nur auf die folgende Schaltfläche klicken:

Als Alternative gibt es auch noch einen anderen Pass, den du kaufen kannst: Den London Go City Explorer Pass .

Dieser Pass bezieht sich auf die Anzahl der Attraktionen , die du besuchen möchtest. Du kannst also einen Pass für 2, 3, 4, 5 oder 7 Attraktionen kaufen .

Du kannst diesen Pass buchen, indem du hier klickst!

Um London in 4 Tagen zu besuchen, kannst du auch einzelne Skip-the-Line-Tickets kaufen.

Genau wie der London Pass ermöglichen sie dir den Zugang zu allen Must-See Attraktionen ohne Anstehen.

Diese Skip-the-Line Tickets sind verfügbar für die wichtigsten Sehenswürdigkeiten und Aktivitäten, die du während deines 4-tägigen Aufenthalts in London sehen und machen kannst.

Du findest jetzt hier , gleich im Anschluss, eine Liste mit Skip-the-Line Tickets für die wichtigsten Attraktionen, die ich in diesem Artikel erwähne (selbstverständlich, gebe ich sie dir auch wieder nach und nach in jedem Abschnitt dieses Artikels).

Um zu buchen, klicke einfach auf die Bezeichnungen der Attraktionen (orangefarbene Links) oder auf die grünen Schaltflächen , die du in diesem Reiseführer finden wirst.

• Westminster Abbey
• Wachablösung Buckingham Palace
• Tower Bridge + Tower of London VIP-Besuch
• Tower of London
• Schifffahrt auf der Themse
• Madame Tussauds Wachsfigurenkabinett
• St. Pauls Kathedrale
• Harry Potter-Themenführung – Toll, wenn du das Harry Potter-Universum magst!
• Hop-on-Hop-off-Doppeldeckerbus

Wenn du deine Reisedaten bereits kennst (oder sobald du sie hast!) , solltest du unbedingt deine Unterkunft im Voraus buchen .

London gehört zu den touristischsten Städte der Welt und die Hotels mit dem besten Preis-Leistungs-Verhältnis sind sehr schnell ausgebucht .

Als erfahrener Reisender kann ich dir versichern, dass ich die besten Unterkünfte immer dann gefunden habe, wenn ich mich so früh wie möglich darum gekümmert habe.

Es wäre doch wirklich schade, deinen Aufenthalt in London, in einem mittelmässigen, vielleicht sogar schlechten und teuren Hotel zu verbringen, nur weil du dich nicht früh genug um die Reservierung gekümmert hast, oder ? 😅

Also nimm dir gleich jetzt 5 Minuten Zeit, um einen Blick auf die folgende  Liste der Lieblingshotels der Reisenden in London zu werfen.

Und wenn dir eins besonders gut gefällt, dann nimm sofort deine Buchung vor!

Stornierungen sind oft kostenlos, schnell und  einfach ! Noch ein Grund mehr  also, um unnötigen Ärger (nichts Gutes mehr frei oder nur noch Zimmer zu überhöhten Preisen) zu vermeiden, nur weil du gezögert hast.

Um die besten aktuellen Angebote in London einzusehen, klicke einfach auf die folgende grüne Schaltfläche :

So, und nun wo du dein Hotel oder Apartment für deinen Traumurlaub in London gebucht hast, ist es an der Zeit, deine 4-tägige Reiseroute zu entdecken!

4 Tage in London: Die ultimative Reiseroute

So, und jetzt geht es los! Lass uns nun meine 4-tägige London-Reiseroute entdecken !

Ich gebe dir, für jeden Tag, alle Details die du benötigst für deine Besuche, zusammen mit einer Karte , um deine Orientierung in London zu vereinfachen. Kompletter geht es kaum! Dies wird dir helfen deinen Urlaub zu optimieren und einen stressfreien Aufenthalt in London zu geniessen !

Ich gehe davon aus, dass du 4 volle Tage in London verbringen wirst und dass du bereits deinen London Pass oder deine Skip-the-Line Tickets gekauft hast. Auf diese Weise verschwendest du keine Zeit mit dem Anstehen und kannst während deines 4-tägigen Aufenthalts so viele Sehenswürdigkeiten wie möglich besichtigen.

Wenn du nach dem Lesen dieses Artikels noch Fragen hast oder einfach Hilfe bei der Planung deines Urlaubs brauchst, kannst du mir deine Fragen im Kommentarbereich am Ende dieses Artikels stellen.

Also, was sollte man in London in 4 Tagen unbedingt besichtigen?

Tag 1 – Das historische Zentrum

Besichtigungen des 1. Tages:

A. Big Ben B. Westminster Abbey C. Buckingham Palast D. Trafalgar Square / National Gallery E. London Eye F. Tate Britain und/oder Tate Modern

Die beste Art, deine 4 Tage Reiseroute in London zu beginnen, ist sicherlich , dir das Hauptwahrzeichen Londons ansehen zu gehen.

Der weltberühmte Big Ben befindet sich im historischen Zentrum der Stadt.

Der 106 Meter hohe Elizabeth Tower (Big Ben ist der Name der Glocke im Inneren des Turms!) wurde 1858 am Ufer der Themse erbaut und beherbergt 4 Uhren auf jeder Seite des Turms.

Jede Uhr hat einen Durchmesser von 7 Metern!

Big Ben ist Teil des Palace of Westminster , besser bekannt unter der Bezeichnung „Houses of Parliament“.

Leider werden die meisten von euch dieses Gebäude nur von außen bewundern können, denn nur Einwohner des Vereinigten Königreichs dürfen das Innere des Elizabeth Towers besuchen .

Und sogar für die Einheimischen ist diese Besichtigung kompliziert. Sie müssen einen offiziellen Antrag stellen und die Warteliste ist sehr lang!

Setze deinen Besuch zu Fuß fort und gehe zur Westminster Abbey , die direkt neben dem Big Ben liegt.

Dieses historische Wahrzeichen ist der Ort, wo viele Könige und Königinnen gekrönt wurden (auch die aktuelle Monarchin Queen Elizabeth II).

Im Inneren der Abtei kannst du die Gräber vieler früherer Könige und Königinnen bewundern, darunter auch das Grab von Maria Stuart, Königin der Schotten .

Wenn du mehr über die Geschichte der Westminster Abbey erfahren willst, solltest du dir am Eingang einen Audioguide besorgen.

Der Audioguide kann für eine der verschiedenen angebotenen Touren konfiguriert werden : Eine kurze 30-minütige Tour, die Standardtour von 1 Stunde oder die „more fun“ Tour für Familien mit Kindern.

Wenn du planst Westminster Abbey während deiner 4 Tage in London zu besichtigen, solltest du dir unbedingt ein Skip-the-Line Ticket im Voraus kaufen , wenn du unnötiges Anstehen am Eingang vermeiden willst!

Wenn du den London Pass gekauft hast, ist der Eintritt inbegriffen. Andernfalls musst du ein Skip-the-Line Ticket kaufen , indem du auf die folgende Schaltfläche klickst:

Wenn du sicher stellen willst dass du dein Tagesprogramm einhalten kannst, solltest du die Westminster Abbey gleich an der Eröffnung morgens besuchen (wochentags 9.30 Uhr, samstags 9.00 Uhr und sonntags geschlossen).

Du kannst auch eine 2-stündige geführte Tour buchen, indem du hier klickst!

Jetzt geht es weiter zum Buckingham Palace .

Die königliche Residenz ist ein weiteres historisches Wahrzeichen, das du während deiner 4 Tage in London auf keinen Fall verpassen darfst!

Der Palast liegt etwa 1 km von der Westminster Abbey entfernt (etwa 15 Minuten zu Fuß).

Reisetipp : Gehe morgens dorthin, damit du dir die Zeremonie des Wachwechsels ansehen kannst!

Sie findet montags, mittwochs, freitags und sonntags statt.

Es ist eine beeindruckende Show, die Jung und Alt gleichermaßen begeistert : Dutzende von königlichen Wachen in ihrer Paradeuniform aus roten Jacketts und Bärenfellmützen marschieren hin und her vor dem Palast der Königin von England, zum Takt einer Militärband oder einer Trommel.

Die Wachablösung beginnt um 11.00 Uhr und dauert etwa 40 Minuten, aber du solltest so früh wie möglich an Ort und Stelle sein, um dir einen guten Platz zu sichern.

Diese Zeremonie zieht jeden Tag Tausende von Zuschauern an, du wirst hier also nicht allein sein!

Warnung: Die Wachablösung wird manchmal bei schlechtem Wetter abgesagt (und mit dem schlechten Wetter in London ist nicht zu spaßen!).

Zum Glück gibt es im Internet einen Kalender, in dem du nachsehen kannst, ob der Wachwechsel stattfindet.

Wenn du dir die Wachablösung ansehen gehst, kannst du es auch ausnutzen um den Buckingham Palace zu besichtigen.

Allerdings ist er nur 2 Monate im Jahr für die Öffentlichkeit zugänglich (normalerweise im August/September).

Wenn du die Möglichkeit hast, London in dieser Zeit zu besuchen , musst du deine Tickets rechtzeitig buchen , um sicher zu stellen dass du eine Eintrittskarte bekommst.

Du hast die Wahl zwischen 3 verschiedenen Tickets (klicke auf die orangefarbenen Links):

• Eintrittskarte für die Staatsräume , mit einem Audioguide in deutscher Sprache: Entdecke die Empfangsräume, in denen die offiziellen Zeremonien stattfinden
• Eintrittskarte für die Queen’s Gallery (sehr große Kunstsammlung)
• Eintrittskarte für die Royal Mews (Stallungen) , mit einem Audioguide in deutscher Sprache: Hier kannst du auch die Kutschen der königlichen Familie bewundern!

Wenn du die Parade der Soldaten der Königin zu den Klängen der Musikkapelle ausführlich genossen hast, kannst du jetzt deine 4-tägige London-Reiseroute fortsetzen mit dem Besuch des Trafalgar Square .

Zu Fuss bis dorthin braucht man in etwas 15-20 Minuten.

Spaziere durch den St. James’s Park, einen öffentlichen Park mit schönen Blumenbeeten, der sich direkt gegenüber des Palastes befindet, um Trafalgar Square zu erreichen.

Du wirst diesen berühmten Platz mit seinen 4 großen Statuen (schwarze Löwen) wahrscheinlich sofort erkennen. Es ist ein sehr lebhafter Platz, an dem du dir Straßenaufführungen ansehen und einen Happen essen kannst.

Wenn du schon am Trafalgar Square bist, solltest du es ausnutzen um auch die National Gallery zu besuchen.

Wie alle nationalen Museen in London ist der Eintritt kostenlos. Du hast also keine Ausrede, um eines der schönsten Museen der Stadt zu verpassen, das 1824 gegründet wurde und in der ganzen Welt bekannt ist.

Hier entdeckst du eine sehr umfassende Sammlung europäischer Gemälde, darunter Originalwerke von Van Gogh, Monet, Cézanne, Rembrandt, Picasso, Leonardo da Vinci und noch viele mehr.

Du kannst dir am Eingang einen Audioguide besorgen und dich dann für eine der verschiedenen Touren entscheiden, die vorgeschlagen werden (darunter auch eine einstündige Tour, die kindergerecht ist).

Die Öffnungszeiten findest du auf der offiziellen Website.

Nach dieser Kulturpause solltest du deinen 4-tägigen Aufenthalt in London mit der Entdeckung des London Eye fortsetzen.

Das bedeutet, wieder ins historische Zentrum zurückgehen! (Ein 15- bis 20-minütiger Spaziergang – Du kannst natürlich auch den Bus nehmen).

Das London Eye befindet sich nämlich am Ufer der Themse , ganz in der Nähe des Big Ben. Du hast es wahrscheinlich schon am Morgen gesehen! Wenn du in London bist, solltest du dir eine Fahrt mit dem London Eye nicht entgehen lassen: Das größte Riesenrad Europas ermöglicht dir einen unglaublichen Panoramablick über ganz London zu geniessen!

Mach dich bereit, in geräumigen, geschlossenen Kapseln, in denen bis zu 25 Personen Platz finden können, auf eine Höhe von über 130 Metern, aufzusteigen. Da sich das Rad sehr langsam dreht, dauert die gesamte Fahrt 30 Minuten.

Du musst dein Ticket für das London Eye im Voraus buchen, indem du auf die folgende Schaltfläche klickst:

Wenn du möchtest, kannst du dich auch für ein Kombiticket entscheiden, das ein gutes Preis-Leistungs-Verhältnis bietet: London Eye + Themse-Kreuzfahrt + Hop-on Hop-off Bus.

Um deinen ersten Tag in London kulturell ausklingen zu lassen, kannst du 2 weitere Londoner Museen besuchen. Beide sind zweifellos ein Muss während einer London-Reise!

Die Museen Tate Britain und Tate Modern liegen beide an der Themse , das eine am Nordufer und das andere am Südufer.

Ein Schuttle Boat ( Tate Boat genannt) verkehrt alle 30 Minuten zwischen den beiden Galerien , so dass du sie problemlos nacheinander besuchen kannst.

Tate Britain wurde 1897 eröffnet und beherbergt eine großartige Sammlung klassischer britischer Kunst . Hier kannst du vor allem Werke von Turner, Hogarth und William Blake bewundern.

Tate Modern ist hingegen, wie der Name es schon vermuten lässt, der modernen Kunst gewidmet.

Der Eintritt in die beiden Museen ist kostenlos. Die Öffnungszeiten findest du auf der offiziellen Website.

Wenn du London bei Nacht sehen willst , kannst du dein Besichtigungsprogramm anpassen : Besuche zuerst Tate Britain und Tate Modern und gehe erst am Ende des Tages zum London Eye .

Du kannst auch, wenn du mit deinem Besuch der National Gallery fertig bist, zum Embankment Pier an der Themse gehen. Nimm dort das Schuttle Boat bis zum Millbank Pier , der sich direkt neben dem Eingang des Tate Britain Museum befindet . Für das Tate Modern Museum musst du am Bankside Pier austeigen .

Nach dem Besuch der Museen nimm dann wieder das Tate Boat in die entgegengesetzte Richtung, um das London Eye zu erreichen. Wenn du dich gut organisiert, bist du bei Sonnenuntergang da!

Tag 2: Sehenswürdigkeiten und Aktivitäten in London

Besichtigungen des 2. Tages:

A. St. Paul’s Paul’s Cathedral B. The City of London C. Tower of London D. Tower Bridge E. The Shard

Die St. Paul’s Cathedral im Geschäftsviertel The City of London ist ein Muss, wenn du das Glück hast 4 Tage in London verbringen zu können.

Diese Kathedrale im Barockstil wurde im 17. Jahrhundert gebaut, um die alte Kirche zu ersetzen, die 1666 durch ein Feuer zerstört wurde.

Sehenswertes in der St. Paul’s Cathedral :

• Das wunderschöne Kirchenschiff
• Die geheimnisvolle Whispering Gallery und ihre unglaubliche Akustik
• Die Stone Gallery
• Die Golden Gallery und ihren fantastischen Panoramablick über die Stadt
• Die Krypta , in der sich die Gräber mehrerer berühmter britischer Persönlichkeiten befinden, darunter der Herzog von Wellington und Sir Christopher Wren, der Architekt der St. Paul’s Cathedral.

Der Eintritt zur St. Paul’s Kathedrale ist im London Pass enthalten.

Wenn du den City Pass nicht gekauft hast, kannst du dein Skip-the-Line- Ticket buchen, indem du auf die folgende Schaltfläche klickst:

Nach dem Besuch der Kathedrale solltest du noch ein bisschen im Stadtteil The City of London bleiben .

Londons Geschäftsviertel , das auch sein geografisches Zentrum ist, ist einen Besuch wert.

Schlendere durch die Straßen und bewundere das ikonischste Wahrzeichen dieses Stadtteils, ein ungewöhnlich geformter Wolkenkratzer, „The Gherkin “ (die Gurke oder „das Zäpfchen“, je nachdem, wen du fragst!😆)

Reisetipp : Steige auf den 155 Meter hohen Wolkenkratzer , der den Spitznamen „Walkie-Talkie“ trägt!

Wenn du deinen Platz im Voraus auf der Sky-Garden-Website buchst, kannst du einen fantastischen und kostenlosen 360°-Panoramablick über London vom höchsten öffentlichen Garten der Stadt aus genießen .

„Walkie-Talkie“ befindet sich in der Fenchurch Street 20 im Herzen der Londoner City.

Gut zu wissen : Es gibt nur eine begrenzte Anzahl an Plätzen pro Tag und du kannst nur 3 Wochen bis 1 Monat im Voraus buchen.

Der Stadtteil The City beherbergt auch den berühmten Tower of London .

Diese Festung, am Ufer der Themse gelegen (nicht weit von der Tower Bridge, deiner nächsten Reiseetappe) ist nur 15 Minuten zu Fuß von The Gherkin entfernt.

Der Tower of London, der 1066 erbaut wurde und zum UNESCO-Weltkulturerbe gehört, war einst eine königliche Residenz , diente aber auch als Gefängnis und Hinrichtungsstätte.

Heute ist diese Festung ein Museum, das der mittelalterlichen Geschichte gewidmet ist und sich vor allem auf die makabren Aspekte dieser Epoche konzentriert.

Geschichten über Hinrichtungen, die von Reiseführern in historischen Kostümen erzählt werden, eine geführte Tour durch die Folterkammer und andere blutige Details lassen dich in eines der dunkelsten Kapitel der Londoner Geschichte eintauchen.

Natürlich alles mit viel Spaß und einer Prise britischen Humors! Dieser Besuch ist auch für Kinder geeignet.

Jeden Tag kommen Horden von Besuchern hierher, um die Hauptattraktion des Towers zu sehen: Die Kronjuwelen. Hier kannst du die Kronen mehrerer Könige und Königinnen sehen , darunter auch die von Königin Elisabeth II.

Und versäume es nicht, einen Blick in die wunderschönen Gärten außerhalb des Towers zu werfen.

Geführte Touren starten alle 30 Minuten vom Haupteingang aus.

Reisetipp : Denke daran deine Eintrittskarten im Voraus zu kaufen , damit du keine Zeit in der oft endlosen Warteschlange verlierst!

Der Eintritt in den Tower of London ist im London Pass enthalten .

Du kannst deine Tickets aber auch separat kaufen, indem du auf die folgende Schaltfläche klickst:

Die Tower Bridge , die nächste Etappe deiner 4-tägigen London-Reise, befindet sich gleich in der Nähe des Tower of London.

Mit ihren 2 riesigen Türmen und dem himmelblauen Eisenwerk wirst du dieses Wahrzeichen der Stadt sofort erkennen!

Diese beeindruckende Brücke im gotischen Stil wurde im 19. Jahrhundert über die Themse gebaut und verbindet das Nord- und das Südufer Londons. Diese Brücke ist eine Klappbrücke: Sie öffnet sich, um große Boote durchzulassen!

Als sie gebaut wurde, war die Tower Bridge die modernste Klappbrücke der Welt.

Nimm dir Zeit , die Tower Bridge vom Ufer der Themse aus, zu bewundern. Du kannst, zum Beispiel, einen Drink oder eine kleine Mahlzeit zu dir nehmen (In der Nähe der Brücke gibt es zahlreiche Möglichkeiten zum einkehren) oder dich einfach nur etwas ausruhen (Besichtigungen sind ermüdend) und den magischen Augenblick (und Anblick) genießen!

Du kannst aber auch über die Brücke spazieren und … wenn es dich interessiert, sogar die alten Maschinenräume in einem der Türme besichtigen .

Und zu guter Letzt, wenn du Lust auf einen Adrenalinschub hast, dann solltest du dich auf die höchste Ebene begeben ! Dort oben kann man nämlich über einen gläsernen Steg laufen (Mach es nur wenn du schwindelfrei bist!) Du wirst das Gefühl haben, über der Themse zu schweben.

Der Eintritt zur Tower Bridge ist im London Pass enthalten .

Reisetipp : Am Fuße der Tower Bridge liegt der charmante kleine Hafen St Katharine Docks. Dieser schöne Ort lädt zu einem Spaziergang ein! Du kannst aber auch in einem der vielen Restaurants mit Blick auf die Themse etwas Kleines essen oder etwas trinken gehen.

Um deinen zweiten Tag stilvoll zu beenden, solltest du The Shard erklimmen! Der Panoramablick von dort aus ist atemberaubenden!

The Shard ist der Name von Londons neuestem Wahrzeichen, einem über 300 Meter hohen Wolkenkratzer , der nur 10 Minuten Fußweg von der Tower Bridge entfernt ist.

Es ist auch die höchste Aussichtsplattform in Westeuropa , von der aus du einen unglaublichen 360°-Blick über die ganze Stadt genießen kannst.

Neben dem spektakulären Panorama kannst du auch, auf den Multimedia-Displays, die sich in diesem Gebäude befinden , mehr über London erfahren.

The Shard ist auf jeden Fall einen Besuch wert!

Buche deine Tickets gleich hier, indem du auf die folgende Schaltfläche klickst:

Tag 3: Sehenswertes in London

Besichtigungen des 3. Tages:

A. Notting Hill B. Natural History Museum C. Hyde Park D. Oxford Street E. Soho F. Piccadilly Circus G. Covent Garden

An deinem 3. Tag in London begebe dich in den Stadtteil Notting Hill , der im Westen der Stadt liegt.

Dieser mondäne Teil Londons, der durch den gleichnamigen Film „Notting Hill“ berühmt wurde , wirkt eher wie ein ruhiges und elegantes Dorf. Wenn du ein Fan des Films bist, wirst du sicher einige der Drehorte wiedererkennen!

Dort kannst du wunderschöne Häuser mit pastellfarbenen Fassaden bewundern und zum Portobello Road Market schlendern (jeden Morgen geöffnet).

Dieser Markt ist eigentlich die Hauptattraktion dieses Stadtteils. Hier ist immer etwas los! Second-Hand-Kleidung, Vintage-Artikel, Antiquitäten , verschiedene Accessoires und sogar kulinarische Spezialitäten, es ist für jeden etwas dabei! Du wirst sehen, es ist ein schöner Ort zum Bummeln!

Wenn du die Möglichkeit hast im August 4 Tage in London zu verbringen , solltest du dir das jährliche Großereignis nicht entgehen lassen, das hier am letzten Wochenende des Monats stattfindet: Notting Hill Carnival, eine festliche Parade von über 5 km Länge zu den Klängen karibischer Musik.

Um nach Notting Hill zu gelangen, kannst du mit der U-Bahn bis zur U-Bahn-Station Notting Hill Gate fahren.

Und wenn du sicher sein willst, dass du nichts verpasst, solltest du diese geführte Tour buchen:

Nach deinem Vormittag in Notting Hill geht es weiter mit einem Besuch im London Natural History Museum , einem der größten und schönsten Museen der Stadt.

Mit dem Bus brauchst du etwa 20 Minuten, um dorthin zu gelangen.

Dieses Museum ist buchstäblich riesig und zieht jedes Jahr über 5 Millionen Besucher an. Es ist das meistbesuchte Naturkundemuseum in Europa!

Das gotische Gebäude, in dem die Ausstellungen untergebracht sind, ist von außen genauso prächtig wie von innen . Bei deinem Besuch entdeckst du außergewöhnliche Exponate und erfährst alles über Zoologie, Botanik, Vulkanologie, Archäologie, die Dinosaurier und vieles mehr.

Du kannst gar nicht alles auf einmal sehen , ausser vielleicht wenn du den ganzen Tag dort verbringst. Es gibt hier auch viele spielerische nette Aktivitäten für Kinder.

Du solltest maximal 2 Stunden im Museum verbringen , damit du noch genug Zeit für den Rest deiner Besichtigungen deines 3. Tages hast.

Wenn du London in 4 Tagen zu Fuß besuchst, wird es dir auch gut tun, zwischen deinen Besichtigungen, etwas frische Luft zu schnappen.

Warum also nicht ein wenig Grün im größten Park Londons genießen ?

Hyde Park ist einer der schönsten Stadtparks der Welt und der perfekte Ort, um ein Picknick zu machen , auf einer Terrasse zu essen oder einfach nur spazieren zu gehen.

Verpasse auch nicht eine der berühmtesten Londoner Kuriosität : Der Speakers‘ Corner . Jeden Sonntag halten anonyme Redner, in der Nähe des Marble Arch (im nordöstlichen Teil des Parks) einen Vortrag zu einem Thema ihrer Wahl (mit englischem Humor!) . Und da jeder seine Meinung geben kann, kommt es oft zu lebhaften Diskussionen und Debatten! Man muss es mindestens einmal miterlebt haben!

Wenn du gegen Ende des Jahres in London bist, kannst du den riesigen Weihnachtsmarkt im Hyde Park besuchen. Auch mit Kindern ein super Reiseziel! Denn i n der Weihnachtszeit gibt es hier auch eine grosse Kirmes (Winter Wonderland) und die größte Freiluft-Eislaufbahn des Vereinigten Königreichs !

Wenn du hingegen im Sommer in London bist, kannst du die zahlreichen Festivals und Konzerte genießen , die jedes Jahr in dieser Saison im Park stattfinden.

Nach dieser kurzen Pause im Hyde Park solltest du dich auf den Weg zur Oxford Street machen. Sie erstreckt sich von Marble Arch (im nordöstlichen Teil des Parks) bis hin zum St Giles Circus .

Diese 2,5 km lange Einkaufsstraße zieht Horden von Touristen an und kann mit der Champs-Élysées in Paris verglichen werden.

Hunderte von Mode-, Einrichtungs- und anderen Geschäften säumen diese Einfaufsstraße. Hier findest du die bekanntesten britischen Ladenketten wie Marks & Spencer, Primark, TopShop, River Island, Lush, The Body Shop, Mush, Primark, Urban Outfitters und noch viele mehr.

Wenn du die Oxford Street ganz durchgehst, erreichst du das Vergnügungsviertel Soho . Dieses Stadtviertel ist das Zentrum des Londoner Nachtlebens, der lebendigste Teil der Hauptstadt Englands. Zusammengefasst, ein sehr beliebter Ort für Londoner und Touristen, um abends auszugehen!

Dieses Viertel ist zwar klein, aber hier befinden sich zahlreiche Pubs, Theater, Restaurants, Kinos und Clubs . Also, noch einmal, perfekt um angenehme, unterhaltsame Abende zu verbringen.

Und das , jeden Abend! Hier ist für jeden Geschmack etwas dabei!

Du kannst dir sogar ein Musical in einem der vielen Theater ansehen – Verpasse nicht diese einzigartige Möglichkeit während deiner 4 Tage in London!

Wenn du das berühmte Musical „Les Misérables“ im Sondheim Theatre in London sehen willst, solltest du deine Tickets hier im Voraus kaufen.

Und wenn du lieber das nicht weniger berühmte „The Phantom of the Opera“ sehen willst, musst du hier buchen!

Wenn du etwas Besonderes in London unternehmen willst, solltest du die Harry Potter-Themenführung buchen.

Diese Tour beginnt in Soho: Von dort aus, führt dich dein (super netter) Reiseleiter zu mehreren der legendären Schauplätzen, die du in den Filmen gesehen hast , darunter Diagon Alley, Gringotts, Bahnsteig 9 3/4, Knockturn Alley und noch viele andere.

Und weißt du was? Diese Tour ist so gut, dass sie von GetYourGuide Originals zertifiziert wurde, was bedeutet, dass du eine volle Rückerstattung deiner Kosten erhältst, wenn dir die Tour nicht gefallen hat!

Um deine Harry Potter-Führung zu buchen, klicke einfach auf die folgende Schaltfläche:

Dein Spaziergang in Soho führt dich unweigerlich zum Piccadilly Circus , dem berühmten Londoner Platz, den du an seinen riesigen Werbetafeln, sofort erkennst wirst.

Man kann ihn als den Times Square von London bezeichnen. Auch hier herrscht ständig ein lebhaftes Treiben.

Geh nun weiter in Richtung Osten, bis du Covent Garden erreichst (10 Minuten zu Fuß vom Piccadilly Circus entfernt).

In Covent Garden befand sich früher der überdachte Markt von London, bevor er in den 1970er Jahren verlegt wurde.

Zum Glück blieb das wunderschöne Glasdach erhalten und das Gebäude beherbergt heute mehrere Geschäfte, Restaurants, Künstlerateliers und das großartige London Transport Museum.

Dieser Ort ist wirklich sehr lebhaft mit seinen vielen Straßenvorstellungen . Es ist der perfekte Ort, um deinen Tag auf angenehme Art und Weise zu beenden!

Tag 4 – Spaziergang durch London

Besichtigungen des 4. Tages:

A. Hampstead Village B. Camden Town C. Regent’s Park D. Abbey Road (optional) E. Madame Tussauds oder British Museum

Am letzten Tag deines 4-tägigen Aufenthalts in London und damit dein erster Eindruck der Hauptstadt Englands so komplett wie möglich ist, solltest du auch noch den Norden der Stadt erkunden.

Beginne mit einem Spaziergang in Hampstead Village , ein herrlich grünes und ruhiges Stadtviertel, das auf einem Hügel über London liegt. Hampstead Village ist, wie sein name es schon andeutet, ein ehemaliges Dorf , das seinen ganzen Charme bewahrt hat.

Dieses Stadtviertel zog im Laufe der Jahre immer mehr wohlhabende Londoner an, so dass Hampstead mittlerweike zu den gefragtesten Wohngegenden der Stadt zählt. Du wirst es selbst feststellen, wenn man in Hampstead ist, hat man das Gefühl die Stadt London verlassen zu haben und auf dem Land zu sein!

Malerisch und friedlich wie ein Provinzdorf lädt Hampstead Village zum Spazieren ein , in gepflegter und entspannter ländlicher Atmosphäre: Geschmackvolle blumengeschmückte Vorgärten erwarten dich hier , herrliche victorianische Häuser, aber auch zahlreiche Geschäfte, Restaurants und Cafés.

Nur 20 Minuten mit der U-Bahn vom Zentrum Londons entfernt, ist Hampstead Village wirklich ein großartiger Ort, um dem Trubel der Stadt zu entfliehen.

Setze deine Entdeckungstour im Norden der britischen Hauptstadt mit einer Tour durch Camden Town fort.

Im äußersten Norden Londons gelegen, ist Camden Town ein trendiger und untypischer Stadtteil, in dem Punks, Goths und Alter-Globalisten leben.

Entlang der Hauptstraße findest du exzentrische Klamottenläden, Piercing- und Tattoo-Salons und Second-Hand-Läden. Die Atmosphäre dort ist einzigartig!

Camden Town ist wirklich ein sehr lebendiger Ort, vor allem rund um den Camden Lock Market, der jeden Tag von 10.00 bis 18.00 Uhr geöffnet ist. Auch diesen Flohmarkt solltest du nicht verpassen, vor allem, wenn du zum ersten Mal in London bist.

Jeder Stand ist verrückter als der andere! Hier wirst du sicherlich versteckte Schätze ergattern!

Und bevor du diesen Stadtteil wieder verlässt, kannst du auch noch am Regent’s Canal spazieren gehen , Street Food aus aller Welt probieren und Live-Musik hören!

Reisetipp: Einfach eintauchen und die sehr spezielle Atmosphäre dieses londoner Stadtviertels geniessen!

Wenn du von Camden Town aus 10 Minuten zu Fuss nach Süden gehst, erreichst du Regent’s Park.

Regent’s Park ist bei weitem der schönste und blumenreichste Park Londons . Der 166 Hektar große Park gehörte einst der königlichen Familie und sollte ursprünglich (1811) mehrere prächtige Gebäude beherbergen, darunter einen Palast.

Aus Geldmangel wurde das Projekt nie fertiggestellt, und 1930 wurde dieser Stadtpark der Öffentlichkeit übergeben. Der Architekt, Mister Josh Nash, konnte jedoch die wunderschönen neoklassizistischen Villen bauen, die du rund um den Park sehen kannst.

Heute ist der Regent’s Park eine der schönsten öffentlichen Grünanlagen der Stadt, wo viele Londoner hin joggen gehen oder andere Sportarten in den herrlich angelegten Anlagen betreiben.

Es ist aber auch der perfekte Ort für Paare oder Familien, um ein Ruderboot oder ein Tretboot zu mieten , ein Picknick zu genießen oder einfach nur durch die Grünanlagen zu schlendern.

Außerdem gibt es hier einen Kinderspielplatz für die Kleinen, einen wunderschönen Rosengarten (Queen Mary’s Gardens – im Sommer nicht zu verpassen!) und zahlreiche Cafés und Restaurants.

Wie du siehst findet hier jeder sein Glück!

Wenn du ein Beatles-Fan bist, hast du dich sicherlich auf diesen Augenblick gefreut! Ja jetzt entdeckst du die berühmte Abbey Road , eine der bekanntesten Strassen im Vereinigten Königreich!

Abbey Road und ihr legendäres Zebra Crossing, das auf dem berühmten Cover des letzten Albums der Beatles (Titel Abbey Road) zu sehen war, liegt weniger als 2 km westlich des Regent’s Park. Tritt in die Fußstapfen unzähliger Fans und mach ein Foto auf dem Fußgängerübergang, genau wie auf dem Abbey Road Album der Gruppe.

Mach dich darauf gefasst dass du die Passanten und die Autofahrer verärgern wirst! Hier ist nähmlich immer dicker Verkehr! Gegenüber des berühmten Zebrastreifens befinden sich auch die Abbey Road Studios , in denen die Beatles das oben erwähnte Album aufgenommen haben, sowie ein Souvenirladen.

Ja, leider naht sich deine 4-tägigen Reiseroute in London schon ihrem Ende.

Es ist nun Zeit für deine letzte Reise-Etappe:

Um deinen Besuch in der Stadt zu beenden, kannst du dich für eines dieser beiden Museen entscheiden:

• Madame Tussauds Wachsfiguren Museum: 20 Minuten mit dem Bus von der Abbey Road entfernt und eines der meistbesuchten Museen in London.

Es ist ein bisschen wie das Grévin-Museum in Paris, nur schicker und größer!

Plane 2 bis 3 Stunden ein , um dich mit allen Berühmtheiten fotografieren zu lassen … oder besser gesagt mit ihren Wachs-Imitaten! Die meisten von ihnen sind unglaublich realistisch!

Du musst deine Tickets im Voraus buchen , indem du auf die folgende grüne Schaltfläche klickst:

• British Museum : Wenn du dich mehr für Kultur und Geschichte interessierst, ist dieses Museum , das 20 Minuten mit der U-Bahn vom Regent’s Park entfernt liegt, der perfekte Abschluss für deinen Urlaub.

Der Eintritt ist kostenlos . Hier erfährst du mehr über die Geschichte der Zivilisationen, vor allem dank der vielen archäologischen Relikte (darunter der berühmte Stein von Rosette).

Dieses Museum besitzt eine der reichsten Sammlungen der Welt mit mehr als 7 Millionen Exponaten.

So, jetzt weißt du, was du in 4 Tagen in London unternehmen kannst und wie du deine Reise optimal planen kannst , dank meiner zahlreichen Informationen und Reisetipps!

Vergiss aber auch nicht, vor deiner Abreise, deine Unterkunft zu buchen!

Leider (und es muss gesagt sein) sind die Preise für eine Unterkunft in London ziemlich hoch und es ist nicht einfach, günstige Hotels zu finden, vor allem im Zentrum Londons. Die besten Angebote werden immer schon Monate im Voraus gebucht.

Deshalb musst auch du, so früh wie möglich buchen , um die besten Preise zu erhalten!

Wenn du deine Reisedaten also bereits kennst, solltest du unbedingt deine Unterkunft gleich jetzt hier buchen.

Hier ist meine Auswahl der besten Hotels in London, je nach Budget.

• The Chamberlain: Ganz in der Nähe der Tower Bridge, des Tower of London und des Themseufers. Dieses Hotel im britischen Stil bietet gemütliche, komfortable Doppelzimmer ab 120€ pro Nacht, Frühstück 12€. Pluspunkte: Ein Smartphone wird zur Verfügung gestellt, die hervorragende Lage, das freundliche Personal und die bequeme Bettwäsche. Mein Favorit, sehr gutes Preis-Leistungs-Verhältnis!
• Hotel Indigo London – Kensington: Dieses Hotel liegt im Bezirk Kensington und Chelsea und ganz in der Nähe einer U-Bahn-Station. Gut ausgestattete, ruhige, einladende Doppelzimmer ab 200€, Frühstück ab 19€. Pluspunkte: De ruhige Lage, das gemütliche Ambiente, das freundliche lächelnde und effiziente Personal.
• Haymarket Hotel, Firmdale Hotels: 5* Hotel in der Nähe von Londons „Theaterstadtviertel“, nur wenige Minuten zu Fuß vom St. James Park und 15 Minuten vom Buckingham Palace entfernt. Wirklich komfortable, geräumige und ruhige Doppelzimmer ab 390€ pro Nacht, Frühstück 20€. Pluspunkte: Perfekte Lage, charmantes Personal und ausgezeichnete Bettwäsche. Die beste Wahl für einen romantischen Aufenthalt in London!
• The Soho Hotel, Firmdale Hotels: Ein Luxushotel im Herzen von London, 5 Minuten von der Oxford Street und dem Stadtviertel Soho und nur 10 Minuten vom Piccadilly Circus entfernt. Sehr geräumige Designer-Doppelzimmer mit prächtigem Dekor ab 500€ pro Nacht, Frühstück 29€. Pluspunkte: Die perfekte geografische Lage, die prächtigen Zimmer und das üppige Frühstück. Das beste Hotel in London für einen Luxusaufenthalt!

Wenn du nach einem Londoner Hotel suchst , das nicht zu teuer ist, solltest du dir die „Z Hotel“ ansehen. Man findet diese Hotel-Kette in verschiedenen londoner Stadtviertel und die Preise beginnen bei 60 € pro Nacht. Sie sind die beste Wahl für eine günstige Unterkunft in London.

• Z Hotel Shoreditch
• Z Hotel Gloucester Place
• Z Hotel City
• Z Hotel Victoria
• Z Hotel Piccadilly
• Z Hotel Soho

Wenn du planst, 4 Tage mit deinen Kindern in London zu verbringen , kannst du sicher sein, dass sie sich nicht langweilen und die meisten Attraktionen wirklich lieben werden. Möglicherweise musst du diese Reiseroute jedoch etwas anpassen , je nach Alter und Interessen deiner Kinder.

Wenn du mit deinen Kindern in London bist, kannst du folgendes machen:

• Verbringe etwas weniger Zeit in den Museen und mehr Zeit in den Parks (wenn das Wetter es zulässt). Gut zu wissen: Die meisten Londoner Museen kann man jedoch gut mit Kindern besuchen, denn viele bieten kurze, kindergerechte spielerische Führungen an.
• Tower of London ist, mit seinem mittelalterlichen Ambiente, zweifellos eine der Attraktionen, die deine Kinder am meisten lieben werden
• Fahrt mit dem London Eye: Deine Kinder werden das Gefühl haben auf einem riesigen Karussell zu sein.
• Wachablösung vor dem Buckingham Palace: Zufriedene Gesichter und leuchtende Augen garantiert!
• Familienmusical Abend in Soho: Auch eine super Idee mit Kindern!
• Bustour mit einem roten Doppeldeckerbus: Setze dich ganz oben hin mit deinen Kindern, und wenn du kannst, auch ganz nach vorne! Für Kinder ist diese Art von Fahrt ein echtes Abenteuer. Buche diese Doppeldecker-Hop-on-Hop-off-Bustour, indem du hier klickst!

Außerdem hast du die Wahl zwischen mehreren Themenparks: Shrek Adventure Tour (Dreamworks) , Legoland oder Kidzania.

Wenn du oder deine Kinder Harry Potter-Fans seid, kannst du auch einen Tag in den Harry Potter Studios verbringen , die etwas außerhalb der Stadt liegen.

Das ist wirklich ein magisches Erlebnis!

Die beste Tour beinhaltet die Eintrittskarte für die Harry Potter Studios und den Transport hin und zurück (ab deinem Hotel).

Du musst diese Tour buchen, indem du auf die folgende Schaltfläche klickst:

Wenn du meiner Reiseroute für 4 Tage in London gefolgt bist und noch mehr erkunden möchtest, solltest du auch meinen anderen Reiseführer mit den 20 besten Sehenswürdigkeiten un Aktivitäten in London lesen. Er wird dir helfen deinen Urlaub zu vervollständigen.

Für sofortiges Lesen, klicke hier : Top 20 London Sehenswürdigkeiten .

Vielleicht bekommst du sogar Lust, länger in London zu bleiben! Warum nicht 5 Tage oder sogar eine ganze Woche dort verbringen?

Damit du dir deinen Tagesablauf während deiner 4 Tage in London besser vorstellen kannst , habe ich diese Karte erstellt, auf der alle Orte verzeichnet sind, die ich in diesem Reiseführer erwähne.

Du kannst die Legende der Karte anzeigen, indem du auf die linke obere Schaltfläche, die mit einem kleinen Pfeil, klickst. Du kannst so die vorgeschlagene Reiseroute für jeden Tag einsehen.

Da die Flugpreise nach London enorm variieren, ist es ratsam, sie so früh wie möglich zu vergleichen. Du kannst u nseren Flugkomparator in Zusammenarbeit mit Skyscanner verwenden. Du stellst so sicher, dass du den besten Preis erhältst.

Wenn du nach der Lektüre dieses Reiseführers noch Hilfe bei der Planung deiner 4-tägigen London-Reise benötigst, zögere nicht, mir deine Fragen im Kommentarbereich am Ende dieses Artikels zu stellen.

Entdecke all meine Artikel über England : Meine besten Tipps, um deine Reise vorzubereiten!

Du benutzt Pinterest? Hier ist das Bild zum Anpinnen!

Schöpfer des Voyage Tips Blogs, Reise und Fotoliebhaber.

Related Stories

Mailand in 4 Tagen: Reiseroute + Tipps

Mailand in 3 Tagen: Routenvorschlag + Tipps

Mailand in 2 Tagen: Routenvorschlag + Tipps

Leave a reply cancel reply.

Your Name (required)

Your Email (required)

Your Website (optional)

Meinen Namen, meine E-Mail-Adresse und meine Website in diesem Browser speichern, bis ich wieder kommentiere.

• Naher Osten
• Billiger Mietwagen: mein bester Tipp
• Zurück zur Startseite

• Share full article

Advertisement

Supported by

Cameron, on U.S. Trip, Takes a Risk and Meets With Trump

David Cameron, the British foreign secretary, said he spoke with Donald Trump, the former, and possibly future, president, about Ukraine and the Israel-Gaza conflict.

By Mark Landler

Reporting from London

When Britain’s foreign secretary, David Cameron, went to Washington on Tuesday, he made all the usual stops, from the State Department to Capitol Hill. But it was his pilgrimage to Palm Beach, Fla., where he met former President Donald J. Trump for dinner on Monday evening at Mar-a-Lago, that grabbed most of the attention.

Mr. Cameron is the first top British government official to meet with Mr. Trump since he left the White House. His visit — ostensibly to cajole Mr. Trump into backing additional American military aid to Ukraine — attests to Mr. Trump’s influence over a far-right faction of House Republicans who have been holding up a vote.

It also underscores how the electoral calendar is affecting political dynamics on both sides of the Atlantic. Mr. Cameron, a onetime prime minister, has emerged as almost a shadow British leader abroad, standing in for Prime Minister Rishi Sunak, who is busy with a looming general election at home.

In traveling to meet Mr. Trump, the presumptive Republican presidential nominee, Mr. Cameron was reaching out to a once, and potentially future, American president — one whose jaundiced views on Ukraine are seen as the biggest hurdle to the continuation of much-needed American aid for the Ukrainian military.

“We had a good meeting,” Mr. Cameron said of Mr. Trump, while standing alongside Secretary of State Antony J. Blinken after their own session at the State Department on Tuesday. “It was a private meeting.”

Mr. Cameron said he and Mr. Trump discussed Ukraine, the Israel-Gaza conflict and other geopolitical issues, but he declined to say whether he had made any headway on convincing Mr. Trump to provide additional aid to Ukraine. He said he delivered the same message he gives to other American leaders: “The best thing we can do this year is to keep the Ukrainians in this fight.”

Mr. Trump has not commented on the dinner, which included Britain’s ambassador to Washington, Karen Pierce. His campaign issued a statement saying they discussed “the need for NATO countries to meet their defense spending requirements and ending the killing in Ukraine.” They also shared their “mutual admiration for the late Queen Elizabeth II.”

So far, Mr. Cameron’s lobbying campaign in Washington has been met with decidedly mixed results. While he said he looked forward to meetings with Republicans in the House and Senate on Tuesday and Wednesday, he was not scheduled to meet with Speaker Mike Johnson, the Louisiana Republican who is the pivotal figure in scheduling a House vote on military aid to Ukraine.

The two men last met in December, when Mr. Cameron also saw Representative Marjorie Taylor Greene, the far-right Georgia Republican who stridently opposes further aid. Two months later, she lashed out at Mr. Cameron, saying he had accused Republicans of appeasing President Vladimir V. Putin of Russia.

“David Cameron needs to worry about his own country,” Ms. Taylor Greene said, adding an epithet.

At his news conference with Mr. Blinken, Mr. Cameron acknowledged that he viewed his visits to Capitol Hill with “great trepidation,” noting that, “It’s not for foreign politicians to tell legislators in another country what to do.”

Mr. Cameron played down the Mar-a-Lago meeting, saying it was routine for senior British and American officials to meet opposition candidates. As prime minister, he noted, he met with the Republican presidential nominee, Mitt Romney, when he came to London on a fund-raising trip. Mr. Blinken met the Labour Party leader, Keir Starmer, at a security conference in Munich.

Still, there is little routine about meeting a former president at the Palm Beach estate that served as his winter White House and is still his political bastion. Mr. Trump used Mar-a-Lago for summit meetings with foreign leaders like President Xi Jinping of China . More recently, he welcomed a like-minded leader, Prime Minister Viktor Orban of Hungary .

Among Republicans, a pilgrimage to Mar-a-Lago has at times been an exercise in political validation. Kevin McCarthy, the former House speaker, went there three weeks after the attack on the Capitol in January 2021, in a fruitless bid to win Mr. Trump’s favor. Allies like Kristi Noem, the South Dakota governor, and Kari Lake, the Arizona TV anchor-turned-politician, are regular visitors.

Diplomats in Britain said Mr. Cameron’s visit was a risk, but characteristic of how he has approached his job from the start. On issues from Ukraine to Israel’s military campaign in Gaza, he has pushed the envelope in his public statements. With Britain’s Conservative government lagging Labour by double digits in the polls and facing voters in the fall, some said Mr. Cameron had little to lose.

“Flattering Trump about his importance and significance on this issue is an astute move on Cameron’s part,” said Simon Fraser, a former head of Britain’s Foreign Office. “Let’s see whether it delivers.”

Mr. Fraser predicted that Mr. Cameron’s visit would get a mixed reception in Britain: applauded by those who view it primarily through a foreign-policy lens; criticized by those, he said, “who can’t stand Trump.” But he said Mr. Cameron’s entree to Mr. Trump spoke to his network of global contacts, a legacy of his time as prime minister.

“He’s bringing more reach and energy and impact to British foreign policy,” Mr. Fraser said.

Leslie Vinjamuri, the director of the U.S. and Americas program at Chatham House, the British research institution, said, “It may not feel tasteful, but it’s shrewd, pragmatic politics of the kind Britain especially has historically been so good at, and probably of the kind that will work best with Trump.”

“There is a lot at stake in U.S. defense of Ukraine and Europe’s security,” she added, “and frankly, I think the effort to influence the U.S. may be wiser and more effective than the aspiration to Trump-proof Europe.”

Mr. Cameron has had a bumpy history with Mr. Trump. In 2016, as prime minister, he condemned Mr. Trump’s campaign proposal to place a temporary ban on allowing Muslims to enter the United States.

Asked in Parliament whether Mr. Trump should be banned from Britain, Mr. Cameron demurred but said, “His remarks are divisive, stupid and wrong, and I think if he came to visit our country, I think he’d unite us all against him.”

Even Mr. Cameron’s welcoming of Mr. Romney in 2012 had its awkward moments. Mr. Romney, who had organized the 2002 Winter Olympic Games in Salt Lake City, questioned whether London was ready to play host to the summer games, citing reports about security concerns.

“We are holding an Olympic Games in one of the busiest, most active, bustling cities anywhere in the world,” Mr. Cameron shot back. “Of course, it’s easier if you hold an Olympic Games in the middle of nowhere.”

Maggie Haberman contributed reporting.

An earlier version of this article misstated the year of the Winter Olympic Games that Mitt Romney had organized in Salt Lake City. It was the 2002 Games, not 1988.

How we handle corrections

Mark Landler is the London bureau chief of The Times, covering the United Kingdom, as well as American foreign policy in Europe, Asia and the Middle East. He has been a journalist for more than three decades. More about Mark Landler